User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations]
Introduction
Introduction
Thank you for choosing this machine.
This User’s Guide contains details on the operation methods required for us-
ing the network connection and scanner functions of the bizhub 200/250/
350, precautions on their use, and basic troubleshooting procedures. Care-
fully read this User’s Guide before using the machine, to ensure proper and
efficient use. After reading the manual, store it in the designated holder so
that it can easily be referred to when questions or problems arise during op-
eration.
Views of the actual equipment may be slightly different from the illustrations
used in this User’s Guide.
®
Energy Star
®
As an ENERGY STAR Partner, we have determined that this machine meets
®
the ENERGY STAR Guidelines for energy efficiency.
®
What is an ENERGY STAR Product?
®
An ENERGY STAR product has a special feature that allows it to automat-
ically switch to a “low-power mode” after a period of inactivity. An ENERGY
®
STAR product uses energy more efficiently, saves you money on utility bills
and helps protect the environment.
200/250/350
x-1
Introduction
Trademarks and registered trademarks
KONICA MINOLTA, KONICA MINOLTA Logo, and The essentials of imaging
are registered trademarks or trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA HOLDINGS,
INC.
PageScope and bizhub are registered trademarks or trademarks of KONICA
MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
Netscape Communications, the Netscape Communications logo, Netscape
Navigator, Netscape Communicator, and Netscape are trademarks of Net-
scape Communications Corporation.
Compact-VJE
Copyright 1986-2003 VACS Corp.
®
RC4 is a registered trademark or trademark of RSA Security Inc. in the Unit-
ed States and/or other countries.
®
RSA is a registered trademark or trademark of RSA Security Inc. RSA
®
BSAFE is a registered trademark or trademark of RSA Security Inc. in the
United States and/or other countries.
License information
This product includes RSA BSAFE Cryptographic software
from RSA Security Inc.
OpenSSL Statement
OpenSSL License
Copyright © 1998-2000 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modifica-
tion, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright no-
tice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documen-
tation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must
display the following acknowledgment:
“This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for
use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)”
x-2
200/250/350
Introduction
4. The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project” must not be used
to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior
written permission. For written permission, please contact openssl-
5. Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL” nor
may “OpenSSL” appear in their names without prior written permission
of the OpenSSL Project.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following ac-
knowledgment:
“This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for
use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT “AS IS” AND
ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIM-
ITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FIT-
NESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CON-
SEQENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCURE-
MENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
([email protected]). This product includes software written by Tim Hud-
son ([email protected]).
Original SSLeay License
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@crypt-
soft.com).
The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the fol-
lowing conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code
found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, Ihash, DES, etc., code; not just
the SSL code.
The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the
same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@crypt-
soft.com).
Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as such any Copyright notices in the
code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young
should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This
can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documen-
tation (online or textual) provided with the package.
200/250/350
x-3
Introduction
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modifica-
tion, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright no-
tice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documen-
tation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must
display the following acknowledgement:
“This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the rouines from the library be-
ing used are not cryptographic related.
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from
the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledge-
ment:
“This product includes software written by Tin Hudson (tjh@crypt-
soft.com)”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS” AND ANY EX-
PRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AU-
THOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCI-
DENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILI-
TY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or de-
rivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be cop-
ied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public
Licence.]
All other product names mentioned are trademarks or registered trademarks
of their respective companies
x-4
200/250/350
Introduction
Contents
Introduction
Energy Star ..................................................................................... x-1
Contents ............................................................................................ x-5
Structure of the manual ................................................................x-16
Notations .......................................................................................x-17
Images that are used ....................................................................x-17
User’s Guides .................................................................................. x-18
User’s Guide [Box Operations] .....................................................x-18
User’s Guide [Facsimile Operations] .............................................x-19
Explanation of manual conventions .............................................. x-20
1
2
Features
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
Scan to E-Mail ................................................................................... 1-2
Scan to FTP ....................................................................................... 1-4
Scan to SMB ...................................................................................... 1-5
Scan to HDD ...................................................................................... 1-6
Internet faxing ................................................................................... 1-7
Setup
2.1
Connecting to a LAN ........................................................................ 2-2
Connecting the LAN cable ............................................................. 2-2
2.2
Specifying the network settings ...................................................... 2-4
Network setting table ..................................................................... 2-4
To specify initial network settings .................................................. 2-6
2.3
Basic Settings ................................................................................... 2-9
Settings .......................................................................................... 2-9
DHCP ............................................................................................. 2-9
IP Address Setting ....................................................................... 2-10
200/250/350
x-5
Gateway ........................................................................................2-12
2.4
DNS Settings ....................................................................................2-15
2.5
2.6
2.7
POP3 Settings ..................................................................................2-26
2.8
2.9
2.10 Scanner Settings .............................................................................2-36
Activity Report ..............................................................................2-37
Gateway TX ...................................................................................2-40
Subject Registration .....................................................................2-41
Divide Settings ..............................................................................2-42
2.11 LDAP Setting ....................................................................................2-44
LDAP Search .................................................................................2-44
LDAP Server Setting .....................................................................2-46
To specify the LDAP server settings .............................................2-47
Search Default Setting ..................................................................2-48
2.12 IP Filtering ........................................................................................2-50
To specify IP filtering settings .......................................................2-50
x-6
200/250/350
Introduction
To the network administrator ....................................................... 2-52
Registering a domain name ......................................................... 2-53
3
Scan to E-Mail
3.1
3.2
3.3
Quality .......................................................................................... 3-15
Density ......................................................................................... 3-17
3.4
Specifying double-sided transmission ......................................... 3-23
Specifying priority transmission ................................................... 3-25
Specifying timer transmission ...................................................... 3-26
Specifying the stamp setting ....................................................... 3-27
Changing the subject ................................................................... 3-28
Specifying a reply address ........................................................... 3-29
Specifying a file name .................................................................. 3-31
Other functions ............................................................................ 3-32
3.5
If transmission could not be completed ....................................... 3-33
Viewing a transmission report ...................................................... 3-33
Resending .................................................................................... 3-34
200/250/350
x-7
Introduction
3.6
Registering destinations .................................................................3-35
To program a one-touch dial button .............................................3-36
4
Scan to FTP
4.1
Specifying a destination with a one-touch dial button ..................4-2
4.2
Quality ...........................................................................................4-11
Density ..........................................................................................4-13
Original Size Set. ...........................................................................4-14
4.3
To specify the transmission report printing conditions .................4-17
Specifying the e-mail notification destination ...............................4-24
Specifying a file name ...................................................................4-25
4.4
4.5
If transmission could not be completed ........................................4-27
Viewing a transmission report .......................................................4-27
Resending .....................................................................................4-28
Registering destinations .................................................................4-29
Programming a one-touch dial button ..........................................4-29
To program a one-touch dial button .............................................4-30
Changing or deleting a one-touch dial button ..............................4-36
Copying a one-touch dial button ..................................................4-37
x-8
200/250/350
Introduction
5
Scan to SMB
5.1
Specifying a destination with a one-touch dial button ................. 5-2
5.2
Quality .......................................................................................... 5-10
Density ......................................................................................... 5-12
Original Size Set. .......................................................................... 5-13
5.3
To specify the transmission report printing conditions ................ 5-16
Specifying the e-mail notification destination .............................. 5-23
5.4
5.5
6
Internet faxing
6.1
Specifying a destination with a one-touch dial button ................. 6-2
Selecting a one-touch button ........................................................ 6-2
Specifying a destination by touching a one-touch dial button ...... 6-2
Entering the number of a one-touch dial button ............................ 6-5
Searching for a one-touch dial button ........................................... 6-8
Specifying chain dialing ............................................................... 6-11
6.2
Entering an address ....................................................................... 6-12
To enter an address ..................................................................... 6-12
200/250/350
x-9
6.3
6.4
Quality ...........................................................................................6-16
Density ..........................................................................................6-18
Specifying double-sided transmission ..........................................6-25
6.5
6.6
Receiving Internet faxes .................................................................6-36
Settings for Internet faxing ............................................................6-36
6.7
Changing or deleting a one-touch dial button ..............................6-45
Copying a one-touch dial button ..................................................6-46
Registering/deleting a secondary destination ..............................6-47
7
Using an LDAP server
7.1
Searching the destination information from the server .................7-2
Basic Search and Detail Search .....................................................7-2
To search the destination information ............................................7-3
7.2
Registering destination information to one-touch dial buttons ....7-6
To register destination information to a one-touch dial button ......7-6
x-10
200/250/350
Introduction
8
8.1
Connection ........................................................................................ 8-2
Network tab (Administrator mode) ................................................. 8-4
8.2
Page structure ................................................................................ 8-7
8.3
8.4
Deleting a one-touch dial destination .......................................... 8-26
FAX Program Registration (User mode) ....................................... 8-28
Registering fax programs ............................................................. 8-30
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
TSI Registration .............................................................................. 8-42
To register transmission sources ................................................. 8-42
TX Settings (Administrator mode) ................................................. 8-43
Specifying the transmission settings ........................................... 8-44
Com. Mode .................................................................................. 8-44
8.9
RX Settings (Administrator mode) ................................................ 8-46
Specifying the reception settings ................................................. 8-47
8.10 Scan Setting (Administrator mode) ............................................... 8-48
Specifying the scan settings ........................................................ 8-49
200/250/350
x-11
8.15 IP Filtering ........................................................................................8-62
Deleting an LDAP server ...............................................................8-68
8.18 E-Mail/Internet FAX (Administrator mode) ....................................8-69
Specifying other settings ..............................................................8-77
8.19 FTP Configuration (Administrator mode) ......................................8-78
Specifying the FTP settings ..........................................................8-78
8.20 SNMP ................................................................................................8-80
Specifying the SNMP setting ........................................................8-80
Creating certificates ......................................................................8-83
8.22 User Authentication (Administrator mode) ...................................8-89
Specifying user authentication settings ........................................8-90
9
Specifying management settings
9.1
Available parameters ........................................................................9-2
Administrator Management 1 .........................................................9-2
Administrator Management 2 .........................................................9-2
9.2
Registering transmission source names .........................................9-4
To register a transmission source name .........................................9-4
x-12
200/250/350
Introduction
9.3
Specifying Comm. Menu settings .................................................. 9-9
9.4
9.5
Specifying the print timing for received documents
(RX Settings) .................................................................................... 9-12
Memory Lock Time ...................................................................... 9-12
(Report Settings) ............................................................................. 9-18
Specifying TX Report settings ...................................................... 9-18
9.6
9.7
(Document Management) .............................................................. 9-23
To specify the processing method for received documents ....... 9-23
lines .............................................................................................. 9-26
9.8
Software switch settings .............................................................. 9-29
Specifying whether or not the destination name is inserted
Blocking calls from callers that are not specified (mode 306) ..... 9-37
Specifying Internet fax settings (mode 350) ................................. 9-38
Specifying whether to add the transmission source information
when faxing or when forwarding received documents
(mode 352) ................................................................................... 9-39
Specifying SMTP transmission timeout settings (mode 356) ...... 9-40
Specifying SMTP reception timeout settings (mode 357) ............ 9-41
Specifying POP3 reception timeout settings (mode 358) ............ 9-42
Specifying the default address input screen (mode 366) ............ 9-43
Specifying DNS query timeout setting (mode 367) ...................... 9-44
Including the scan transmission log in the activity report
(mode 368) ................................................................................... 9-45
200/250/350
x-13
Specifying the transmission interval when e-mail messages are
Specifying the Internet fax full mode function settings
(mode 373) ....................................................................................9-48
Specifying use of registered user authentication information to
log on to the LDAP server (mode 466) ..........................................9-50
enable the password rules (mode 469) .........................................9-51
Specifying settings to limit the use of communication modes-1
(mode 476) ....................................................................................9-54
Specifying settings to limit the use of communication modes-3/
(mode 478) ....................................................................................9-58
9.9
Specifying SSL/TLS settings ..........................................................9-60
10.3 Checking the destinations registered in one-touch dial
buttons (One-Touch List) ................................................................10-7
Printing the One-Touch List ..........................................................10-7
Contents of the list ........................................................................10-8
10.4 Printing the mail program list .........................................................10-9
To print the mail program list ........................................................10-9
Contents of the list ......................................................................10-10
10.5 Checking the function settings (Setting List) ..............................10-11
Printing the setting list ................................................................10-11
Contents of the list ......................................................................10-12
x-14
200/250/350
Introduction
11.1 When the following are displayed ................................................. 11-2
11.2 Network error list ............................................................................ 11-3
11.3 Troubleshooting .............................................................................. 11-6
Other ............................................................................................ 11-7
12 Appendix
12.1 Product specifications ................................................................... 12-2
Internet fax specifications ............................................................ 12-2
Scan to E-Mail specifications ...................................................... 12-2
Scan to FTP specifications .......................................................... 12-2
Scan to SMB specifications ......................................................... 12-3
12.2 Entering text .................................................................................... 12-4
To type text .................................................................................. 12-4
List of available characters .......................................................... 12-5
12.3 Glossary ........................................................................................... 12-6
12.4 Index .............................................................................................. 12-12
200/250/350
x-15
Introduction
About this manual
This User’s Guide covers the bizhub 200, 250, and 350 network and scan-
ning functions.
This section introduces the structure of the manual and notations used for
product names, etc.
This manual is intended for users who understand the basic operations of
computers and the machine. For operating procedures of the Windows or
Macintosh operating system and application programs, refer to the respec-
tive manuals.
Structure of the manual
This manual consists of the following chapters.
Chapter 1 Features
Chapter 2 Setup
Chapter 3 Scan to E-Mail
Chapter 4 Scan to FTP
Chapter 5 Scan to SMB
Chapter 6 Internet faxing
Chapter 7 Using an LDAP server
Chapter 8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
Chapter 9 Specifying the management settings
Chapter 10 Reports and lists
Chapter 11 Scan function troubleshooting
Chapter 12 Appendix
x-16
200/250/350
Introduction
Notations
Product name
Notations in the manual
This machine, 200/250/350
Printer controller
Windows 98
bizhub 200/250/350
Internal network controller
Microsoft Windows 98
Microsoft Windows Me
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0
Microsoft Windows 2000
Microsoft Windows XP
Windows Me
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 2000
Windows XP
When the operating systems above are writ- Windows 98/Me
ten together
Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP
Windows 95/98/Me/NT 4.0/2000/XP
Images that are used
Generally, the touch panel screens and application windows that appear in
this manual show that the options have not been installed.
200/250/350
x-17
Introduction
User’s Guides
The following User’s Guides have been prepared for this machine.
User’s Guide [Copy Operations]
This manual contains details on basic operations and the operating proce-
dures for the various copy functions.
-
Refer to this User’s Guide for details on operating procedures for copy
functions, including precautions on installation/use, turning the machine
on/off, loading paper, and troubleshooting operations such as clearing
paper misfeeds.
User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations] (this manual)
This manual contains details on specifying network functions for standard
equipment and on operations for scanning functions.
-
Refer to this User’s Guide for details on operating procedures for network
functions and for using the Scan to E-Mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to SMB
and Internet fax operations.
User’s Guide [Box Operations]
This manual contains details on operating procedures for using the Box func-
tions.
-
Refer to this User’s Guide for details on printing a proof copy or a locked
job and on functions that use the optional hard disk drive, such as routing
and saving documents in boxes.
User’s Guide [Print Operations]
This manual contains details on operating procedures using the standard
built-in printer controller.
-
For details on the printing functions, refer to User’s Guide (PDF file) on
User Software CD-ROM.
Quick Guide [Print Operations]
This manual contains details on operating procedures using the standard
built-in printer controller.
-
Refer to this Quick Guide for basic operating procedures on the printing
functions.
User’s Guide [Advanced Scan Operations]
This manual contains details on the operating procedures for the functions
that can be used when the optional scanner unit is installed.
-
Refer to this User’s Guide for details on using the IP address faxing, IP
Relay and Scan to PC operations and on using IP Scanner.
x-18
200/250/350
Introduction
Explanation of manual conventions
Titles indicate the contents of the section.
Text that appears in this manner
describes the function limitations
and options required to use certain
functions.
Auxiliary functions
8
8.10 Printing copies overlapping a different image ( Image
Overlay function)
Images previously stored on the hard disk can be printed overlapping copies.
[
]
To store an overlay image (Store Overlay)
Names highlighted as shown above
indicate keys on the control panel,
buttons in the touch panel, and the
power switches.
The Image Overlay function is available only if optional hard disk HD-
504 is installed.
1
2
Position the overlay document to be stored on the hard disk.
Press the [Utility/Coun-
ter] key, and then touch
[User Setting].
The User Setting screen
appears.
Touch panel screens are shown to
check the actual display.
CAUTION
Handling toner and toner bottles
Do not throw toner or the toner bottle into a fire.
Toner expelled from the fire may cause burns.
Text that appears in this manner
describes supplemental information,
such as precautions, references and
actions, relating to steps.
3
Select the size of the
area to be scanned.
Tocancelchangesto
the settings, touch
[Cancel].
What do the Book
Erase settings do?
?
If a Book Erase set-
ting is selected, the
dark shadows
around the docu-
ment or along the center of the document can be erased.
4
Touch [Enter].
Text that appears in this manner
provides answers to problems and
questions that may occur during
operation.
8-30
200/250/350
WARNING , CAUTION
Text highlighted in this manner indicates precautions to ensure safe use of this machine.
“Warning” indicates instructions that, when not observed, may result in fatal or critical injuries.
“Caution” indicates instructions that, when not observed, may result in serious injuries or
property damage.
(The page shown above is an example only.)
x-20
200/250/350
Introduction
Auxiliary functions
8
5
Select the document ori-
entation.
Tocancelchangesto
the settings, touch
[Cancel].
Reminder
Text highlighted in this manner
indicates operation precautions.
Carefully read and observe this
type of information.
6
Press the [Start] key.
The document is scanned, and the overlay image is stored.
Reminder
Be sure to use toner bottles of the specified model, otherwise the ma-
chine may be damaged.
Note
The size of the scanned area appears on the button where the image is
stored.
Detail
For details on replacing the toner bottle, refer to To replace the toner
bottle on page 9-4.
200/250/350
8-31
Detail
Note
Text highlighted in this manner provides
more detailed information concerning
operating procedures or references to
sections containing additional information.
If necessary, refer to the indicated sections.
Text highlighted in this manner
contains references and supplemental
information concerning operating
procedures and other descriptions.
We recommend that this information
be read carefully.
(The page shown above is an example only.)
200/250/350
x-21
Introduction
x-22
200/250/350
1 Features
Features
1
1
Features
1.1
Scan to E-Mail
The Scan to E-Mail operation is used to send images scanned on this ma-
chine as e-mail attachments. By registering a destination with a one-touch
dial button, paper documents can be sent by e-mail simply by touching a
button in the One-Touch screen.
-
The original document is attached to an e-mail (MIME format) and sent as
an image file in the TIFF format or the PDF format. In order to view the
received image on a computer, e-mail software that supports the MIME
format and software that displays the TIFF format or PDF format must be
installed.
-
Images in the TIFF format can be viewed with a TIFF viewer, which is
standard in Windows.
-
-
Images in the PDF format can be viewed with Adobe Reader.
This machine must be connected to a LAN, and the network settings
must be specified. For details, refer to Chapter 2, “Setup” on page 2-2.
For details, refer to Chapter 3, “Scan to E-Mail” on page 3-2.
-
1-2
200/250/350
Features
1
E-mail server
Client computer
Intranet
Internet
E-mail server
Client computer
200/250/350
1-3
Features
1
1.2
Scan to FTP
The Scan to FTP operation is used to upload the scanned data of an original
document to an FTP sever on a network. By registering a destination with a
one-touch dial button, paper documents can be converted into data and up-
loaded simply by touching a button in the One-Touch screen. The uploaded
data can be downloaded to a computer on the network.
-
The original document is sent as an image file in the TIFF format or the
PDF format.
-
You can specify whether to have an e-mail message sent to notify you of
the location where the data was saved when the FTP transmission is
complete (E-mail Notification function).
-
-
This machine must be connected to a LAN, and the network settings
must be specified. For details, refer to Chapter 2, “Setup” on page 2-2.
For details, refer to Chapter 4, “Scan to FTP” on page 4-2.
FTP server
Intranet
Internet
FTP server
1-4
200/250/350
Features
1
1.3
Scan to SMB
The Scan to SMB operation is used to send the scanned data of an original
document to a shared folder on a computer on the network. By registering a
destination with a one-touch dial button, paper documents can be converted
into data and sent simply by touching a button in the One-Touch screen.
In order to perform a Scan to SMB operation, a shared folder must be spec-
ified in advance on the computer where the data is to be received.
-
-
-
Data cannot be saved in shared folders created on the domain controller
of Windows Server 2003.
The original document is sent as an image file in the TIFF format or PDF
format.
You can specify that an e-mail message be sent to notify the recipient of
the location where the data was saved when the Scan to SMB operation
is complete (E-mail Notification function).
-
Images in the TIFF format can be viewed with a TIFF viewer, which is
standard in Windows.
-
-
Images in the PDF format can be viewed with Adobe Reader.
This machine must be connected to a LAN, and the network settings
must be specified. For details, refer to Chapter 2, “Setup” on page 2-2.
For details, refer to Chapter 5, “Scan to SMB” on page 5-2.
-
Client computer
Intranet
200/250/350
1-5
Features
1
1.4
Scan to HDD
Data specified for copying, scanning or printing can be saved in a user box
on the optional HDD. The saved file can be printed, downloaded or routed,
depending on the mode in which it was saved.
-
-
-
-
The original document is sent as an image file in the TIFF format or PDF
format.
You can specify whether to have an e-mail message sent to notify you of
the location where the data was saved (E-mail Notification function).
This machine must be connected to a LAN, and the network settings
must be specified. For details, refer to Chapter 2, “Setup” on page 2-2.
For details, refer to User’s Guide [Box Operations].
FTP server
Client computer
Intranet
Print
HDD
1-6
200/250/350
Features
1
1.5
Internet faxing
The Internet fax operation attaches the image data of an original document
to an e-mail message and sends it over the Internet or an intranet to an In-
ternet fax terminal.
You can send data simply by specifying an e-mail address at the same time
that a fax number is specified for a transmission using a general telephone
line.
By registering a destination with a one-touch dial button, the data can be
sent simply by touching a button in the One-Touch screen.
The original document is attached to an e-mail (MIME format) and sent as an
image file in the TIFF format.
-
Internet faxing operates in an environment quite different from fax trans-
missions over a telephone line, and faxes are not transmitted directly to
the destination. Therefore, there are certain limitations.
-
When sending an Internet fax, the reception results at the destination can
be checked. In addition, the reception capabilities of the destination ma-
chine can be detected and the transmission adapted accordingly (the
destination machine must support full mode).
-
-
This machine must be connected to a LAN, and the network settings
must be specified. For details, refer to Chapter 2, “Setup” on page 2-2.
For details, refer to Chapter 6, “Internet faxing” on page 6-2.
200/250/350
1-7
Features
1
E-mail server
Client computer
Internet fax
terminal
Intranet
Internet
E-mail server
Client computer
1-8
200/250/350
Features
1.6
PageScope Web Connection
A computer can be used to check the transmission/printing status and fax
log of the machine. In addition, one-touch dial buttons and mail programs
can be registered.
PageScope Web Connection provides a User mode page and an Adminis-
trator mode page.
-
This machine must be connected to a LAN, and the network settings
must be specified. For details, refer to Chapter 2, “Setup” on page 2-2.
For details, refer to Chapter 8, “Specifying settings using PageScope
Web Connection” on page 8-2.
-
200/250/350
1-9
Features
1
1-10
200/250/350
2 Setup
Setup
2
2
Setup
2.1
Connecting to a LAN
This machine communicates with the TCP/IP protocol using a LAN. There-
fore, a LAN cable must be connected.
To connect to a LAN, use a LAN cable (Fast Ethernet 100BASE-TX cable).
Connecting the LAN cable
Connect the LAN cable connector to the port (LAN) on the right of this ma-
chine and the other end to the hub.
The port is located on the right side of the machine.
Use a Fast Ethernet 100BASE-TX (category 5) cable for the LAN cable.
Note
The LAN cable is not supplied with this machine. Use a suitable cable for
the installation environment.
2-2
200/250/350
Setup
2
The status of each LED is described below.
LED color
Status
Description
Green and yellow
Off
The machine is not turned on.
The LAN is not properly connected.
Green
Yellow
On
The LAN is properly connected (100 Mbps).
Data is being received (100 Mbps).
Flashes
On
The LAN is properly connected (10 Mbps).
Data is being received (10 Mbps).
Flashes
200/250/350
2-3
Setup
2
2.2
Specifying the network settings
The operations that are available depend on the LAN environment of the ma-
chine.
Specify the network settings according to the LAN environment and the op-
eration to be performed.
!
Detail
Before specifying any settings, contact your network administrator for
the required information.
Specify the network settings in Administrator mode by using either this ma-
chine’s control panel or PageScope Web Connection. The setting procedure
using this machine’s control panel is described below.
To specify the settings using on PageScope Web Connection, refer to Chap-
ter 8, “Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection” on page 8-2.
Network setting table
The network settings required for each operation are described below.
o: A setting is required.
+: A setting is required depending on the environment.
0: The parameter is available.
– : The parameter is not available.
Operation Scan to
E-Mail
Scan to
FTP
Scan to
SMB
Scan to
HDD
Internet
faxing
Parameter
Basic Settings
DHCP
+
+
o
o
o
–
+
o
o
o
–
+
o
o
o
–
+
o
o
o
–
IP Address Setting
Subnet Mask
o
o
o
–
Gateway
Self-Domain Name
Network Board Set
DNS Settings
YES/NO
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Host Name
Domain Name
DNS Server Address
2-4
200/250/350
Setup
2
Operation Scan to
E-Mail
Scan to
FTP
Scan to
SMB
Scan to
HDD
Internet
faxing
Parameter
Machine Name
Machine Name
SMTP Settings
0
0
0
0
0
*1
*1
*1
SMTP Server Address
E-Mail Address
o
o
+
+
+
+
o
o
+
*1
*1
*1
+
+
+
*1
*1
*1
SMTP Authentication User
Name
+
+
+
*1
*1
*1
SMTP Authentication
Password
+
+
+
+
+
POP3 Settings
POP3 Server Address
POP3 User Name
POP3 Password
Auto-RX Check
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
o
o
o
o
Mail/Scan Setting
E-Mail Mode
–
–
–
–
0
Scan Mode
0
0
0
0
–
Scanner Settings
Activity Report
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
0
0
0
–
RX Doc. Header Print
E-Mail Header Text
Gateway TX
0
–
Subject Registration
Divide Settings
0
0
0
0
Ping: Perform as necessary.
Frame Type Setting: Specify when connected to a NetWare server and printing from a computer.
LDAP Settings: Specify when using the LDAP search function.
IP Filtering: Specify the range of IP addresses that can be accessed and the range that is
blocked.
FTP Configuration: Specify in Administrator mode by using PageScope Web Connection.
Proxy IP Address
Port Number
–
–
–
+
+
+
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
FTP Connection Timeout
*1 When using the E-Mail Notification function, also specify the e-mail
transmission (SMTP) settings.
200/250/350
2-5
Setup
2
Reminder
If the [Utility/Counter] key was pressed to register items and specify set-
tings, be sure to press the [Reset] key in the control panel after returning
to the initial screen.
To specify initial network settings
1
2
Press the [Utility/Counter] key.
Touch [Admin. Management].
Utility/Counter
Exit
User
Management
User
Setting
Total
Counter
357
Total Copy
Counter
Admin.
Management
Reports
285
Total
Copy Size
Printer
Setting
5
Check
Detail
Memory
Free
100%
3
Type in the administrator password using the keypad, and then touch
[Enter].
–
–
“12345678” is registered at the factory.
To change the administrator password, refer to the User’s Guide
[Copy Operations].
Input Administrator Code.
Utility/Counter
Administrator Code
Cancel
Enter
Memory
Free
100%
2-6
200/250/350
Setup
2
4
5
6
Touch [Admin. 2].
Utility/Counter
Administrator Management
Enter
Admin.1
Admin.2
Memory
Free
100%
Touch [Network Settings].
Utility/Counter
Administrator Management 2
Enter
Network
Settings
Printer
Setting
Software SW
Delete Job
Security
Setting
Ping
Memory
Management
If the optional scanner unit or fax kit has been installed, touch [Network
Setting 1].
Utility/Counter
Network Settings
Enter
Network
Setting 2
Network
Setting 1
200/250/350
2-7
Setup
2
7
Specify each network setting, and then touch [Enter].
Network Setting
Enter
Basic
Settings
DNS Settings
Machine Name
POP3 Settings
Scanner Settings
Frame Type Set
SMTP Settings
Priority Compress
Level
LDAP Setting
IP Filtering
Memory
Free
100%
8
To apply the settings specified on a screen that is displayed by touch-
ing a button marked with , turn the machine off, then on again.
–
When turning the machine off, then on again with the main power
switch, wait about 10 seconds to turn the machine on after turning
it off.
The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately
after being turned off.
Turn the power off and then
on to use new setting.
Cancel
Memory
100%
Free
9
Touch [Enter] until the first screen appears.
2-8
200/250/350
Setup
2
2.3
Basic Settings
Settings
Settings can be specified for the following.
Item
Description
DHCP
Specify whether to acquire an IP address automatically from the
DHCP server or use a fixed IP address.
IP Address Setting
Subnet Mask
Set the machine’s IP address.
Specify when “DHCP” is set to “IP Input”.
Enter the subnet mask of the network to be connected.
Specify when “IP Input” was selected in [DHCP].
Gateway
Enter the gateway address of the network to be connected.
Specify when “DHCP” is set to “IP Input”.
Self-Domain Name
Specify the domain name of this machine. Specify when per-
forming direct fax transmission over an e-mail server. For spec-
ifying the domain device settings, refer to the User’s Guide
[Facsimile Operations].
Note
To send a direct fax, the optional fax kit is required.
Network Board Set
Specify the network board (LAN board) transmission speed.
DHCP
1
2
In the Network Setting screen, touch [Basic Settings].
Touch [DHCP].
Basic Settings
Cancel
Enter
DHCP
IP Input
.
.
.
.
.
.
IP Addres Setting
Subnet Mask
Gateway
.
.
.
Self-Domain Name
Network Board Set
Auto
Memory
Free
100%
200/250/350
2-9
Setup
2
3
To use the DHCP server, touch [Auto-Obtain]. To use a fixed IP ad-
dress, touch [IP Input].
–
When [IP Input] was selected, specify the settings for “IP Address
Setting” and “Subnet Mask”.
This unit is DHCP compatible.Input
IP address when DHCP is not required.
Utility/Counter
DHCP
Cancel
Enter
Auto-Obtain IP Input
Memory
Free
100%
4
Touch [Enter].
IP Address Setting
Specify a setting when “DHCP” is set to “IP Input”.
1
2
In the Network Setting screen, touch [Basic Settings].
Touch [IP Address Setting].
Basic Settings
Cancel
Enter
DHCP
IP Input
.
.
.
.
.
.
IP Addres Setting
Subnet Mask
Gateway
.
.
.
Self-Domain Name
Network Board Set
Auto
Memory
Free
100%
2-10
200/250/350
Setup
2
3
Use the keypad to type in the IP address.
–
You cannot specify an IP address that begins with 0, 127, or 224 or
higher.
–
When less than three digits are entered, use [→] to move the cursor
to the next number.
Enter IP Address.
Utility/Counter
IP Address Setting
Cancel
Enter
192.168.1 .20
Delete
Memory
Free
100%
4
Touch [Enter].
Subnet Mask
Specify a setting when “DHCP” is set to “IP Input”.
1
2
In the Network Setting screen, touch [Basic Settings].
Touch [Subnet Mask].
Basic Settings
Cancel
Enter
DHCP
IP Input
.
.
.
.
.
.
IP Addres Setting
Subnet Mask
Gateway
.
.
.
Self-Domain Name
Network Board Set
Auto
Memory
Free
100%
200/250/350
2-11
Setup
2
3
Use the keypad to type in the IP address.
–
When less than three digits are entered, use [→] to move the cursor
to the next number.
Enter Subnet Mask.
Utility/Counter
Subnet Mask
Cancel
Enter
255.255.255.0
Delete
Memory
Free
100%
4
Touch [Enter].
Gateway
Specify a setting when “DHCP” is set to “IP Input”.
1
2
In the Network Setting screen, touch [Basic Settings].
Touch [Gateway].
Basic Settings
Cancel
Enter
DHCP
IP Input
.
.
.
.
.
.
IP Addres Setting
Subnet Mask
Gateway
.
.
.
Self-Domain Name
Network Board Set
Auto
Memory
Free
100%
2-12
200/250/350
Setup
2
3
Use the keypad to type in the IP address.
–
You cannot specify an IP address that begins with 0, 127, or 224 or
higher.
–
When less than three digits are entered, use [→] to move the cursor
to the next number.
4
Touch [Enter].
Network Board Set
Settings can be specified for the following.
Item
Description
Auto
Selects the transmission speed automatically by auto-negotia-
tion.
100M-Full
100M-Half
10M-Full
10M-Half
Manually specifies a transmission speed of 100 Mbps in full-du-
plex mode when the transmission speed cannot be selected au-
tomatically.
Manually specifies a transmission speed of 100 Mbps in half-
duplex mode when the transmission speed cannot be selected
automatically.
Manually specifies a transmission speed of 10 Mbps in full-du-
plex mode when the transmission speed cannot be selected au-
tomatically.
Manually specifies a transmission speed of 10 Mbps in half-du-
plex mode when the transmission speed cannot be selected au-
tomatically.
200/250/350
2-13
Setup
2
To specify the network board settings
1
2
In the Network Setting screen, touch [Basic Settings].
Touch [Network Board Set].
Basic Settings
Cancel
Enter
DHCP
IP Input
.
.
.
.
.
.
IP Addres Setting
Subnet Mask
Gateway
.
.
.
Self-Domain Name
Network Board Set
Auto
Memory
Free
100%
3
Touch [Network Board Set], and then select the transmission speed.
“Auto” is the usual setting.
–
Network Board Speed and Duplex Setting
can be changed.
Utility/Counter
Network Board Set
Cancel
Enter
Auto
100M-Full
10M-Full
100M-Half
10M-Half
Status : 10M-HalfDuplex
Memory
Free
100%
4
Touch [Enter].
2-14
200/250/350
Setup
2
2.4
DNS Settings
Settings can be specified for the following.
Item
Description
DNS Setting
Specify “YES” or “NO” for the DNS (Domain Name System).
When using a DNS server within a network, specify “YES”.
When not using a DNS server within a network, specify “NO”.
When using an external server such as an Internet provider,
specify “NO” if the IP address of the e-mail server is public. If
the DNS name of the e-mail server is public and the IP address
is not public, specify “YES”.
For details on the network environment, contact the network
administrator.
Host Name
Specify the host name of this machine.
Contact the network administrator for the information to be en-
tered.
Specify when “DNS Setting” is set to “YES”.
Domain Name
DNS Server Address
Specify the domain name of the DNS server.
Contact the network administrator for the information to be en-
tered.
Specify when “DNS Setting” is set to “YES”.
Specify the IP addresses of the DNS server.
Contact the network administrator for the information to be en-
tered.
Specify when “DNS Setting” is set to “YES”.
DNS Setting
1
In the Network Setting screen, touch [DNS Settings].
Network Setting
Enter
Basic
Settings
DNS Settings
Machine Name
POP3 Settings
Scanner Settings
Frame Type Set
SMTP Settings
Priority Compress
Level
LDAP Setting
IP Filtering
Memory
100%
Free
200/250/350
2-15
Setup
2
2
To use the DNS server, touch [YES]. If the DNS server is not to be used,
touch [NO].
–
If “YES” is selected, specify settings for “Host Name”, “Domain
Name”, and “DNS Server Address”.
DNS Setting
YES
Cancel
Enter
NO
Host Name
Domain Name
DNS Server Address
Memory
Free
100%
3
Touch [Enter].
Host Name
1
2
In the DNS Setting screen, touch [Host Name].
Type in the host name of this machine, and then touch [Enter].
Host Name
TEST001
Cancel
Enter
Del.
Q
W
Z
E
X
R
C
T
V
Y
B
U
N
I
O
P
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
L
-
M
Caps
Memory
Free
100%
2-16
200/250/350
Setup
2
Domain Name
1
2
In the DNS Setting screen, touch [Domain Name].
Type in the domain name of the DNS server, and then touch [Enter].
Domain Name
Cancel
Enter
Del.
@
Q
W
Z
E
X
R
C
T
V
Y
B
U
N
I
O
P
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
_
L
-
M
.
,
Domain
Alpha
Caps
Memory
Free
100%
DNS Server Address
1
2
In the DNS Setting screen, touch [DNS Server Address].
Touch [DNS Server Address 1].
Max. # of DNS Server Addresses is 3.
Utility/Counter
DNS Server Address
Enter
.
.
.
.
DNS Server Address 1
DNS Server Address 2
DNS Server Address 3
.
.
.
.
.
Memory
Free
100%
200/250/350
2-17
Setup
2
3
Type in the IP address of DNS server 1, and then touch [Enter].
–
You cannot specify an IP address that begins with 0, 127, or 224 or
higher.
–
When less than three digits are entered, use [→] to move the cursor
to the next number.
Input DNS Server Address.
Utility/Counter
DNS Server Address 1
Cancel
Enter
192.168.100.3
Delete
Memory
Free
100%
4
5
When specifying multiple DNS servers, type in the IP addresses for
DNS server 2 and DNS server 3.
Touch [Enter].
2-18
200/250/350
Setup
2
2.5
Machine Name
Specify the name of this machine.
The machine name is used as part of the file name with Scan to E-Mail, Scan
to FTP, Scan to SMB, Scan to HDD, and Internet faxing. In addition, part of
the Subject line is used in Scan to E-Mail and Internet fax transmissions.
To specify the machine name
1
In the Network Setting screen, touch [Machine Name].
Network Setting
Enter
Basic
Settings
DNS Settings
Machine Name
POP3 Settings
Scanner Settings
Frame Type Set
SMTP Settings
Priority Compress
Level
LDAP Setting
IP Filtering
Memory
Free
100%
2
Enter the machine name.
Up to 16 alphanumeric characters can be entered.
–
Machine Name
KMBT350
Cancel
Enter
Del.
Q
W
Z
E
X
R
C
T
V
Y
B
U
N
I
O
P
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
Caps
Memory
Free
100%
3
Touch [Enter].
200/250/350
2-19
Setup
2
2.6
SMTP Settings
Settings can be specified for the following.
Item
Description
SMTP Server Address
Specify when performing Scan to E-Mail or Internet faxing. In addi-
tion, specify when using the E-Mail notification function with Scan to
FTP, Scan to SMB or Scan to HDD.
Contact the network administrator for the information to be entered.
E-Mail Address
Enter the e-mail address of this machine.
Contact the network administrator for the information to be entered.
SMTP Authentication
User Name
Specify the user name when using the e-mail transmission authenti-
cation (SMTP authentication) function.
Contact the network administrator for the information to be entered.
It is not necessary to specify the setting when the SMTP authentica-
SMTP Authentication
Password
Specify the password when using the e-mail transmission authenti-
cation (SMTP authentication) function.
Contact the network administrator for the information to be entered.
It is not necessary to specify the setting when the SMTP authentica-
tion password and the POP3 password are the same.
Note
The following appear when bits 6 and 2 of mode 380 are set to “1” in the
Software Switch Setting screen. For details, refer to “Specifying software
switch settings (machine functions)” on page 9-29.
- SMTP Authentication User Name
- SMTP Authentication Password
If bit 4 of mode 371 is set to “1” in the Software Switch Setting screen,
two SMTP servers can be registered. For details, refer to “Specifying
software switch settings (machine functions)” on page 9-29.
2-20
200/250/350
Setup
2
SMTP Server Address
1
2
In the Network Setting screen, touch [SMTP Settings].
Touch [SMTP Server Address].
SMTP Settings
Cancel
Enter
.
.
.
SMTP Server Address
E-Mail Address
Memory
Free
100%
3
Type in the SMTP server address.
When “DNS Setting” is set to “YES”, you can enter the IP address
and the host name.
–
Enter SMTP Server Address.
Utility/Counter
SMTP Server Address
Cancel
Enter
Host
Name
.
.
.
Port
Delete
Memory
Free
100%
200/250/350
2-21
Setup
2
4
To specify the host name, touch [Host Name], type in the host name,
and then touch [Enter].
SMTP Server Address
smtp.xyz.co.jp
Cancel
Enter
Del.
@
Q
W
Z
E
X
R
C
T
V
Y
B
U
N
I
O
P
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
_
L
-
M
.
,
Domain
IP
input
Port
Alpha
Caps
Memory
Free
100%
5
6
To change the port, touch [Port]. The Port screen appears.
Type in the port number using the keypad, and then touch [Enter].
–
To return to the default setting, touch [Default].
Enter Port. Number.
Utility/Counter
Port
Cancel
Enter
Default
25
1to65535
Delete
Memory
Free
100%
7
Touch [Enter].
2-22
200/250/350
Setup
2
E-Mail Address
1
2
In the Network Setting screen, touch [SMTP Settings].
Touch [E-Mail Address].
SMTP Settings
Cancel
Enter
.
.
.
SMTP Server Address
E-Mail Address
Memory
Free
100%
3
Enter the e-mail address of this machine, and then touch [Enter].
E-Mail Address
Cancel
Enter
Del.
@
Q
W
Z
E
X
R
C
T
V
Y
B
U
N
I
O
P
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
_
L
-
M
.
,
Domain
Alpha
Caps
Memory
Free
100%
200/250/350
2-23
Setup
2
SMTP Authentication User Name
1
2
In the Network Setting screen, touch [SMTP Settings].
Touch [SMTP Authentication User Name].
SMTP Settings
Cancel
Enter
SMTP Server Address
E-Mail Address
.
.
.
SMTP Authentication
User Name
SMTP Authentication
Password
Memory
Free
100%
3
Type in the SMTP authentication user name, and then touch [Enter].
SMTP Authentication
User Name
Cancel
Enter
test01
Del.
@
Q
W
Z
E
X
R
C
T
V
Y
B
U
N
I
O
P
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
_
L
-
M
.
,
SPACE
Caps
Alpha
Memory
Free
100%
2-24
200/250/350
Setup
2
SMTP Authentication Password
1
2
In the Network Setting screen, touch [SMTP Settings].
Touch [SMTP Authentication Password].
SMTP Settings
Cancel
Enter
SMTP Server Address
E-Mail Address
.
.
.
SMTP Authentication
User Name
SMTP Authentication
Password
Memory
Free
100%
3
Touch [New Password], type in the SMTP password, and then touch
[Enter].
Change password.
Utility/Counter
Change Password
Cancel
Enter
New Password
Confirm New Password
Memory
Free
100%
4
Touch [Confirm New Password], type in the SMTP password again,
and then touch [Enter].
200/250/350
2-25
Setup
2
2.7
POP3 Settings
Settings can be specified for the following.
Item
Description
POP3 Server Address
Required setting for receiving Internet faxes.
Contact the network administrator for the information to be entered.
POP3 User Name
POP3 Password
Auto-RX Check
Specify the POP3 user name of this machine.
Contact the network administrator for the information to be entered.
Specify the POP3 password of this machine.
Contact the network administrator for the information to be entered.
Specify the interval at which to connect to the POP3 server and
check for e-mail messages (Internet faxing). (1—99 minutes)
POP3 Server Address
1
2
In the Network Setting screen, touch [POP3 Settings].
Touch [POP3 Server Address].
POP3 Settings
Enter
.
.
.
POP3 Server Address
POP3 User Name
POP3 Password
Auto-RX Check
Check OFF
Memory
Free
100%
2-26
200/250/350
Setup
2
3
Type in the POP3 server address using the keypad.
When “DNS Setting” is set to “YES”, you can enter the IP address
and the host name.
–
Enter POP3 Server Address.
Utility/Counter
POP3 Server Address
Cancel
Enter
Host
Name
.
.
.
Port
Delete
Memory
Free
100%
4
To specify the host name, touch [Host Name], type in the host name,
and then touch [Enter].
POP3 Server Address
pop3.xyz.co.jp
Cancel
Enter
Del.
@
Q
W
Z
E
X
R
C
T
V
Y
B
U
N
I
O
P
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
_
L
-
M
.
,
Domain
IP
input
Port
Caps
Alpha
Memory
Free
100%
5
6
To change the port, touch [Port]. The Port screen appears.
Type in the port number using the keypad, and then touch [Enter].
–
To return to the default setting, touch [Default].
Enter Port. Number.
Utility/Counter
Port
Cancel
Enter
Default
110
1to65535
Delete
Memory
Free
100%
200/250/350
2-27
Setup
2
7
Touch [Enter].
POP3 User Name
1
2
In the Network Setting screen, touch [POP3 Settings].
Touch [POP3 User Name].
POP3 Settings
Enter
.
.
.
POP3 Server Address
POP3 User Name
POP3 Password
Auto-RX Check
Check OFF
Memory
Free
100%
3
Type in the POP3 user name, and then touch [Enter].
POP3 User Name
public
Cancel
Enter
Del.
@
Q
W
Z
E
X
R
T
V
Y
B
U
N
I
O
P
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
_
L
-
C
M
.
,
SPACE
Caps
Alpha
Memory
Free
100%
2-28
200/250/350
Setup
2
POP3 Password
1
2
In the Network Setting screen, touch [POP3 Settings].
Touch [POP3 Password].
POP3 Settings
Enter
.
.
.
POP3 Server Address
POP3 User Name
POP3 Password
Auto-RX Check
Check OFF
Memory
Free
100%
3
Touch [New Password], type in the POP3 password, and then touch
[Enter].
Change password.
Utility/Counter
Change Password
Cancel
Enter
New Password
Confirm New Password
Memory
Free
100%
4
Touch [Confirm New Password], type in the SMTP password again,
and then touch [Enter].
200/250/350
2-29
Setup
2
Auto-RX Check
1
2
In the Network Setting screen, touch [POP3 Settings].
Touch [Auto-RX Check].
POP3 Settings
Enter
.
.
.
POP3 Server Address
POP3 User Name
POP3 Password
Auto-RX Check
Check OFF
Memory
Free
100%
3
Type in the interval for POP3 reception using the keypad, and then
touch [Enter].
–
If POP3 reception is not to be performed automatically, touch
[Check OFF].
Set interval for POP3 check.
Utility/Counter
Auto-RX Check
Cancel
Enter
Check OFF
10M.
1to99
Memory
Free
100%
2-30
200/250/350
Setup
2
2.8
Priority Compress Level (E-Mail Mode)
You can specify the maximum transmission size, the maximum transmission
quality, and the encoding method that are given priority when sending an In-
ternet fax. The transmission size setting specified here is the default setting
when programming a one-touch dial button.
When sending Internet faxes, the recipient may not be able to view the data
if the receiving machine does not support the transmitted size, quality, or en-
coding method. If the maximum settings have been specified in E-Mail Mode
in advance, the transmission settings are adjusted to the specified maxi-
mum, even if the settings specified for the transmission exceed the maxi-
mum.
In E-Mail Mode, settings can be specified for the following.
Item
Description
TX Size (Max.)
Specify the maximum document size that can be transmitted.
Select “Letter”, “Legal”, or “11 × 17”.
TX Quality (Max.)
Coding Method
Specify the maximum resolution that can be sent. Select “200
dpi”, “400 dpi”, or “600 dpi”.
Select the encoding method for data to be sent. Select “MH”,
“MR”, or “MMR”. The data capacity is lowest with “MMR” and
highest with “MH”.
200/250/350
2-31
Setup
2
TX Size (Max.)
1
2
In the Network Setting screen, touch [Priority Compress Level].
Touch [E-Mail Mode].
Priority Compress Level
Enter
E-Mail Mode
Scan Mode
Memory
Free
100%
3
Touch [TX Size (Max.)].
Select E-Mail Mode.
Utility/Counter
E-Mail Mode
Enter
11x17
600dpi
MH
TX Size(Max.)
TX Quality(Max.)
Coding Method
Memory
Free
100%
4
Select the maximum document size for transmission, and then touch
[Enter].
Select Max. TX Size.
Utility/Counter
TX Size(Max.)
Cancel
Enter
Letter
/Legal
11x17
Memory
Free
100%
2-32
200/250/350
Setup
2
TX Quality (Max.)
1
2
In the Network Setting screen, touch [Priority Compress Level].
Touch [E-Mail Mode].
Priority Compress Level
Enter
E-Mail Mode
Scan Mode
Memory
Free
100%
3
Touch [TX Quality (Max.)].
Select E-Mail Mode.
Utility/Counter
E-Mail Mode
Enter
11x17
600dpi
MH
TX Size(Max.)
TX Quality(Max.)
Coding Method
Memory
Free
100%
4
Select the maximum resolution for transmission, and then touch [En-
ter].
TX Quality (Max.) can be changed.
Utility/Counter
TX Quality(Max.)
Cancel
Enter
200dpi
400dpi
600dpi
Memory
Free
100%
200/250/350
2-33
Setup
2
Coding Method
1
2
In the Network Setting screen, touch [Priority Compress Level].
Touch [E-Mail Mode].
Priority Compress Level
Enter
E-Mail Mode
Scan Mode
Memory
Free
100%
3
Touch [Coding Method].
Select E-Mail Mode.
Utility/Counter
E-Mail Mode
Enter
11x17
600dpi
MH
TX Size(Max.)
TX Quality(Max.)
Coding Method
Memory
Free
100%
4
Select the encoding method, and then touch [Enter].
Select Coding Method.
Utility/Counter
Coding Method
Cancel
Enter
MH
MR
MMR
Memory
Free
100%
2-34
200/250/350
Setup
2
2.9
Priority Compress Level (Scan Mode)
You can specify the file format and encoding method for transmitting files
with the Scan to E-Mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to SMB, or Scan to HDD opera-
tions. The transmission size setting specified here is the default setting when
programming a one-touch dial button.
In Scan Mode, settings can be specified for the following.
Item
Description
File Type
Select the file format (TIFF or PDF) for sending files.
If “TIFF” was selected, the setting changes to “Multi Page TIFF”
with the Scan to FTP, Scan to SMB or Scan to HDD operation.
Coding Method
Select either “MH” or “MMR” as the encoding method for the
selected file format. The data capacity is lowest with “MMR”
and highest with “MH”.
To specify the scan mode settings
1
2
In the Network Setting screen, touch [Priority Compress Level].
Touch [Scan Mode].
Priority Compress Level
Enter
E-Mail Mode
Scan Mode
Memory
Free
100%
3
Select the file format and encoding method, and then touch [Enter].
Set the default for Scan-to-PC.
Utility/Counter
Scan Mode
Cancel
Enter
File Type
TIFF
Coding Method
MH
MMR
PDF
Memory
Free
100%
200/250/350
2-35
Setup
2
2.10 Scanner Settings
Settings can be specified for the following.
Item
Description
Activity Report
RX Doc. Header Print
Specify whether to be notified of the Internet fax reception results.
Select whether to print the e-mail header on the first page of a doc-
ument received through Internet faxing.
E-Mail Header Text
Text can be added to Scan to E-Mail and Internet fax text.
Fixed Text: Inserts the text that has been registered on this ma-
chine in advance.
Custom Text: Inserts any desired text.
OFF: Does not insert any text. With Scan to E-Mail, fixed text is in-
serted, even if “OFF” is selected.
Note
You can save any text using PageScope Web Con-
nection. For details, refer to “E-Mail/Internet FAX (Ad-
ministrator mode)” on page 8-69.
Gateway TX
Always select “Restrict” for this machine.
If the optional scanner unit or fax kit has been installed, select “Al-
low” to use this machine in the following ways.
•
When this machine is used as a relay machine with an IP relay
transmission
•
When sending a direct fax
Note
For details on IP relay transmission operations, refer to
the User’s Guide [Advanced Scan Operations].
For details on direct faxing, refer to the User’s Guide
[Facsimile Operations].
Subject Registration
Divide Settings
When sending with Scan to E-Mail or Internet faxing, the subject
can be specified. Up to 4 subjects can be registered, allowing you
to use different subjects depending on the contents of the trans-
mission.
Up to 40 characters can be entered.
When performing Scan to E-Mail or sending Internet faxes, specify
whether to separate and attach the scanned original document da-
ta. The separation types that can be specified are described below.
Page Division: Used when performing Scan to E-Mail and sending
Internet faxes. Sends the scanned data separated into pages.
Binary Division: Used when performing Scan to E-Mail. Sends the
specified data separated into portions of a specified size.
Note
The binary division function may not be usable de-
pending on the e-mail software used by the recipient.
2-36
200/250/350
Setup
2
In the Divide Settings screen, settings can be specified for the following.
Item
Description
Page Division
Used when performing Scan to E-Mail and sending Internet faxes.
Select whether scanned data is divided into pages when being
sent.
Binary Division
Used when performing Scan to E-Mail.
Select whether scanned data is divided into fixed portions when
being sent.
Note
The binary division function may not be usable de-
pending on the e-mail software used by the recipient.
Binary Division Size
When “Binary Division” is set to “ON”, enter a division size be-
tween 16 and 2,000 KB.
Activity Report
1
2
In the Network Setting screen, touch [Scanner Settings].
Touch [Activity Report].
Scanner Settings
Enter
Activity Report
ON
OFF
RX Doc. Header Print
E-Mail Header Text
Gateway TX
Fixed Text
Restrict
Subject Registration
Divide Settings
Memory
Free
100%
3
Select “ON” or “OFF”, and then touch [Enter].
Internet FAX RX Activity Report
Settings can be programmed.
Utility/Counter
Activity Report
Cancel
Enter
ON
OFF
Memory
Free
100%
200/250/350
2-37
Setup
2
RX Doc. Header Print
1
2
In the Network Setting screen, touch [Scanner Settings].
Touch [RX Doc. Header Print].
Scanner Settings
Enter
Activity Report
ON
OFF
RX Doc. Header Print
E-Mail Header Text
Gateway TX
Fixed Text
Restrict
Subject Registration
Divide Settings
Memory
Free
100%
3
Select “ON” or “OFF”, and then touch [Enter].
Select ON or OFF for Header Print on
Internet FAX RX.
Utility/Counter
RX Doc.Header Print
Cancel
Enter
ON
OFF
Memory
Free
100%
2-38
200/250/350
Setup
2
E-Mail Header Text
1
2
In the Network Setting screen, touch [Scanner Settings].
Touch [E-Mail Header Text].
Scanner Settings
Enter
Activity Report
ON
OFF
RX Doc. Header Print
E-Mail Header Text
Gateway TX
Fixed Text
Restrict
Subject Registration
Divide Settings
Memory
Free
100%
3
Select the text insertion method, and then touch [Enter].
Select Text for E-Mail header sheet.
Utility/Counter
Insert TX Document
Cancel
Enter
Fixed Text
Custom Text OFF
Memory
Free
100%
200/250/350
2-39
Setup
2
Gateway TX
1
2
In the Network Setting screen, touch [Scanner Settings].
Touch [Gateway TX].
Scanner Settings
Enter
Activity Report
ON
OFF
RX Doc. Header Print
E-Mail Header Text
Gateway TX
Fixed Text
Restrict
Subject Registration
Divide Settings
Memory
Free
100%
3
Select whether to allow or restrict gateway transmissions, and then
touch [Enter].
Gateway TX can be changed.
Utility/Counter
Gateway TX
Cancel
Enter
Allow
Restrict
2-40
200/250/350
Setup
2
Subject Registration
1
2
In the Network Setting screen, touch [Scanner Settings].
Touch [Subject Registration].
Scanner Settings
Enter
Activity Report
ON
OFF
RX Doc. Header Print
E-Mail Header Text
Gateway TX
Fixed Text
Restrict
Subject Registration
Divide Settings
Memory
Free
100%
3
Touch the number of the subject to be registered or changed, type in
the text, and then touch [Enter].
Select Subject.
Utility/Counter
Subject Registration
Enter
1
2
3
4
Test Mail 1
Memory
Free
100%
4
Touch [Enter].
200/250/350
2-41
Setup
2
Divide Settings
1
2
In the Network Setting screen, touch [Scanner Settings].
Touch [Divide Settings].
Scanner Settings
Enter
Activity Report
ON
OFF
RX Doc. Header Print
E-Mail Header Text
Gateway TX
Fixed Text
Restrict
Subject Registration
Divide Settings
Memory
Free
100%
3
Select “ON” or “OFF” for Page Division and Binary Division.
Utility division settings.
Utility/Counter
Division Settings
Enter
Page Division
ON
OFF
Binary Division
Binary Division Size
500KB
Memory
Free
100%
4
If “Binary Division” is set to “ON”, touch [Binary Division Size].
Select division settings.
Utility/Counter
Division Settings
Enter
Page Division
OFF
ON
Binary Division
Binary Division Size
500KB
Memory
Free
100%
2-42
200/250/350
Setup
2
5
Type in the data division size, and then touch [Enter].
Enter Binary Division Size.
Utility/Counter
Binary Division Size
Cancel
Enter
500 KB
16to2000KB
Delete
Memory
Free
100%
6
Touch [Enter].
200/250/350
2-43
Setup
2
2.11 LDAP Setting
The settings used by the LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) serv-
er in a network can be specified.
Settings can be specified for the following.
Item
Description
LDAP Search
Select whether to enable or disable the address search used by
an LDAP server. When “Yes” is selected, an LDAP server can be
specified.
LDAP Server Setting
Search Default Setting
Register the LDAP server to be accessed. Up to 5 LDAP servers
can be registered in this machine.
When multiple LDAP servers are registered, select the primary
LDAP server for performing searches.
LDAP Search
1
2
In the Network Setting screen, touch [LDAP Setting].
Touch [LDAP Search].
Utility/Counter
LDAP Setting
Enter
LDAP Search
No
LDAP Server Setting
Memory
Free
100%
2-44
200/250/350
Setup
2
3
Select whether to allow LDAP searches.
If [Yes] was selected, specify the LDAP server settings.
–
Select Yes to activate the LDAP
Search function.
Utility/Counter
LDAP Search
Cancel
Enter
Yes
No
Memory
Free
100%
200/250/350
2-45
Setup
2
LDAP Server Setting
LDAP server settings can be specified for the following.
Item
Description
LDAP Server Name
Enter the LDAP server name. Up to 16 characters can be en-
tered.
Server Address
Search Base
Enter the IP address or host name of the LDAP server. Up to 64
characters can be entered.
Specify the location on the LDAP server where searches are to
be started.
Up to 255 alphanumeric characters can be entered, excluding
^.
Authentication Setting
Specify the authentication settings.
General Settings: Select the LDAP authentication method.
Login name: Enter if “General Settings” is set to “Anonymous”.
Up to 64 alphanumeric characters can be entered, excluding ^.
Password: Enter if “General Settings” is set to “Anonymous”.
Up to 32 alphanumeric characters can be entered, excluding ^.
Domain Name: Enter if “General Settings” is set to “GSS-SPNE-
GO”. Up to 64 alphanumeric characters can be entered, exclud-
ing ^.
Maximum number of search
Specify the maximum number of hits to be received in an LDAP
search between 5 and 100.
Connection time out
SSL/TLS
Specify a search timeout between 5 and 300 seconds.
Select whether to perform encryption of the send data using
SSL/TLS.
Port Number
Enter a number between 1 and 65535 for the port used to com-
municate with the LDAP server.
Initialize Setting
Check Connection
Clears all of the settings that were entered. After the settings are
cleared, check the message, and then touch [Enter].
Check the connection to the LDAP server, using the entered
settings.
2-46
200/250/350
Setup
2
To specify the LDAP server settings
1
2
In the Network Setting screen, touch [LDAP Setting].
Touch [LDAP Server Setting].
Utility/Counter
LDAP Setting
Enter
LDAP Search
Yes
LDAP Server Setting
Search Default
Setting
LDAP1
Memory
Free
100%
3
Touch the button for the LDAP server to be registered or changed.
To register a new LDAP server, touch a button with no name on it.
–
Select the default LDAP server.
Utility/Counter
LDAP Server Setting
Enter
LDAP1
LDAP2
Memory
Free
100%
4
Specify the detailed LDAP server settings.
LDAP Server Setting
Fwd
Enter
LDAP Server Name
Server Address
Search Base
Authentication
Setting
Anonymous
100
Maximum number
of search
Connection
time out
60 sec
Memory
Free
100%
200/250/350
2-47
Setup
2
5
Touch [Fwd], and then specify the settings.
LDAP Server Setting
Back
Enter
OFF
389
SSL/TLS
Port Number
Check
Connection
Initialize
Setting
Memory
Free
100%
6
Check the settings, and then touch [Enter].
Search Default Setting
0 [Search Default Setting] appears when two or more LDAP servers have
been registered.
1
2
In the Network Setting screen, touch [LDAP Setting].
Touch [Search Default Setting].
Utility/Counter
LDAP Setting
Enter
LDAP Search
Yes
LDAP Server Setting
Search Default
Setting
LDAP1
Memory
Free
100%
2-48
200/250/350
Setup
2
3
Select the primary LDAP server for performing searches, and then
touch [Enter].
Select the desired LDAP server.
Utility/Counter
Search Default
Setting
Cancel
Enter
LDAP1
LDAP2
Memory
Free
100%
200/250/350
2-49
Setup
2
2.12 IP Filtering
Select whether or not reception is possible within the range of specified IP
addresses. As an example, this section provides the procedure for specifying
the range where access is permitted. The range where access is denied is
specified in the same way as the range where access is permitted.
Settings can be specified for the following.
Item
Description
Accept Setting
Reception of only the IP addresses in the specified range is per-
mitted.
Deny Access
IP addresses in the specified range are blocked.
Note
0.0.0.0 cannot be included in a specified range. For example, to specify
the range of addresses before 192.168.1.20, specify the range from
0.0.0.1 to 192.168.1.20.
To specify IP filtering settings
1
2
In the Network Setting screen, touch [IP Filtering].
Touch [Accept Setting] or [Deny Access].
Select the IP Filtering.
Utility/Counter
IP Filtering
Enter
Accept
Setting
Deny
Access
Memory
Free
100%
2-50
200/250/350
Setup
2
3
Touch [Enable] or [Disable].
Enter the IP Address range to permit
access.
Utility/Counter
Accept
Setting
Cancel
Enter
Enable
Disable
1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
-
-
-
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2
.
.
.
3
.
Memory
100%
Free
4
5
Touch [1] of the range.
Touch [Start], and then type in the IP address at the beginning of the
range.
–
To change an entered value, touch [←] and [→] to move the cursor
to the number to be changed, touch [Delete], and then type in the
desired number.
–
To clear all entered values, press the [C] (clear) key.
Set the IP Address.
Utility/Counter
Permit
Cancel
Enter
Start
End
.
.
.
.
.
.
Delete
Memory
Free
100%
6
Touch [Enter], and then touch [Enter] in the next two screens that ap-
pear.
IP filtering is specified.
200/250/350
2-51
Setup
2
2.13 Specifying e-mail server settings
To be able to use the scanning functions of this machine, it is necessary to
specify certain settings according to the network environment of the ma-
chine. For the required settings, contact your network administrator.
To the network administrator
The following settings are required to be able to use the scanning functions
of this machine. For each setting, refer to the operation manual for the e-mail
server.
-
-
-
-
IP address of this machine
E-mail account (e-mail address) of this machine
POP3 user name and POP3 password of this machine
Acquisition of SMTP for the account that is the sub-domain of this ma-
chine (device domain name)
-
Specify the delivery of e-mail from the e-mail server to this machine (DNS
server setting)
When setup of the network is complete, inform the users of this machine of
the information described below.
-
-
-
-
The network subnet mask to connect to this machine
The network gateway address to connect to this machine
The IP address and host name (when using DNS) of the SMTP server
The IP address and host name (when using DNS) of the POP3 server
2-52
200/250/350
Setup
2
2.14 Entering a domain name
When entering an e-mail address with this machine’s control panel, the des-
tination address can be entered quickly when the character string of a do-
main name that is entered often has been registered.
On this machine’s control panel, the domain names can be automatically en-
tered by touching [Domain] when it appears.
Note
Up to 6 domain names can be registered.
Registering a domain name
1
2
Press the [Utility/Counter] key.
Touch [User Setting].
Utility/Counter
Exit
User
Management
User
Setting
Total
Counter
357
Total Copy
Counter
Admin.
Management
Reports
285
Total
Copy Size
Printer
Setting
5
Check
Detail
Memory
Free
100%
3
Touch [E-Mail Input].
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [FAX].
–
Utility/Counter
User Setting
Enter
E-Mail
Input
Memory
Free
100%
200/250/350
2-53
Setup
2
4
Touch [Domain Name].
Utility/Counter
E-Mail
Input
Enter
One-Touch Index
Mail Program
Domain Name
Memory
Free
100%
5
Touch the button for the domain name to be registered or changed.
To register a new domain name, touch a button with no name on it.
–
Select key and enter Domain Name.
Domain Name
Enter
.com
.co.jp
Memory
Free
100%
6
Type in the domain name, and then touch [Enter].
Up to 64 characters can be entered.
–
Domain Name
xyz.co.jp
Cancel
Enter
Del.
@
@
Q
W
Z
E
X
R
C
T
V
Y
B
U
N
I
O
P
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
Alpha
Caps
Memory
Free
100%
7
Touch [Enter] until the initial screen appears.
2-54
200/250/350
Setup
2
Using a registered domain name
On a screen where [Domain] appears, you can enter the registered charac-
ters with a single operation.
1
On an input screen, touch [Domain].
Fine
SCANReady
test
No.of Dest.
Menu
1
Quality&
Reduction
Direct
Input
One-Touch Search
Add.
Delete
Domain
@
Q
W
Z
E
X
R
T
Y
B
U
N
I
O
P
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
L
C
V
M
Internet
FAX
E-Mail
Mode
Change
Comm.Mode
Caps
Alpha
Memory
Free
Job List
100%
2
Touch the key where the domain name to be entered.
–
Touch [Alpha] to return to the text input screen.
Fine
SCANReady
No.of Dest. 1
Quality&
Reduction
Direct
Input
One-Touch Search
Menu
Add.
Delete
Alpha
.com
.co.jp
@xyz.co.jp
Memory
Free
Job List
100%
200/250/350
2-55
Setup
2
2.15 Checking the network connection (Ping)
By sending a ping, you can check whether the network (LAN) is properly con-
nected.
The connection to an SMTP server, POP3 server, or any server (with a spec-
ified IP address) can be checked.
To check the network connection
1
2
Enter Administrator mode, and then touch [Admin. 2].
Touch [Ping].
Utility/Counter
Administrator Management 2
Enter
Network
Settings
Printer
Setting
Software SW
Delete Job
Security
Setting
Ping
Memory
Management
3
Select the connected server.
–
If [Ping IP Address] is selected, enter the IP address of the appro-
priate server.
Select the address and press START.
Utility/Counter
Ping
Enter
192.168.100.110
192.168.100.110
SMTP Server Address
POP3 Server Address
Ping IP Address
.
.
.
Memory
Free
100%
4
Press the [Start] key.
Pinging is performed.
2-56
200/250/350
Setup
2
5
Check the results, and then touch [Enter].
192.168.100.110
Ping
Enter
Reply from 192.168.100.110:OK
Reply from 192.168.100.110:OK
Reply from 192.168.100.110:OK
Reply from 192.168.100.110:OK
Memory
Free
100%
200/250/350
2-57
Setup
2
2.16 User authentication and account track
To limit the users of this machine, settings for user authentication and ac-
count track can be specified.
For details on the user authentication and account track settings, refer to the
User’s Guide [Copy Operations].
The various procedures for accessing the machine are described below.
User authentication and account track
If settings for user authentication and account track have both been speci-
fied, the operating procedure differs depending on the specified authentica-
tion settings. For details on the authentication settings specified on this
machine, consult with the administrator.
Authentication Setting
Description
When synchronizing user authentication When a user is registered, the account that the user
and account track
belongs to is also registered. When the user name
and password is entered for authentication, the user
is automatically logged on and can perform opera-
tions as a user of the registered account.
When not synchronizing user authentica- Users and accounts are registered separately. User
tion and account track
authentication, then account authentication must be
completed before machine operations can be per-
formed.
If user authentication settings have been specified
Contact the administrator for the user name and password to be used.
1
Touch [User Name], type in the user name, and then touch [Enter].
–
If user authentication is performed with an external server and a do-
main other than the default domain name is used as an Active Di-
rectory, type in the user name as “user_name@domain_name”.
If user authentication is performed with an external server, select
the domain for performing authentication with Active Directory.
–
Input User Name and Password to login.
User
Authentication
Login
User Name
Password
2-58
200/250/350
Setup
2
2
Touch [Password], type in the password, and then touch [Enter].
Input User Name and Password to login.
User
Authentication
Login
test
User Name
Password
3
Touch [Login] or press the [Access] key in the control panel.
The initial screen appears.
200/250/350
2-59
Setup
2
If account track settings have been specified
Contact the administrator for the track name and password to be used.
1
Touch [Account Name], type in the account number, and then touch
[Enter].
Input Account Name
and Password to Login.
Account Track
Account Name
Password
Memory
100%
Free
2
Touch [Password], type in the password, and then touch [Enter].
Input Account Name
and Password to Login.
Account Track
user
Account Name
Password
Memory
Free
100%
3
Press the [Access] key on the control panel.
The initial screen appears.
2-60
200/250/350
3 Scan to E-Mail
Scan to E-Mail
3
3
Scan to E-Mail
3.1
Specifying a destination with a one-touch dial button
You can transmit data simply by touching a one-touch dial button if the e-
mail address of a destination or a mail program has been registered with a
one-touch dial button in advance.
For registering one-touch dial buttons and mail programs, refer to “Register-
ing destinations” on page 3-35.
Selecting a one-touch dial button
A one-touch dial button can be selected in any of the following ways. Use the
appropriate method according to the number of recipients and the desired
use.
-
-
-
Directly touching the one-touch dial button
Entering the number of the one-touch dial button
Specifying chain dialing
Specifying a destination by touching a one-touch dial button
1
2
Position the document to be scanned.
Press the [Fax/Scan] button.
Fax/Scan
–
After pressing [Fax/Scan], you can specify Priority Screen settings
in the User’s Choice screen that appears. For details, refer to the
User’s Guide [Copy Operations].
3
Touch [One-Touch].
3-2
200/250/350
Scan to E-Mail
3
4
Select the index containing the desired destination, and then touch the
one-touch dial button.
–
To select an index, touch the corresponding tab, or touch [←] or [→]
to select a different one.
–
You can specify multiple destinations for one transmission with the
same one-touch dial button. Up to 300 destinations can be
specified at a time.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct Quality&
Input Reduction
Search
Menu
One-Touch
IndexList
JPN
US
a
Center Center
1
2
Memory
100%
Job List
Free
5
Specify the Quality & Reduction setting for the original document to be
sent.
–
For details, refer to “Specifying the scanning quality and zoom ra-
tio” on page 3-15.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
Menu
One-Touch Search
Reduction/
Area
Quality
Density
600
dpi
Standard
Fine
Super Fine
Text/Photo
Job List
GSR
Super GSR
Memory
100%
Free
200/250/350
3-3
Scan to E-Mail
3
6
Specify the necessary Menu settings.
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, specify the FAX Menu set-
tings.
–
For details, refer to “Specifying additional functions” on page 3-20.
Fine
SCANReady
One-Touch Search
Chain
Quality&
Reduction
Direct
Input
Menu
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
TSI only
TSI
TX Report
2in1
2-Sided TX Rotation TX
Memory
Job List
100%
Free
7
Press the [Start] key.
3-4
200/250/350
Scan to E-Mail
Entering the number of a one-touch dial button
3
A one-touch dial button is assigned a number, as shown in the illustration.
You can quickly select a destination by specifying the number of a one-touch
dial button instead of touching the button.
1
2
Position the document to be scanned.
Press the [Fax/Scan] key.
Fax/Scan
200/250/350
3-5
Scan to E-Mail
3
3
Press the [#] key on the control panel.
4
Use the keypad to type in the number of the one-touch dial button.
–
–
The specified one-touch dial button is highlighted.
You can specify multiple destinations for simultaneous
transmission with the same one-touch dial button. Up to 300
destinations can be specified at a time.
Fine
SCANReady
#
Quality&
Reduction
Direct
Input
Search
Menu
One-Touch
IndexList
JPN
US
Tokyo Osaka Nagoya Fukuok
a
Center Center
1
2
Memory
Free
JobList
100%
3-6
200/250/350
Scan to E-Mail
3
5
Specify the Quality & Reduction settings for the original document to
be sent.
–
For details, refer to “Specifying the scanning quality and zoom ra-
tio” on page 3-15.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
Menu
One-Touch Search
Reduction/
Area
Quality
Density
600
dpi
Standard
Fine
Super Fine
Text/Photo
Job List
GSR
Super GSR
Memory
100%
Free
6
Specify the necessary Menu settings.
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, specify the FAX Menu set-
tings.
–
For details, refer to “Specifying additional functions” on page 3-20.
Fine
SCANReady
One-Touch Search
Chain
Quality&
Reduction
Direct
Input
Menu
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
TSI only
TSI
TX Report
2in1
2-Sided TX Rotation TX
Memory
Job List
100%
Free
7
Press the [Start] key.
200/250/350
3-7
Scan to E-Mail
3
Searching for a one-touch dial button
To find a one-touch dial button, the name of a destination registered with the
button can be searched for.
1
2
Position the document to be scanned.
Press the [Fax/Scan] key.
Fax/Scan
3
4
Touch [Search].
–
If “LDAP Search” in the Network Settings screen is set to “Yes”, a
screen appears, allowing you to select the search method. Touch
[Search One-Touch Keys] when the screen appears.
Type in the destination name, and then touch [Search].
A screen appears, containing the one-touch dial buttons programmed
with a destination that begins with the entered name.
Search One-Touch Keys
Cancel
Search
Del.
@
Q
W
Z
E
X
R
C
T
V
Y
B
U
N
I
O
P
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
_
L
-
M
.
,
SPACE
Alpha
Caps
Memory
Free
100%
Job List
3-8
200/250/350
Scan to E-Mail
3
5
Touch the desired one-touch dial button.
–
You can specify multiple destinations for simultaneous
transmission with the same one-touch dial button. Up to 300
destinations can be specified at a time.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Menu
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
One-Touch
Search
#001 Osaka
1
1
Search
Memory
Free
Job List
100%
–
If LDAP searches are possible, touch [LDAP Search] to perform a
searches.
6
Specify the Quality & Reduction settings for the original document to
be sent.
–
For details, refer to “Specifying the scanning quality and zoom ra-
tio” on page 3-15.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
Menu
One-Touch Search
Reduction/
Area
Quality
Density
600
dpi
Standard
Fine
Super Fine
Text/Photo
Job List
GSR
Super GSR
Memory
100%
Free
200/250/350
3-9
Scan to E-Mail
3
7
Specify the necessary Menu settings.
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, specify the FAX Menu set-
tings.
–
For details, refer to “Specifying additional functions” on page 3-20.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Quality&
Reduction
Direct
Input
One-Touch Search
Menu
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
TSI only
TSI
TX Report
2in1
2-Sided TX Rotation TX
Memory
Job List
100%
Free
8
Press the [Start] key.
Specifying chain dialing
If the destination address is longer than 64 characters, the address can be
specified by combining addresses registered to one-touch dial buttons and
an entered address.
Touch [Chain], and then select one-touch dial buttons or enter an address.
!
Detail
Chain dialing can only be used with one destination per transmission.
With chain dialing, the address can contain up to 192 digits (64 charac-
ters from a one-touch dial button + 64 characters from a one-touch dial
button + 64 characters from an entered address).
The one-touch dial buttons to be used with chain dialing must be pro-
grammed in advance.
Fine
SCANReady
One-Touch Search
Detail
Chain
Quality&
Reduction
Direct
Input
Menu
Domain
Delete
@
Q
W
E
R
T
Y
B
U
N
I
O
.
P
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
L
Z
X
C
V
M
PC(Email)
TIFF-MH
Change
Comm.Mode
Alpha
Caps
Scan Mode
Memory
Free
Job List
100%
3-10
200/250/350
Scan to E-Mail
3
3.2
Entering an address
You can directly enter destinations that have not been registered in a one-
touch dial button. In addition, multiple destinations can be specified using
chain dialing to combine destinations registered in a one-touch dial button
and destinations that are entered.
Note
If bit 3 of mode 018 is set to “1” in the Software Switch Setting screen,
addresses cannot be directly entered. For details, refer to “Specifying
software switch settings (machine functions)” on page 9-29.
To enter an address
1
2
Position the document to be scanned.
Press the [Fax/Scan] key.
Fax/Scan
3
Touch [Direct Input].
200/250/350
3-11
Scan to E-Mail
3
4
To select the communication mode, touch [Change Comm. Mode].
Fine
SACNReady
Chain
Menu
Quality&
Reduction
Direct
Input
One-Touch
Search
Domain
Delete
Add.
@
Q
W
E
X
R
T
Y
B
U
N
I
O
A
Z
C
V
M
.
PC(Email)
Change
Comm.Mode
TIFF-MH
Caps
Alpha
Scan Mode
Memory
Free
Job List
100%
5
Touch [PC], [E-Mail], then [Enter].
–
If mode 476 of the software switch settings was changed, only
communication modes that can be selected appear. For details, re-
fer to “Specifying software switch settings (machine functions)” on
page 9-29.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Quality&
Reduction
Direct
Input
One-Touch Search
Menu
Enter
Com.Mode
InternetFAX
PC
E-Mail
Memory
Free
100%
Job list
3-12
200/250/350
Scan to E-Mail
3
6
Type in the destination address.
–
To change an entered address, press the [C] (clear) key, and then
enter a new address.
–
If parts of frequently used addresses are registered, they can be
quickly entered by touching [Domain]. For details, refer to “Regis-
tering a domain name” on page 2-53.
Fine
SCANReady
No.of Dest. 0
Quality&
Reduction
Direct
Input
One-Touch Search
Menu
Add.
Delete
Domain
@
Q
W
Z
E
X
R
T
Y
B
U
N
I
O
P
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
L
C
V
M
.
PC(Email)
Change
Comm.Mode
TIFF-MH
Alpha
Caps
Scan Mode
Memory
Job List
100%
Free
7
To select the file format and encoding method, touch [Scan Mode].
Fine
SACNReady
No.of Dest. 0
Quality&
Reduction
Direct
Input
One-Touch Search
Menu
Enter
Scan Mode
File Type
TIFF
Coding Method
MH MMR
PDF
Memory
Free
Job List
100%
200/250/350
3-13
Scan to E-Mail
3
8
Specify the Quality & Reduction settings for the original document to
be sent.
–
For details, refer to “Specifying the scanning quality and zoom ra-
tio” on page 3-15.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
Menu
One-Touch Search
Reduction/
Area
Quality
Density
600
dpi
Standard
Fine
Super Fine
Text/Photo
Job List
GSR
Super GSR
Memory
100%
Free
9
Specify the necessary Menu settings.
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, specify the FAX Menu set-
tings.
–
For details, refer to “Specifying additional functions” on page 3-20.
Fine
SCANReady
One-Touch Search
Chain
Quality&
Reduction
Direct
Input
Menu
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
TSI only
TSI
TX Report
2in1
2-Sided TX Rotation TX
Memory
Job List
100%
Free
10 Press the [Start] key.
3-14
200/250/350
Scan to E-Mail
3
3.3
Specifying the scanning quality and zoom ratio
You can specify the scanning quality and zoom ratio by touching [Quality &
Reduction] in the screen that appears when the [Fax/Scan] key on the control
panel is pressed.
!
Detail
When the transmission is complete, the specified settings return to their
default.
Quality
You can select the scan resolution (amount of details). Select from the
following resolution settings according to the type of document being
scanned.
Item
Description
Standard
For documents containing plain text such as handwriting
Fine
Super Fine
600 dpi Text
For documents containing small print, such as newspapers,
or detailed illustrations
Text/Photo
600 dpi Text&Photo
For documents containing both text and images with color
shades, such as photos
GSR
For documents containing color shades, such as photos
Super GSR
600 dpi Photo
!
Detail
If data is sent using the “Text/Photo” setting, moiré patterns may appear
in some photos. To reduce the appearance of moiré patterns, send the
data using the “GSR” or “Super GSR” setting.
When a high resolution is selected to send a clearer image, the size of the
attached image data may exceed the size limitations of the provider or
server being used. Before sending the data, check the transmission
capacity.
200/250/350
3-15
Scan to E-Mail
3
To specify the scanning quality
Touch [Quality & Reduction].
1
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
Search
Menu
IndexList
One-Touch
JPN
US
Fukuok
a
Tokyo Osaka
Nagoya
Center Center
1
2
Memory
100%
Job List
Free
2
Touch [Quality], and then touch the desired quality setting.
–
To select a higher resolution, touch [600dpi].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
One-Touch Search
Menu
Reduction/
Area
Density
Quality
600
dpi
Standard
Fine
Super Fine
Text/Photo
Job List
GSR
Super GSR
Memory
100%
Free
3-16
200/250/350
Scan to E-Mail
Density
3
According to the type of document being sent, select the appropriate density
from the settings described below.
Item
Description
Light
↑
For documents with a dark background color, such as newspa-
pers and blueprints
Std.
↓
For normal documents
Dark
For documents with faint or colored text
!
Detail
If “600 dpi Text” or “600 dpi Text & Photo” is selected, the density can be
set to one of three levels: “Light”, “Std.”, and “Dark”.
To specify the density settings
1
Touch [Quality & Reduction].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
Search
Menu
IndexList
One-Touch
JPN
US
Fukuok
a
Tokyo Osaka
Nagoya
Center Center
1
2
Memory
100%
Job List
Free
2
Touch [Density], and then touch the desired density setting.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
One-Touch Search
Menu
Reduction/
Area
Quality
Density
Light
Std.
Dark
Memory
Free
Job List
100%
200/250/350
3-17
Scan to E-Mail
3
Original Size Set.
You can specify the scan area as a standard size. A portion of a large original
document as well as a non-standard-sized document can be sent in a
standard size.
1
Touch [Quality & Reduction].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
Search
Menu
IndexList
One-Touch
JPN
US
Fukuok
a
Tokyo Osaka
Nagoya
Center Center
1
2
Memory
100%
Job List
Free
2
Touch [Reduction/Area], and then touch [Original Size Set.].
–
The “Zoom” parameter has no effect, even if settings have been
specified.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
One-Touch Search
Menu
Reduction/
Area
Density
Quality
Auto
Detect.
Auto Zoom
Zoom
Original
Size Set.
Memory
Free
Job List
100%
3-18
200/250/350
Scan to E-Mail
3
3
Select a scan area size, and then touch [Enter].
–
Touch [Auto Detect] to automatically select the size closest to the
size of the original document. However, Letter size is selected for
documents smaller than Letter size.
–
Touch [Metric] to specify metric size.
SCANReady
Fine
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
One-Touch Search
Menu
Reduction/
Area
Quality
Density
Original Size Setting
Enter
Letter
Letter
11
x
17
Auto Detect
1
1
1
1
/
2
/
/
/
2x
2x
5
8
2
5
8
Legal
Exec.
Exec.
Metric
Memory
Free
Job List
100%
200/250/350
3-19
Scan to E-Mail
3
3.4
Specifying additional functions
You can add the following functions by pressing the [Fax/Scan] key on the
control panel, then touching [Menu] on the screen that appears.
Note
If the optional fax kit has been installed, [Menu] changes to [Fax Menu].
Note
The following functions have no effect, even if settings have been speci-
fied.
- “TSI” on the Setting 1 tab
- “Rotation TX” on the Setting 1 tab
- “E-Mail Notification” on the Network tab
Item
Description
Setting 1 TX Report
*(Set 1)
Select under which conditions the transmission report is to be output.
Default: Outputs according to the specifications of the administrator.
ON: Prints regardless of the transmission results.
If TX Fails: Prints only when undeliverable.
OFF: Does not print regardless of the transmission results.
2in1
Select whether to send using the 2in1 function (printing two pages to
fit on one page).
2-Sided TX Select whether to perform double-sided transmission. You can specify
the position of the binding margin and the document orientation.
Setting 2 Priority TX Select whether a job is given priority over other.
*(Set 2)
Timer TX
Setting
Select whether to set the send time. Specifies the send time when
“ON” is selected.
Stamp
Specify whether the document is stamped to indicate that it has been
scanned. The document must be loaded into the ADF.
Note
To use the Stamp function, optional stamp unit must be
installed.
Network
*(Net.)
Subject
Selection
The Subject line of an e-mail can be selected from Subject lines spec-
ified in advance.
Reply Ad-
dress
Displays the e-mail address of this machine as the sender of the e-mail
message. When specifying e-mail addresses other than that of this
machine, select an address from a registered one-touch dial button.
File Name
Enter when a set file name is to be specified as the file name when sav-
ing the file. Up to 16 characters can be entered.
*
Changes to ( ) if the optional fax kit has been installed.
3-20
200/250/350
Scan to E-Mail
Specifying the transmission report printing conditions
3
You can specify the conditions for printing a transmission report (TX Report).
The printing conditions for a transmission report are preset with the Report
Settings parameters from the Administrator Management screen. Select the
appropriate printing condition.
Settings can be specified for the following.
Item
Description
Default
Displays the printing conditions specified in Administrator Management
screen.
ON
Prints regardless of the results.
If TX Fails
OFF
Prints when the transmission failed.
Does not print regardless of the results.
200/250/350
3-21
Scan to E-Mail
3
To specify the transmission report printing conditions
Touch [Menu].
1
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [FAX Menu].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
Search
Menu
IndexList
One-Touch
JPN
US
Fukuok
a
Tokyo Osaka
Nagoya
Center Center
1
2
Memory
100%
Job List
Free
2
Touch [Setting 1], then [TX Report].
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [Set 1], then [TX Re-
port].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct Quality&
Input Reduction
Search
Menu
One-Touch
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
TSI only
TSI
TX Report
2in1
2-Sided TX Rotation TX
Memory
Job List
100%
Free
3
Specify the desired printing conditions, and then touch [Enter].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction Menu
Search
One-Touch
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
TX Report
Enter
If TX
Fails
If TX
Fails
Single Dest
Broadcast
:
:
Default
ON
If TX Fails
OFF
Memory
Job List
100%
Free
3-22
200/250/350
Scan to E-Mail
Specifying 2in1 transmission
3
1
2
Touch [Menu].
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [FAX Menu].
–
Touch [Setting 1], then [2in1].
–
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [Set 1], then [2in1].
Touch the button again to cancel the setting.
The button is highlighted.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct Quality&
Input Reduction
Search
Menu
One-Touch
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
TSI only
TSI
TX Report
2in1
2-Sided TX Rotation TX
Memory
Job List
100%
Free
Specifying double-sided transmission
1
2
Touch [Menu].
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [FAX Menu].
–
Touch [Setting 1], then [2-Sided TX].
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [Set 1], then [2-Sided
TX].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct Quality&
Input Reduction
Search
Menu
One-Touch
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
TSI only
TSI
TX Report
2in1
2-Sided TX Rotation TX
Memory
Job List
100%
Free
200/250/350
3-23
Scan to E-Mail
3
3
Select the desired binding margin position.
–
–
–
Left Bind: The document is scanned with a binding margin on the
left side.
Top Bind: The document is scanned with a binding margin at the
top.
Auto: The binding margin is set according to the scanning direction.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Quality&
Reduction
Direct
Input
One-Touch Search
Menu
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
2-Sided TX
OFF
Enter
Original
Direction
Original Bind Direction
Left Bind
Job List
Top Bind
Auto
Memory
Free
100%
4
5
Touch [Original Direction].
Select the orientation of the document, and then touch [Enter].
–
Auto: The long side of the document is automatically set as the
binding position.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Quality&
Reduction
Direct
Input
One-Touch Search
Menu
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
Original Direction
Enter
Auto
1
2
3
4
Memory
Free
Job List
100%
6
Touch [Enter].
Touch [OFF] to cancel the settings.
–
3-24
200/250/350
Scan to E-Mail
3
!
Detail
When loading a double-sided document with pages of different widths,
we recommend loading the pages with the same orientation. When a
document with pages of different orientations is scanned, the orientation
of the image data may not be correct.
Specifying priority transmission
1
2
Touch [Menu].
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [FAX Menu].
–
Touch [Setting 2], then [Priority TX].
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [Set 2], then [Priority
TX].
–
Touch the button again to cancel the setting.
The button is highlighted.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
One-Touch Search
Menu
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
Timer TX
Setting
Priority TX
Job List
Stamp
Memory
Free
100%
200/250/350
3-25
Scan to E-Mail
3
Specifying timer transmission
1
2
Touch [Menu].
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [FAX Menu].
–
Touch [Setting 2], then [Timer TX Setting].
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [Set 2], then [Timer
TX Setting].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
One-Touch Search
Menu
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
Timer TX
Setting
Priority TX
Job List
Stamp
Memory
Free
100%
3
Enter the time for transmission.
–
Touch [Hour] or [Minute], and then type in the desired value using
the keypad.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
One-Touch Search
Menu
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
Enter
Timer TX Setting
OFF
Current Time
15 : 55
16
24
Hour
Minute
Memory
Free
Job List
100%
4
Touch [Enter].
–
Touch [OFF] to cancel the settings.
3-26
200/250/350
Scan to E-Mail
Specifying the stamp setting
3
1
2
Touch [Menu].
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [FAX Menu].
–
Touch [Setting 2], then [Stamp].
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [Set 2], then [Stamp].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
One-Touch Search
Menu
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
Timer TX
Setting
Priority TX
Job List
Stamp
Memory
Free
100%
3
Select the print position of the stamp, and then touch [Enter].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Menu
Quality&
Reduction
Direct
Input
One-Touch Search
Setting 1
Stamp
Setting 2
Network
Enter
Trail Edge
Job List
Lead&Trail
OFF
Memory
Free
100%
200/250/350
3-27
Scan to E-Mail
3
Changing the subject
The subject line of an e-mail message can be selected from subject lines reg-
istered in advance. To specify settings, refer to the Scanner Settings screen,
displayed from the Administrator Management screen on page 2-36.
1
Touch [Menu].
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [FAX Menu].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
Search
Menu
IndexList
One-Touch
JPN
US
Fukuok
a
Tokyo Osaka
Nagoya
Center Center
1
2
Memory
100%
Job List
Free
2
Touch [Network], then [Subject Selection].
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [Net.], then [Subject
Selection].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality/
Reduction
One-Touch Search
Menu
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
Subject
Selection
Reply
Address
File Name
Email Noti-
fication
Memory
Free
Job List
100%
3-28
200/250/350
Scan to E-Mail
3
3
Select a subject, and then touch [Enter].
Touch [OFF] to cancel the settings.
–
SCANReady
Fine
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
One-Touch Search
Subject Selection
Menu
Enter
OFF
1
2
3
4
Information
Minutes
Connection
Conference
Memory
Free
Job List
100%
!
Detail
If no subject has been registered, the e-mail message is sent with the
subject line “[Image File] <one-touch_name>, <machine_name>,
<number>”.
Specifying a reply address
From the e-mail addresses registered with a one-touch dial button, you can
specify the return e-mail address displayed to the recipient.
1
Touch [Menu].
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [FAX Menu].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
Search
Menu
IndexList
One-Touch
JPN
US
Fukuok
a
Tokyo Osaka
Nagoya
Center Center
1
2
Memory
100%
Job List
Free
200/250/350
3-29
Scan to E-Mail
3
2
Touch [Network], then [Reply Address].
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [Net.], then [Reply
Address].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality/
Reduction
One-Touch Search
Menu
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
Subject
Selection
Reply
Address
File Name
Email Noti-
fication
Memory
Free
Job List
100%
3
Select a return address, and then touch [Enter].
Touch [OFF] to cancel the setting.
–
Select the One-Touch key
to be the Reply E-Mail Address.
Reply E-Mail Address
OFF
Enter
IndexList
JPN
US
Nagoya Fukuok
a
Tokyo Osaka
Center Center
1
2
Memory
Free
Job List
100%
3-30
200/250/350
Scan to E-Mail
Specifying a file name
3
You can specify the file name of the image data to be attached in an e-mail.
Up to 16 characters can be entered.
1
Touch [Menu].
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [FAX Menu].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
Search
Menu
IndexList
One-Touch
JPN
US
Fukuok
a
Tokyo Osaka
Nagoya
Center Center
1
2
Memory
100%
Job List
Free
2
Touch [Network], then [File Name].
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [Net.], then [File
Name].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality/
Reduction
One-Touch Search
Menu
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
Subject
Selection
Reply
Address
File Name
Email Noti-
fication
Memory
Free
Job List
100%
200/250/350
3-31
Scan to E-Mail
3
3
Type in the file name, and then touch [Enter].
–
–
Touch [OFF] to cancel the setting.
It is not necessary to type in an extension.
File Name
OFF
Enter
Del.
@
Q
W
Z
E
X
R
C
T
V
Y
U
I
O
P
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
L
B
N
M
SPACE
Caps
Alpha
Memory
100%
Job List
Free
Note
When no file name is specified, the file is automatically sent with a name
in the following format: <machine_name><scan_date_and_time>.<ex-
tension>.
Other functions
Other settings related to sending e-mail messages can be specified. Contact
the administrator of this machine for the administrator management settings.
Item
Description
Refer to
Changing the body
text
You can specify custom text other than the text that was page 2-36
specified at the factory to be inserted into an e-mail
message. Specify this text in the Scanner Settings
screen, displayed from the Administrator Management
screen.
Page Division and Bi- When attaching the data of multi-page documents or
page 2-36
nary Division
data of a large volume, you can send the data separated
into pages or portions of specified size. Specify this set-
ting in the Scanner Settings screen, displayed from the
Administrator Management screen.
3-32
200/250/350
Scan to E-Mail
3.5
If transmission could not be completed
If the transmission could not be completed correctly, a transmission report
is printed.
!
Detail
You can change the transmission report printing conditions. For details,
refer to “Specifying the transmission report printing conditions (Report
Settings)” on page 9-18.
Viewing a transmission report
2
P.1
The following document has not been transmitted. Try to retransmit.
1
(TUE) APR 19 2006 11:32
CHICAGO
User/Account
DESTINATION
ADDRESS
:SALES
DOCUMENT# :6614316-761
TIME STORED :APR 19 11:30
:NEW YORK
TX START
DURATION
MODE
:APR 19 11:31
:28 sec
:PC-M
PAGES
:0 page
RESULT
:EA0006
3
4
IMAGE
5
No.
Item
Report output date and time
Description
1
Shows the date and time that the report was print-
ed.
2
3
Transmission source information Shows the registered transmission source name.
(TSI)
Transmission information
Prints the document number, the duration of the
transmission, and the transmission mode.
200/250/350
3-33
Scan to E-Mail
3
No.
Item
Description
4
Transmission result
Shows the transmission result. Any of the following
may appear.
OK: The transmission was completed successfully.
INTERR: The transmission was interrupted.
F. MEM: The memory capacity was exceeded.
NG: The transmission failed.
PT. DEL: The transmission to some destinations
failed.
Error code: For details, refer to “Network error list”
on page 11-3.
5
Transmission Image
Prints a part of the sent image.
Resending
You can resend up to 20 failed transmissions.
1
Touch [Job List], then [Type], and then select the document that could
not be sent.
–
If [Retry] and [Change Destination] appear in the screen, the docu-
ment does not need to be scanned again.
2
To send to the same destination, touch [Retry].
To send to a different destination, touch [Change Destination].
–
3-34
200/250/350
Scan to E-Mail
3
3.6
Registering destinations
Programming a one-touch dial button
By registering a destination with a one-touch dial button, transmissions can
be performed easily and accurately.
You can register two types of destinations with a one-touch dial button: a
main destination and a secondary destination, where the data is sent if
transmission to the main destination fails.
Note
A secondary recipient can be specified if the optional scanner unit or fax
kit is installed.
If the “Restrict One-Touch Editing” parameter on the Administrator Set
screen (displayed from the Administrator Management screen) is set to
“ON”, [E-Mail Input] is added to the Administrator Management 1 screen
and can be used to register, change and delete one-touch dial buttons.
For details on the Administrator Set screen, refer to the User’s Guide
[Copy Operations].
If the optional fax kit has been installed, the [E-Mail Input] changes to the
[FAX].
!
Detail
The following communication modes can be specified for the secondary
destination.
- PC (E-Mail)
- PC (Scanner)*
- InternetFAX (Internet FAX)
- InternetFAX (IP-TX)*
- InternetFAX (IP Relay)*
- FAX (G3)**
*The communication mode can be specified if the optional scanner unit
or fax kit is installed.
**The communication mode can be specified if the optional fax kit is in-
stalled.
Settings can be specified for the following.
Item
Description
One-Touch Name
Type in the destination name that will appear on the one-touch dial
button. Up to 12 characters can be entered.
200/250/350
3-35
Scan to E-Mail
3
Item
Description
Destination
Type in the destination e-mail address. Up to 64 characters can be en-
tered.
File Type
Select the file format (TIFF or PDF) for sending files.
Coding Method
Select either “MH” or “MMR” as the encoding method for the selected
file format. The data capacity is lowest with “MMR” and highest with
“MH”.
To program a one-touch dial button
1
Press the [Utility/Counter] key.
Utility/
Counter
2
Touch [User Setting].
Utility/Counter
Exit
User
Management
User
Setting
Total
Counter
357
Total Copy
Counter
Admin.
Management
Reports
285
Total
Copy Size
Printer
Setting
5
Check
Detail
Memory
Free
100%
3-36
200/250/350
Scan to E-Mail
3
3
Touch [E-Mail Input].
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [FAX].
–
Utility/Counter
User Setting
Enter
E-Mail
Input
Memory
Free
100%
4
5
Touch [One-Touch].
Utility/Counter
E-Mail
Input
Enter
One-Touch
Index
Mail Program
Domain Name
Memory
Free
100%
Touch the one-touch dial button to be programmed.
–
Touch an index tab or [Index List], then the desired one-touch dial
button.
–
If the machine is set to allow LDAP searches, a screen appears, al-
lowing you to permit or prohibit the address registered with the
one-touch dial button to be found with an LDAP search. If LDAP
searches are not to be allowed, select “No”.
Select One-Touch to REG/CHANGE/DEL.
Touch [Enter].
One-Touch
Enter
IndexList
JPN
US
Tokyo Osaka Nagoya Fukuok
a
Center Center
1
2
Memory
100%
Free
200/250/350
3-37
Scan to E-Mail
3
6
Type in the destination name that will appear on the one-touch dial but-
ton, and then touch [Next].
One-Touch
Name
Cancel
Next
Del.
@
Q
W
Z
E
R
T
Y
U
I
O
P
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
SPACE
Caps
Alpha
Memory
100%
Free
7
Select the communication mode. Touch [PC], [E-Mail], then [Next].
–
If mode 476 of the software switch settings was changed, only
communication modes that can be selected appear. For details, re-
fer to “Specifying software switch settings (machine functions)” on
page 9-29.
Select default Communication Mode.
Com. mode
Cancel
Back
Next
InternetFAX
PC
E-Mail
SMB
FTP
Memory
100%
Free
8
Enter the destination e-mail address.
–
If parts of frequently used addresses are registered, they can be
quickly entered by touching [Domain]. For details, refer to “Entering
a domain name” on page 2-53.
3-38
200/250/350
Scan to E-Mail
3
–
To change an entered address, touch [←] or [→] to move the cur-
sor, or press the [C] (clear) key to enter a address.
E-Mail
Address
Cancel
Back
Next
Del.
@
Q
W
Z
E
X
R
T
V
Y
B
U
I
O
P
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
L
C
N
M
Domain
TIFF-MH
Alpha
Caps
Scan Mode
Memory
100%
Free
9
To change the file format and encoding method, which were specified
in advance by the administrator, touch [Scan Mode].
Select Coding Method.
Utility/Counter
Scan Mode
Cancel
Enter
File Type
TIFF
Coding Method
MMR
MH
PDF
Memory
Free
100%
10 Touch [Enter].
11 Check the information to be registered, and then touch [Enter].
One-
Touch
#014
Cancel
Enter
Delete
One-
Touch
NEW YORK
Dest.
Mode 1
Mode 2
One-Touch Name
Communication Mode
Destination
NEW YORK
E-mail
newyork@xyz. com
Memory
100%
Free
12 Touch [Enter] until the initial screen appears.
200/250/350
3-39
Scan to E-Mail
3
Changing or deleting a one-touch dial button
1
2
Perform steps 1 through 4 of the procedure in “To program a one-
touch dial button”.
Touch the one-touch dial button to be change or deleted.
–
If the specified one-touch dial button is programmed as an admin-
istrator forwarding destination, the screen for entering the adminis-
trator number appears.
Select One-Touch to REG/CHANGE/DEL.
Touch [Enter].
One-Touch
Enter
IndexList
JPN
US
Tokyo Osaka Nagoya Fukuok
a
Tokyo2
Center Center
1
2
Memory
100%
Free
3
Touch the button for the information to be changed, and then make the
change.
–
To delete the information, touch [Delete], check that the correct in-
formation is to be deleted, and then touch [OK].
One-
Touch
#014
Cancel
Enter
Delete
One-
Touch
Tokyo2
Dest.
Mode 1
Mode 2
One-Touch Name
Communication Mode
Destination
Tokyo2
E-mail
Tokyo2@xyz. com
Memory
100%
Free
4
5
Check the information to be registered, and then touch [Enter].
Touch [Enter] until the initial screen appears.
3-40
200/250/350
Scan to E-Mail
Copying a one-touch dial button
3
1
Perform steps 1 through 4 of the procedure in “To program a one-
touch dial button”.
2
3
Touch the one-touch dial button to be copied.
Touch [One-Touch], then [One-Touch Copy].
One-
Touch
Tokyo2
Dest.
#014
Cancel
Enter
Delete
One-
Touch
Mode 1
Mode 2
One-Touch Copy
Memory
Free
100%
4
Touch the one-touch dial button where the information is copied to.
–
–
Select a one-touch dial button that has not yet been programmed.
To deselect the one-touch dial button where the information is to
be copied to, touch the selected one-touch dial button again.
Select the One-Touch key
you wish to copy to.
One-Touch Copy
JPN US
Cancel
Enter
IndexList
Tokyo Osaka Nagoya Fukuok
a
Center
1
Center
2
Tokyo2
Memory
Free
100%
5
Touch [Enter] until the initial screen appears.
200/250/350
3-41
Scan to E-Mail
3
Registering/deleting a secondary destination
0 A secondary recipient can be specified if the optional scanner unit or fax
kit is installed.
1
2
3
Perform steps 1 through 4 of the procedure in “To program a one-
touch dial button”.
Touch the one-touch dial button where the secondary destination is to
be registered.
Touch [One-Touch], then [Sub Address Registration].
One-
Touch
Tokyo2
Dest.
#014
Cancel
Enter
Delete
One-
Touch
Mode 1
Mode 2
One-Touch Copy
Sub Address
Registration
NO
Switch Sub/Main
Addresses
Memory
Free
100%
4
Select the communication mode for the secondary destination.
Select default Communication Mode.
Com.Mode
Cancel
Enter
FAX
InternetFAX
PC
E-Mail
Scanner
Memory
Free
100%
–
If mode 476 of the software switch settings was changed, only
communication modes that can be selected appear. For details, re-
fer to “Specifying software switch settings (machine functions)” on
page 9-29.
3-42
200/250/350
Scan to E-Mail
3
5
Enter the secondary destination information, and then touch [Enter].
Sub Address
Registration
Cancel
Enter
Mode 1
Destination
Mode 2
Communication Mode
Destination
E-Mail
Memory
Free
100%
6
Touch [Enter] until the initial screen appears.
200/250/350
3-43
Scan to E-Mail
3
Naming an index
By classifying one-touch dial buttons into indexes named, for example,
“Branches” or “Clients”, you can easily find a desired one-touch dial button.
!
Detail
An index name can contain up to 8 characters.
36 indexes containing up to 15 one-touch dial button can be pro-
grammed.
To name an index
1
2
Perform steps 1 through 3 of the procedure in “To program a one-
touch dial button”.
Touch [Index].
Utility/Counter
E-Mail
Input
Enter
One-Touch
Index
Mail Program
Domain Name
Memory
Free
100%
3
Touch the index button to be programmed.
Index
Enter
JPN
US
1
/
2
Memory
Free
100%
3-44
200/250/350
Scan to E-Mail
3
4
Type in the index name, and then touch [Enter].
Index Name
Cancel
Enter
Del.
@
Q
W
Z
E
X
R
C
T
V
Y
B
U
N
I
O
P
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
SPACE
Alpha
Caps
Memory
Free
100%
5
Touch [Enter] until the first screen appears.
Registering mail programs
If settings to be applied to a transmission are registered with the destination
information, a transmission can be performed with the registered settings
simply by touching a one-touch dial button. This is known as a mail program
and is convenient when always sending transmissions with specific settings
to a specific destination.
If the optional fax kit has been installed, the [Mail Program] changes to the
[FAX Program].
200/250/350
3-45
Scan to E-Mail
3
As shown below, the settings of certain parameters may not be available for
registration in a program, depending on the operation used. Refer to the
page for each item.
o: Available
+: Available under certain conditions
– : Unavailable
Operation
Parameter
Scan to
E-Mail
Scan to FTP Scan to SMB Scan to HDD Internet fax
Quality
Density
Zoom
o
o
–
o
o
–
o
o
–
o
o
–
o
o
–
Original Size
Set.
o
o
o
o
o
TSI
–
–
–
–
o
o
o
o
+
TX Report
2in1
o
o
o
–
o
o
o
–
o
o
o
–
o
o
o
–
2-Sided TX
Rotation TX
Priority TX
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Timer TX Set-
ting
Stamp
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
+
+
+
–
Subject
Reply
o
o
–
–
–
–
File Name
o
o
o
o
o
o
E-Mail Notifi-
cation
!
Detail
Up to 30 mail programs can be registered. However, the total number of
mail programs and one-touch button may not exceed 540.
Up to 300 destinations can be registered per mail program.
Note
To use the Stamp function, optional stamp unit must be installed.
3-46
200/250/350
Scan to E-Mail
3
!
Detail
For procedures on specifying settings for the various operations, refer to
the following pages.
Scan to E-Mail (p. 3-11, p. 3-15)
Scan to FTP (p. 4-11, p. 4-16)
Scan to SMB (p. 5-10, p. 5-15)
Scan to E-HDD (User’s Guide [Box Operations])
Internet fax (p. 6-12, p. 6-16)
200/250/350
3-47
Scan to E-Mail
3
To register a mail program
1
Press the [Utility/Counter] key.
Utility/
Counter
2
Touch [User Setting].
Utility/Counter
Exit
User
Management
User
Setting
Total
Counter
357
Total Copy
Counter
Admin.
Management
Reports
285
Total
Copy Size
Printer
Setting
5
Check
Detail
Memory
Free
100%
3
Touch [E-Mail Input].
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [FAX].
–
Utility/Counter
User Setting
Enter
E-Mail
Input
Memory
Free
100%
3-48
200/250/350
Scan to E-Mail
3
4
Touch [Mail Program].
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [FAX Program].
–
Utility/Counter
E-Mail
Input
Enter
One-Touch
Index
Mail Program
Domain Name
Memory
Free
100%
5
Touch the one-touch dial button to be registered.
Touch an Index tab or [Index List], then the desired one-touch dial
button.
–
Select One-Touch to REG/CHANGE/DEL.
Touch [Enter].
One-Touch
Enter
IndexList
JPN
US
Tokyo Osaka Nagoya Fukuok
a
Center Center
1
2
Memory
100%
Free
200/250/350
3-49
Scan to E-Mail
3
6
Type in the program name which will appear on the one-touch dial but-
ton, and then touch [Next].
–
The program name can contain up to 12 characters.
Program Name
Cancel
Next
Del.
@
Q
W
Z
E
X
R
T
V
Y
B
U
N
I
O
P
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
L
C
M
SPACE
Caps
Alpha
Memory
100%
Free
7
If the optional fax kit has been installed, select the transmission type,
and then touch [Next].
Select Program Mode.
FAX Program
Cancel
Back
Next
TX
Batch
Polling RX
Memory
100%
Free
8
Specify the destination.
–
To specify the destination with a one-touch dial button, touch [One-
Touch], touch the one-touch dial button for the desired destination,
and then touch [Enter].
–
To specify the destination with a one-touch search, touch [Search],
specify the destination, and then touch [Enter].
3-50
200/250/350
Scan to E-Mail
3
–
If no destination is to be registered, touch [No Destination].
Select destination.
Email Prog.
Dest. :
Next
0
Cancel
Back
No
Destination
One-Touch
Search
Memory
100%
Free
9
Touch [Next].
10 Touch [Transmission Setting].
E-Mail Program
Center1
Cancel
Enter
Delete
Program Name
Center1
002
Destination
Transmission Setting
Memory
Free
100%
11 Specify the settings to be registered.
–
Touch [Quality] to specify settings for “Quality”, “Density”, “Zoom”,
and “Original Size Set.”.
–
Touch [Menu 1] to specify settings for “TSI”,“TX Report”, “Priority
TX”, “Timer TX Setting”, “2in1”, “2-Sided TX”, “Rotation TX”, and
“Stamp”.
–
Touch [Menu 2] to specify the settings for “Subject Selection”,
“Reply Address”, “File Name”, and “Email Notification”.
200/250/350
3-51
Scan to E-Mail
3
–
In order to use the “Stamp” function, the optional stamp unit must
be installed.
E-Mail Program
Dest.
Enter
Menu 1
Menu 2
Quality
Fine
Quality
Density
Auto
Detect.
Original
Size Set.
Auto Zoom
Zoom
Memory
Free
100%
12 Touch [Enter].
13 Check the information to be registered, and then touch [Enter].
E-Mail Program
Cancel
Enter
Center1
Delete
Program Name
Center1
002
Destination
Transmission Setting
Memory
Free
100%
14 Touch [Enter] until the initial screen appears.
3-52
200/250/350
Scan to E-Mail
Changing/deleting a mail program
3
1
2
Perform steps 1 through 4 of the procedure in “To program a one-
touch dial button”.
Touch the one-touch dial button with the mail program to be changed
or deleted.
–
Touch an Index tab or [Index List], then the desired one-touch dial
button.
Select One-Touch to REG/CHANGE/DEL.
Touch [Enter].
One-Touch
Enter
IndexList
JPN
US
Tokyo Osaka Nagoya Fukuok
a
Center Center
1
2
Memory
100%
Free
3
Touch the button for the setting to be changed, and then change the
setting. To delete the mail program, touch [Delete].
E-Mail Program
Center1
Cancel
Enter
Delete
Program Name
Center1
002
Destination
Transmission Setting
Memory
Free
100%
4
5
Check the information to be registered, and then touch [Enter].
Touch [Enter] until the initial screen appears.
200/250/350
3-53
Scan to E-Mail
3
3-54
200/250/350
4 Scan to FTP
Scan to FTP
4
4
4.1
You can transmit data simply by touching a one-touch dial button if the sec-
ondary destination of the upload destination or a mail program has been reg-
istered with a one-touch dial button in advance.
!
Detail
For registering one-touch dial buttons, refer to “Registering destinations”
on page 4-29.
For registering mail programs, refer to “Registering mail programs” on
page 3-45.
Selecting a one-touch dial button
A one-touch dial button can be selected in any of the following ways. Use the
appropriate method according to the number of recipients and the desired
use.
-
-
Directly touching the one-touch dial button
Entering the number of the one-touch dial button
Specifying a destination by touching a one-touch dial button
1
2
Position the document to be scanned.
Press the [Fax/Scan] button.
Fax/Scan
4-2
200/250/350
Scan to FTP
4
–
in the User’s Choice screen that appears. For details, refer to the
User’s Guide [Copy Operations].
3
4
Touch [One-Touch].
Select the index containing the desired destination, and then touch the
one-touch dial button.
–
–
–
To select an index, touch the corresponding tab, or touch [←] or [→]
to select a different one.
To change the index name, refer to “To name an index” on
page 3-44.
You can specify multiple destinations for one transmission with the
same one-touch dial button. Up to 300 destinations can be speci-
fied at a time.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct Quality&
Input Reduction
Search
Menu
One-Touch
IndexList
JPN
US
Tokyo Osaka Nagoya Fukuok
Center Center
1
2
Memory
100%
Job List
Free
5
Specify the Quality & Reduction settings for the original document to
be sent.
–
For details, refer to “Specifying the scanning quality and zoom ra-
tio” on page 4-11.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
Menu
One-Touch Search
Reduction/
Area
Quality
Density
600
dpi
Standard
Fine
Super Fine
Text/Photo
Job List
GSR
Super GSR
Memory
100%
Free
200/250/350
4-3
Scan to FTP
4
6
Specify the necessary Menu settings.
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, specify the FAX Menu set-
tings.
–
For details, refer to “Specifying additional functions” on page 4-16.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Quality&
Reduction
Direct
Input
One-Touch Search
Menu
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
TSI only
TSI
TX Report
2in1
2-Sided TX Rotation TX
Memory
Job List
100%
Free
7
Press the [Start] key.
Entering the number of a one-touch dial button
A one-touch dial button is assigned a number, as shown in the illustration.
You can quickly select a destination by specifying the number of a one-touch
dial button instead the button.
1
Position the document to be scanned.
4-4
200/250/350
Scan to FTP
4
2
Press the [Fax/Scan] key.
Fax/Scan
3
Press the [#] key on the control panel.
200/250/350
4-5
Scan to FTP
Use the keypad to type in the number of a one-touch dial button.
4
4
–
You can specify multiple destinations for simultaneous transmis-
sion with the same one-touch dial button. Up to 300 destinations
can be specified at a time.
Fine
SCANReady
#
Quality&
Reduction
Direct
Input
Search
Menu
One-Touch
IndexList
JPN
US
Tokyo Osaka Nagoya Fukuok
a
Center Center
1
2
Memory
Free
JobList
100%
The specified one-touch dial button is highlighted.
5
Specify the Quality & Reduction settings for the original document to
be sent.
–
For details, refer to “Specifying the scanning quality and zoom ra-
tio” on page 4-11.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
Menu
One-Touch Search
Reduction/
Area
Quality
Density
600
dpi
Standard
Fine
Super Fine
Text/Photo
Job List
GSR
Super GSR
Memory
100%
Free
4-6
200/250/350
Scan to FTP
4
6
Specify the necessary Menu settings.
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, specify the FAX Menu set-
tings.
–
For details, refer to “Specifying additional functions” on page 4-16.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Quality&
Reduction
Direct
Input
One-Touch Search
Menu
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
TSI only
TSI
TX Report
2in1
2-Sided TX Rotation TX
Memory
Job List
100%
Free
7
Press the [Start] key.
200/250/350
4-7
Scan to FTP
4
Searching for a one-touch dial button
To find a one-touch dial button, the name of a destination registered with the
button can be searched for.
1
2
Position the document to be scanned.
Press the [Fax/Scan] key.
Fax/Scan
3
4
Touch [Search].
Type in the destination name, and then touch [Search].
A screen appears, containing the one-touch dial buttons programmed
with a destination that begins with the entered name.
Search One-Touch Keys
Cancel
Search
Del.
@
Q
W
Z
E
X
R
C
T
V
Y
B
U
N
I
O
P
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
_
L
-
M
.
,
SPACE
Alpha
Caps
Memory
Free
100%
Job List
5
Touch the desired one-touch dial button.
4-8
200/250/350
Scan to FTP
4
–
You can specify multiple destinations for simultaneous transmis-
sion with the same one-touch dial button. Up to 300 destinations
can be specified at a time.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Menu
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
One-Touch
Search
#001 Osaka
1
1
Search
Memory
Free
Job List
100%
6
Specify the Quality & Reduction settings for the original document to
be sent.
–
For details, refer to “Specifying the scanning quality and zoom ra-
tio” on page 4-11.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
Menu
One-Touch Search
Reduction/
Area
Quality
Density
600
dpi
Standard
Fine
Super Fine
Text/Photo
Job List
GSR
Super GSR
Memory
100%
Free
200/250/350
4-9
Scan to FTP
4
7
Specify the necessary Menu settings.
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, specify the FAX Menu set-
tings.
–
For details, refer to “Specifying additional functions” on page 4-16.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Quality&
Reduction
Direct
Input
One-Touch Search
Menu
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
TSI only
TSI
TX Report
2in1
2-Sided TX Rotation TX
Memory
Job List
100%
Free
8
Press the [Start] key.
4-10
200/250/350
Scan to FTP
4
4.2
Specifying the scanning quality and zoom ratio
You can specify the scan quality and zoom ratio by touching [Quality & Re-
duction] in the screen that appears when the [Fax/Scan] key on the control
panel is pressed.
!
Detail
When the transmission is complete, the specified settings return to their
defaults.
Quality
You can select the scan resolution (amount of details). Select from the fol-
lowing resolution settings according to the type of document being scanned.
Item
Description
Standard
For documents containing plain text such as handwriting
Fine
Super Fine
For documents containing small print, such as newspapers, or
detailed illustrations
600 dpi Text
Text/Photo
600 dpi Text&Photo
For documents containing both text and images with color
shades, such as photos
GSR
For documents containing color shades, such as photos
Super GSR
600 dpi Photo
!
Detail
If data is sent using the “Text/Photo” setting, moiré patterns may appear
in some photos. To reduce the appearance of moiré patterns, send the
data using the “GSR” or “Super GSR” setting.
When a high resolution is selected to send a clearer image, the size of the
attached image data may exceed the size limitations of the provider or
server being used. Before sending the data, check the transmission ca-
pacity.
200/250/350
4-11
Scan to FTP
4
To specify the scanning quality
Touch [Quality & Reduction].
1
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
Search
Menu
IndexList
One-Touch
JPN
US
Fukuok
a
Tokyo Osaka
Nagoya
Center Center
1
2
Memory
100%
Job List
Free
2
Touch [Quality], and then touch the desired quality setting.
–
To select a higher resolution, touch [600dpi].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
One-Touch Search
Menu
Reduction/
Area
Density
Quality
600
dpi
Standard
Fine
Super Fine
Text/Photo
Job List
GSR
Super GSR
Memory
100%
Free
4-12
200/250/350
Scan to FTP
Density
4
According to the type of document being sent, select the appropriate density
from the settings described below.
Item
Description
Light
↑
For documents with a dark background color, such as newspa-
pers and blueprints
Std.
↓
For normal documents
Dark
For documents with faint or colored text
!
Detail
If “600 dpi Text” or “600 dpi Text & Photo” is selected, the density can be
set to one of three levels: “Light”, “Std.”, and “Dark”.
To specify a density setting
1
Touch [Quality & Reduction].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
Search
Menu
IndexList
One-Touch
JPN
US
Fukuok
a
Tokyo Osaka
Nagoya
Center Center
1
2
Memory
100%
Job List
Free
200/250/350
4-13
Scan to FTP
Touch [Density], and then touch the desired density setting.
4
2
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
One-Touch Search
Menu
Reduction/
Area
Quality
Density
Light
Std.
Dark
Memory
Free
Job List
100%
Original Size Set.
You can specify the scan area as a standard size. A portion of a large original
document as well as a non-standard-sized document can be sent in a stand-
ard size.
1
Touch [Quality & Reduction].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
Search
Menu
IndexList
One-Touch
JPN
US
Fukuok
a
Tokyo Osaka
Nagoya
Center Center
1
2
Memory
100%
Job List
Free
4-14
200/250/350
Scan to FTP
4
2
Touch [Reduction/Area], and then touch [Original Size Set.].
–
The “Zoom” parameter has no effect, even if settings have been
specified.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
One-Touch Search
Menu
Reduction/
Area
Density
Quality
Auto
Detect.
Auto Zoom
Zoom
Original
Size Set.
Memory
Free
Job List
100%
3
Select a scan area size, and then touch [Enter].
–
Touch [Auto Detect] to automatically select the size closest to the
size of the original document. However, Letter size is selected for
documents smaller than Letter size.
–
Touch [Metric] to specify metric sizes.
SCANReady
Fine
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
One-Touch Search
Menu
Reduction/
Area
Quality
Density
Original Size Setting
Enter
Letter
Letter
11
x
17
Auto Detect
1
1
1
1
/
2
/
/
/
2x
2x
5
8
2
5
8
Legal
Exec.
Exec.
Metric
Memory
Free
Job List
100%
200/250/350
4-15
Scan to FTP
4
4.3
Specifying additional functions
You can add the following functions by pressing the [Fax/Scan] key on the
control panel, then touching [Menu] on the screen that appears.
Note
If the optional fax kit has been installed, [Menu] changes to [Fax Menu].
Note
The following functions and parameters have no effect, even if settings
have been specified.
- “TSI” on the Setting 1 tab
- “Rotation TX” on the Setting 1 tab
- “Subject Selection” on the Network tab
- “Reply Address” on the Network tab
Item
Description
Setting 1 TX Report
*(Set 1)
Select under which conditions the transmission report is to be output.
Default: Outputs according to the specifications of the administrator.
ON: Prints regardless of the transmission results.
If TX Fails: Prints only when undeliverable.
OFF: Does not print regardless of the transmission results.
2in1
Select whether to send using the 2in1 function (printing two pages to
fit on one page).
2-Sided TX Select whether to perform double-sided transmission. You can spec-
ify the position of the binding margin and the document orientation.
Setting 2 Priority TX
Select whether a job is given priority over others.
*(Set 2)
Timer TX
Setting
Select whether to set the send time. Specifies the send time when
“ON” is selected.
Stamp
Specify whether the document is stamped to indicate that it has been
scanned. The document must be loaded into the ADF.
Note
To use the Stamp function, optional stamp unit must be
installed.
Network
*(Net.)
File Name
Enter when a set file name is to be specified as the file name when
saving the file. Up to 16 characters can be entered.
E-Mail Noti- Specify whether to have an e-mail message sent to a specified one-
fication touch destination to notify you when the transmission is complete.
*
Changes to ( ) if the optional fax kit has been installed.
4-16
200/250/350
Scan to FTP
Specifying the transmission report printing conditions
4
You can specify the conditions for printing a transmission report (TX Report).
The printing conditions for a transmission report are preset with the Report
Settings parameters from the Administrator Management screen. Select the
appropriate printing condition.
Settings can be specified for the following.
Item
Description
Default
Displays the printing conditions specified in the Administrator
Management screen.
ON
Prints regardless of the results.
If TX Fails
OFF
Prints when the transmission failed.
Does not print regardless of the results.
To specify the transmission report printing conditions
1
Touch [Menu].
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [FAX Menu].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
Search
Menu
IndexList
One-Touch
JPN
US
Fukuok
a
Tokyo Osaka
Nagoya
Center Center
1
2
Memory
100%
Job List
Free
200/250/350
4-17
Scan to FTP
4
2
Touch [Setting 1], then [TX Report].
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [Set 1], then [TX Re-
port].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct Quality&
Input Reduction
Search
Menu
One-Touch
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
TSI only
TSI
TX Report
2in1
2-Sided TX Rotation TX
Memory
Job List
100%
Free
3
Specify the desired printing conditions, and then touch [Enter].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction Menu
Search
One-Touch
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
TX Report
Enter
If TX
Fails
If TX
Fails
Single Dest
Broadcast
:
:
Default
ON
If TX Fails
OFF
Memory
Job List
100%
Free
4-18
200/250/350
Scan to FTP
Specifying 2in1 transmission
4
1
2
Touch [Menu].
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [FAX Menu].
–
Touch [Setting 1], then [2in1].
–
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [Set 1], then [2in1].
Touch the button again to cancel the setting.
The button is highlighted.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct Quality&
Input Reduction
Search
Menu
One-Touch
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
TSI only
TSI
TX Report
2in1
2-Sided TX Rotation TX
Memory
Job List
100%
Free
Specifying double-sided transmission
1
2
Touch [Menu].
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [FAX Menu].
–
Touch [Setting 1], then [2-Sided TX].
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [Set 1], then [2-Sided
TX].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct Quality&
Input Reduction
Search
Menu
One-Touch
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
TSI only
TSI
TX Report
2in1
2-Sided TX Rotation TX
Memory
Job List
100%
Free
200/250/350
4-19
Scan to FTP
4
3
Select the desired binding margin position.
–
–
–
Left Bind: The document is scanned with a binding margin on the
left side.
Top Bind: The document is scanned with a binding margin at the
top.
Auto: The binding margin is set according to the scanning direction.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Quality&
Reduction
Direct
Input
One-Touch Search
Menu
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
2-Sided TX
OFF
Enter
Original
Direction
Original Bind Direction
Left Bind
Job List
Top Bind
Auto
Memory
Free
100%
4
5
Touch [Original Direction].
Select the orientation of the document, and then touch [Enter].
–
Auto: The long side of the document is automatically set as the
binding position.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Quality&
Reduction
Direct
Input
One-Touch Search
Menu
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
Original Direction
Enter
Auto
1
2
3
4
Memory
Free
Job List
100%
6
Touch [Enter].
Touch [OFF] to cancel the settings.
–
4-20
200/250/350
Scan to FTP
4
!
Detail
When loading a double-sided document with pages of different widths,
we recommend loading the pages with the same orientation. When a
document with pages of different orientations is scanned, the orientation
of the image data may not be correct.
Specifying priority transmission
1
2
Touch [Menu].
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [FAX Menu].
–
Touch [Setting 2], then [Priority TX].
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [Set 2], then [Priority
TX].
–
Touch the button again to cancel the setting.
The button is highlighted.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
One-Touch Search
Menu
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
Timer TX
Setting
Priority TX
Job List
Stamp
Memory
Free
100%
200/250/350
4-21
Scan to FTP
4
Specifying timer transmission
1
2
Touch [Menu].
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [FAX Menu].
–
Touch [Setting 2], then [Timer TX Setting].
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [Set 2], then [Timer
TX Setting].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
One-Touch Search
Menu
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
Timer TX
Setting
Priority TX
Job List
Stamp
Memory
Free
100%
3
Enter the time for transmission.
–
Touch [Hour] and [Minute], and then type in the desired value using
the keypad.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
One-Touch Search
Menu
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
Enter
Timer TX Setting
OFF
Current Time
15 : 55
16
24
Hour
Minute
Memory
Free
Job List
100%
4
Touch [Enter].
–
Touch [OFF] to cancel the settings.
4-22
200/250/350
Scan to FTP
Specifying the stamp setting
4
1
2
Touch [Menu].
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [FAX Menu].
–
Touch [Setting 2], then [Stamp].
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [Set 2], then [Stamp].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
One-Touch Search
Menu
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
Timer TX
Setting
Priority TX
Job List
Stamp
Memory
Free
100%
3
Select the print position of the stamp, and then touch [Enter].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Menu
Quality&
Reduction
Direct
Input
One-Touch Search
Setting 1
Stamp
Setting 2
Network
Enter
Trail Edge
Job List
Lead&Trail
OFF
Memory
Free
100%
200/250/350
4-23
Scan to FTP
4
Specifying the e-mail notification destination
When the transmission of the data is complete, an message can be sent to
the destination specified in the URL of the uploaded destination.
1
Touch [Menu].
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [FAX Menu].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
Search
Menu
IndexList
One-Touch
JPN
US
Fukuok
a
Tokyo Osaka
Nagoya
Center Center
1
2
Memory
100%
Job List
Free
2
Touch [Network], then [Email Notification].
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [Net.], then [Email
Notification].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality/
Reduction
One-Touch Search
Menu
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
Subject
Selection
Reply
Address
File Name
Email Noti-
fication
Memory
Free
Job List
100%
4-24
200/250/350
Scan to FTP
4
3
Select the destination address, and then touch [Enter].
Touch [OFF] to cancel the setting.
–
Select E-Mail Notification Address
from One-Touch keys.
E-Mail Notification
Address
Enter
OFF
IndexList
JPN
US
Tokyo Osaka Nagoya Fukuok
a
Center Center
1
2
Memory
Free 100%
Job List
Specifying a file name
You can specify the file name of the image data to be sent. Up to 16 charac-
ters can be entered.
When no file name is specified, the file is automatically sent with a name in
the following format: <machine_name><scan_date_and_time>.<extension>.
1
Touch [Menu].
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [FAX Menu].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
Search
Menu
IndexList
One-Touch
JPN
US
Fukuok
a
Tokyo Osaka
Nagoya
Center Center
1
2
Memory
100%
Job List
Free
200/250/350
4-25
Scan to FTP
4
2
Touch [Network], then [File Name].
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [Net.], then [File
Name].
–
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality/
Reduction
One-Touch Search
Menu
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
Subject
Selection
Reply
Address
File Name
Email Noti-
fication
Memory
Free
Job List
100%
3
Type in the file name, and then touch [Enter].
–
–
Touch [OFF] to cancel the setting.
It is not necessary to type in a extension.
File Name
OFF
Enter
Del.
@
Q
W
Z
E
X
R
C
T
V
Y
U
I
O
P
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
L
B
N
M
SPACE
Caps
Alpha
Job List
Memory
100%
Free
4-26
200/250/350
Scan to FTP
4.4
If transmission could not be completed
If the transmission could not be completed correctly, a transmission report
is printed.
!
Detail
You can change the transmission report printing conditions. For details,
refer to “Specifying the transmission report printing conditions (Report
Settings)” on page 9-18.
Viewing a transmission report
2
P.1
The following document has not been transmitted. Try to retransmit.
(TUE) APR 19 2006 10:23
1
CHICAGO
User/Account
DESTINATION
ADDRESS
:SALES
DOCUMENT# :6614316-761
TIME STORED :APR 1910:09
:NEW YORK
:192.168.1.10
TX START
DURATION
MODE
:APR 1910:22
:1 min, 30 sec
:FTP
PAGES
:1page
RESULT
:ED09C6
3
5
4
IMAGE
No.
Item
Report output date and time
Description
1
Shows the date and time that the report was
printed.
2
3
Transmission source information (TSI)
Transmission information
Shows the registered transmission source
name.
Prints the document number, the duration of
the transmission, and the transmission-
mode.
200/250/350
4-27
Scan to FTP
4
No.
Item
Description
4
Transmission result
Shows the transmission result. Any of the
following may appear.
OK: The transmission was completed suc-
cessfully.
INTERR: The transmission was interrupted.
F. MEM: The memory capacity was exceed-
ed.
NG: The transmission failed.
PT. DEL: The transmission to some destina-
tions failed.
Error code: For details, refer to “Network er-
ror list” on page 11-3.
5
Transmission Image
Prints a part of the sent image.
Resending
You can resend up to 20 failed transmission.
1
Touch [Job List], then [Type], and then select the document that could
not be sent.
–
If [Retry] and [Change Destination] appear in the screen, the docu-
ment does not need to be scanned again.
2
To send to the same destination, touch [Retry].
To send to a different destination, touch [Change Destination].
–
4-28
200/250/350
Scan to FTP
4
4.5
Registering destinations
Programming a one-touch dial button
By registering a destination with a one-touch dial button, transmissions can
be performed easily and accurately.
Note
If the “Restrict One-Touch Editing” parameter on the Administrator Set
screen (displayed from the Administrator Management screen) is set to
“ON”, [E-Mail Input] is added to the Administrator Management 1 screen
and can be used to register, change and delete one-touch dial buttons.
For details on the Administrator Set screen, refer to the User’s Guide
[Copy Operations].
If the optional fax kit has been installed, the [E-Mail Input] changes to the
[FAX].
Settings can be specified for the following.
Item
Description
Remote Destination Name
Type in the destination name that will appear on the one-touch
dial button. Up to 12 characters can be entered.
FTP Server Address
Specifies the server address of the upload destination using an IP
address or host name.
Use Proxy
Selects whether to use a proxy server to upload data.
FTP Port No.
Enter the port number to be used for FTP. Enter a numeric value
within the range of 1 to 65535.
Anonymous
Select whether to permit anonymous access (access that does
not require a user name or password). To permit anonymous ac-
cess, select “Yes”. To prohibit anonymous access, select “No”,
and then specify the login user name and password.
Directory
Specify the directory path to the upload destination. Up to 128
characters can be entered.
File Type/Coding Method
Sets the file type and encoding method for saving data.
You can select from TIFF (multiple), TIFF (single), and PDF for the
file type.
Select either “MH” or “MMR” as the encoding method for the se-
lected file format. The data capacity is lowest with “MMR” and
highest with “MH”.
200/250/350
4-29
Scan to FTP
4
To program a one-touch dial button
1
Press the [Utility/Counter] key.
Utility/
Counter
2
Touch [User Setting].
Utility/Counter
Exit
User
Management
User
Setting
Total
Counter
357
Total Copy
Counter
Admin.
Management
Reports
285
Total
Copy Size
Printer
Setting
5
Check
Detail
Memory
Free
100%
3
Touch [E-Mail Input].
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [FAX].
–
Utility/Counter
User Setting
Enter
E-Mail
Input
Memory
Free
100%
4-30
200/250/350
Scan to FTP
4
4
Touch [One-Touch].
Utility/Counter
E-Mail
Input
Enter
One-Touch
Index
Mail Program
Domain Name
Memory
Free
100%
5
Touch the one-touch dial button to be registered.
–
Touch an Index tab or [Index List], then the desired one-touch dial
button.
–
If the machine is set to allow LDAP searches, a screen appears, al-
lowing you to permit or prohibit the address registered with the
one-touch dial button to be found with an LDAP search. If LDAP
searches are not to be allowed, select “No”.
Select One-Touch to REG/CHANGE/DEL.
Touch [Enter].
One-Touch
Enter
IndexList
JPN
US
Tokyo Osaka Nagoya Fukuok
a
Center Center
1
2
Memory
100%
Free
200/250/350
4-31
Scan to FTP
4
6
Type in the destination name that will appear on the one-touch dial but-
ton, and then touch [Next].
One-Touch
Name
Cancel
Next
Del.
@
Q
W
Z
E
X
R
C
T
V
Y
B
U
N
I
O
P
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
SPACE
Caps
Alpha
Memory
100%
Free
7
Select the communication mode. Touch [PC], [FTP], then [Next].
–
If mode 476 of the software switch settings was changed, only
communication modes that can be selected appear. For details, re-
fer to “Specifying software switch settings (machine functions)” on
page 9-29.
Select default Communication Mode.
Com. mode
Cancel
Back
Next
InternetFAX
PC
E-Mail
SMB
FTP
Memory
100%
Free
8
Enter the upload destination host address, and then touch [Next].
–
To specify the host name, touch [Host Name], and then touch
[Next].
4-32
200/250/350
Scan to FTP
4
–
To change an entered address, touch [←] or [→] to move the cur-
sor, or press the [C] (clear) key to enter a new address.
Input the FTP Server Address using the
10-key Pad.
Utility/Counter
IP
Input
Cancel
Back
Next
.
.
.
Delete
Host
Name
9
Select whether to use a proxy server, and then touch [Next].
Indicate whether or not a Proxy
Server will be used (ON=Yes. OFF=No).
Utility/Counter
Use Proxy
ON
Cancel
OFF
Back
Next
Memory
Free
100%
10 Enter the FTP port number. Press the [C] (clear) key to delete the
number, type in the port number using the keypad, and then touch
“Next”.
Enter the FTP Port No. using the
keypad if a Proxy Server is not used.
Utility/Counter
FTP
Port No.
21
Cancel
Back
Next
1
65535
Memory
Free
100%
200/250/350
4-33
Scan to FTP
4
11 Specify the Account Information, and then touch [Next].
–
If “Private Site” is selected, enter the login user name and pass-
word.
If you select Private Site,User Name
and Password is required.
Utility/Counter
Account
Information
Cancel
Back
Next
Private
Site
Anonymous
User Name
Password
Memory
Free
100%
12 Enter the server directory name to be saved, and then touch [Next].
Directory
Cancel
Back
Next
Del.
@
Q
W
Z
E
X
R
C
T
Y
U
N
I
O
P
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
L
V
B
M
SPACE
Caps
Alpha
Memory
100%
Free
13 Check the FTP server information, and then touch [Enter].
File Destination Memory Check
Enter
192.168.1.20
FTP Server Address
Use Proxy
OFF
21
FTP Port No.
Account
Information
Anonymous
public
Directory
Disable
Passive Mode
Memory
Free
100%
4-34
200/250/350
Scan to FTP
14 Check the information to be registered.
4
One-
Touch
#014
Cancel
Enter
Delete
One-
Touch
NEW YORK
Dest.
Mode 1
Mode 2
Remote Dest-
ination Name
NEW YORK
FTP
Communication mode
Destination
192.168.1.20
Memory
Free
100%
15 To specify the file type of the file to be saved and the encoding method,
touch [Mode 1].
16 Select the file format and encoding method, and then touch [Enter].
Select the desired file type and
coding method for scan-to-e-mail.
Utility/Counter
Scanning Mode
Cancel
Enter
File Type/
Coding Method
Mul-
tiple
TIFF
PDF
MH
Single
MMR
Memory
Free
100%
17 Touch [Enter] until the initial screen appears.
200/250/350
4-35
Scan to FTP
4
Changing or deleting a one-touch dial button
1
2
Perform steps 1 through 4 of the procedure in “To program a one-
touch dial button”.
Touch the one-touch dial button to be changed or deleted.
–
If the specified one-touch dial button is programmed as an admin-
istrator forwarding destination, the screen for entering the adminis-
trator number appears.
Select One-Touch to REG/CHANGE/DEL.
Touch [Enter].
One-Touch
Enter
IndexList
JPN
US
Tokyo Osaka Nagoya Fukuok
a
Tokyo2
Center Center
1
2
Memory
100%
Free
3
Touch the button for the information to be changed, and then make the
change.
–
To delete the information, touch [Delete].
One-
Touch
#014
Cancel
Mode 2
Enter
Delete
One-
Touch
NEW YORK
Dest.
Mode 1
Remote Dest-
ination Name
NEW YORK
FTP
Communication mode
Destination
192.168.1.20
Memory
Free
100%
4
5
Check the information to be registered, and then touch [Enter].
Touch [Enter] until the initial screen appears.
4-36
200/250/350
Scan to FTP
Copying a one-touch dial button
4
1
Perform steps 1 through 4 of the procedure in “To program a one-
touch dial button”.
2
3
Touch the one-touch dial button to be copied.
Touch [One-Touch], then [One-Touch Copy].
One-
Touch
Tokyo2
Dest.
#014
Cancel
Mode 2
Enter
Delete
One-
Touch
Mode 1
One-Touch Copy
Memory
Free
100%
4
Touch the one-touch dial button where the information is copied to.
–
–
Select a one-touch dial button that has not yet been programmed.
To deselect the one-touch dial button where the information is to
be copied to, touch the selected one-touch dial button again.
Select the One-Touch key
you wish to copy to.
One-Touch Copy
JPN US
Cancel
Enter
IndexList
Tokyo Osaka Nagoya Fukuok
a
Center
1
Center
2
Tokyo2
Memory
Free
100%
5
Touch [Enter] until the initial screen appears.
200/250/350
4-37
Scan to FTP
4
4-38
200/250/350
5 Scan to SMB
Scan to SMB
5
5
Scan to SMB
5.1
You can transmit data simply by touching a one-touch dial button if the sec-
ondary destination of the upload destination or a mail program has been reg-
istered with a one-touch dial button in advance.
!
Detail
For registering a one-touch dial button, refer to “Registering destina-
tions” on page 5-28.
For registering mail programs, refer to “Registering mail programs” on
page 3-45.
Selecting a one-touch dial button
A one-touch dial button can be selected in any of the following ways. Use the
appropriate method according to the number of recipients and the desired
use.
-
-
Directly touching the one-touch dial button
Entering the number of the one-touch dial button
Specifying a destination by touching a one-touch dial button
1
2
Position the document to be scanned.
Press the [Fax/Scan] key.
Fax/Scan
5-2
200/250/350
Scan to SMB
5
–
in the User’s Choice screen that appears. For details, refer to the
User’s Guide [Copy Operations].
3
4
Touch [One-Touch].
Select the index containing the desired destination, and then touch the
one-touch dial button.
–
–
–
To select an index, touch the corresponding tab, or touch [←] or [→]
to select a different one.
To change the index name, refer to “To name an index” on
page 3-44.
You can specify multiple destinations for one transmission with the
same one-touch dial button. Up to 300 destinations can be speci-
fied at a time.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct Quality&
Input Reduction
Search
Menu
One-Touch
IndexList
JPN
US
a
Center Center
1
2
Memory
100%
Job List
Free
5
Specify the Quality & Reduction settings for the original document to
be sent.
–
For details, refer to “Specifying the scanning quality and zoom ra-
tio” on page 5-10.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
Menu
One-Touch Search
Reduction/
Area
Quality
Density
600
dpi
Standard
Fine
Super Fine
Text/Photo
Job List
GSR
Super GSR
Memory
100%
Free
200/250/350
5-3
Scan to SMB
5
6
Specify the necessary Menu settings.
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, specify the FAX Menu set-
tings.
–
For details, refer to “Specifying additional functions” on page 5-15.
Fine
SCANReady
One-Touch Search
Chain
Quality&
Reduction
Direct
Input
Menu
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
TSI only
TSI
TX Report
2in1
2-Sided TX Rotation TX
Memory
Job List
100%
Free
7
Press the [Start] key.
Entering the number of a one-touch dial button
A one-touch dial button is assigned a number, as shown in the illustration.
You can quickly select a destination by specifying the number of a one-touch
dial button instead of touching the button.
1
Position the document to be scanned.
5-4
200/250/350
Scan to SMB
5
2
Press the [Fax/Scan] key.
Fax/Scan
3
Press the [#] key on the control panel.
4
Use the keypad to type in the number of a one-touch dial button.
–
You can specify multiple destinations for simultaneous transmis-
sion with the same one-touch dial button. Up to 300 destinations
can be specified at a time.
Fine
SCANReady
#
Quality&
Reduction
Direct
Input
Search
Menu
One-Touch
IndexList
JPN
US
Tokyo Osaka Nagoya Fukuok
a
Center Center
1
2
Memory
Free
JobList
100%
The specified one-touch dial button is highlighted.
200/250/350
5-5
Scan to SMB
5
5
6
7
Specify the Quality & Reduction settings for the original document to
be sent.
–
For details, refer to “Specifying the scanning quality and zoom ra-
tio” on page 5-10.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
Menu
One-Touch Search
Reduction/
Area
Quality
Density
600
dpi
Standard
Fine
Super Fine
Text/Photo
Job List
GSR
Super GSR
Memory
100%
Free
Specify the necessary Menu settings.
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, specify the FAX Menu set-
tings.
–
For details, refer to “Specifying additional functions” on page 5-15.
Fine
SCANReady
One-Touch Search
Chain
Quality&
Reduction
Direct
Input
Menu
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
TSI only
TSI
TX Report
2in1
2-Sided TX Rotation TX
Memory
Job List
100%
Free
Press the [Start] key.
5-6
200/250/350
Scan to SMB
Searching for a one-touch dial button
5
To find a one-touch dial button, the name of a destination registered with the
button can be searched for.
1
2
Position the document to be scanned.
Press the [Fax/Scan] key.
Fax/Scan
3
4
Touch [Search].
Type in the destination name, and then touch [Search].
A screen appears, containing the one-touch dial buttons programmed
with a destination that begins with the entered name.
Search One-Touch Keys
Cancel
Search
Del.
@
Q
W
Z
E
X
R
C
T
V
Y
B
U
N
I
O
P
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
_
L
-
M
.
,
SPACE
Alpha
Caps
Memory
Free
100%
Job List
200/250/350
5-7
Scan to SMB
5
5
Touch the desired one-touch dial button.
–
You can specify multiple destinations for simultaneous transmis-
sion with the same one-touch dial button. Up to 300 destinations
can be specified at a time.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Menu
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
One-Touch
Search
#001 Osaka
1
1
Search
Memory
Free
Job List
100%
6
Specify the Quality & Reduction settings for the original document to
be sent.
–
For details, refer to “Specifying the scanning quality and zoom ra-
tio” on page 5-10.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
Menu
One-Touch Search
Reduction/
Area
Quality
Density
600
dpi
Standard
Fine
Super Fine
Text/Photo
Job List
GSR
Super GSR
Memory
100%
Free
5-8
200/250/350
Scan to SMB
5
7
Specify the necessary Menu settings.
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, specify the FAX Menu set-
tings.
–
For details, refer to “Specifying additional functions” on page 5-15.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Quality&
Reduction
Direct
Input
One-Touch Search
Menu
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
TSI only
TSI
TX Report
2in1
2-Sided TX Rotation TX
Memory
Job List
100%
Free
8
Press the [Start] key.
200/250/350
5-9
Scan to SMB
5
5.2
Specifying the scanning quality and zoom ratio
You can specify the scanning quality and zoom ratio by touching [Quality &
Reduction] in the screen that appears when the [Fax/Scan] key on the control
panel is pressed.
!
Detail
When the transmission is complete, the specified settings return to their
defaults.
Quality
You can select the scan resolution (amount of details). Select from the fol-
lowing resolution settings according to the type of document being scanned.
Item
Description
Standard
For documents containing plain text such as handwriting
Fine
Super Fine
For documents containing small print, such as newspapers, or
detailed illustrations
600 dpi Text
Text/Photo
600 dpi Text&Photo
For documents containing both text and images with color
shades, such as photos
GSR
For documents containing color shades, such as photos
Super GSR
600 dpi Photo
!
Detail
If data is sent using the “Text/Photo” setting, moiré patterns may appear
in some photos. To reduce the appearance of moiré patterns, send the
data using the “GSR” or “Super GSR” setting.
When a high resolution is selected to send a clearer image, the size of the
attached image data may exceed the size limitations of the provider or
server being used. Before sending the data, check the transmission ca-
pacity.
5-10
200/250/350
Scan to SMB
To specify the scanning quality
Touch [Quality & Reduction].
5
1
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
Search
Menu
IndexList
One-Touch
JPN
US
Fukuok
a
Tokyo Osaka
Nagoya
Center Center
1
2
Memory
100%
Job List
Free
2
Touch [Quality], and then touch the desired quality setting.
–
To select a higher resolution, touch [600dpi].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
One-Touch Search
Menu
Reduction/
Area
Density
Quality
600
dpi
Standard
Fine
Super Fine
Text/Photo
Job List
GSR
Super GSR
Memory
100%
Free
200/250/350
5-11
Scan to SMB
5
Density
According to the type of document being sent, select the appropriate density
from the settings described below.
Item
Description
Light
↑
For documents with a dark background color, such as newspa-
pers and blueprints
Std.
↓
For normal documents
Dark
For documents with faint or colored text
!
Detail
If “600 dpi Text” or “600 dpi Text & Photo” is selected, the density can be
set to one of three levels: “Light”, “Std.”, and “Dark”.
To specify a density setting
1
Touch [Quality & Reduction].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
Search
Menu
IndexList
One-Touch
JPN
US
Fukuok
a
Tokyo Osaka
Nagoya
Center Center
1
2
Memory
100%
Job List
Free
2
Touch [Density], and then touch the desired density setting.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
One-Touch Search
Menu
Reduction/
Area
Quality
Density
Light
Std.
Dark
Memory
Free
Job List
100%
5-12
200/250/350
Scan to SMB
Original Size Set.
5
You can specify the scan area as a standard size. A portion of a large original
document as well as a non-standard-sized document can be sent in a stand-
ard size.
1
Touch [Quality & Reduction].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
Search
Menu
IndexList
One-Touch
JPN
US
Fukuok
a
Tokyo Osaka
Nagoya
Center Center
1
2
Memory
100%
Job List
Free
2
Touch [Reduction/Area], and then touch [Original Size Set.].
–
The “Zoom” parameter has no effect, even if settings have been
specified.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
One-Touch Search
Menu
Reduction/
Area
Density
Quality
Auto
Detect.
Auto Zoom
Zoom
Original
Size Set.
Memory
Free
Job List
100%
200/250/350
5-13
Scan to SMB
5
3
Select a scan area size, and then touch [Enter].
–
Touch [Auto Detect] to automatically select the size closest to the
size of the original document. However, Letter size is selected for
documents smaller than Letter size.
–
Touch [Metric] to specify metric sizes.
SCANReady
Fine
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
One-Touch Search
Menu
Reduction/
Area
Quality
Density
Original Size Setting
Enter
Letter
Letter
11
x
17
Auto Detect
1
1
1
1
/
2
/
/
/
2x
2x
5
8
2
5
8
Legal
Exec.
Exec.
Metric
Memory
Free
Job List
100%
5-14
200/250/350
Scan to SMB
5
5.3
Specifying additional functions
You can add the following functions by pressing the [Fax/Scan] key on the
control panel, then touching [Menu] on the screen that appears.
Note
If the optional fax kit has been installed, [Menu] changes to [Fax Menu].
Note
The following functions and parameters have no effect, even if settings
have been specified.
- “TSI” on the Setting 1 tab
- “Rotation TX” on the Setting 1 tab
- “Subject Selection” on the Network tab
- “Reply Address” on the Network tab
Item
Description
Setting 1 TX Report
*(Set 1)
Select under which conditions the transmission report is to be output.
Default: Outputs according to the specifications of the administrator.
ON: Prints regardless of the transmission results.
If TX Fails: Prints only when undeliverable.
OFF: Does not print regardless of the transmission results.
2in1
Select whether to send using the 2in1 function (printing two pages to
fit on one page).
2-Sided TX Select whether to perform double-sided transmission. You can spec-
ify the position of the binding margin and the document orientation.
Setting 2 Priority TX
Select whether a job is given priority over others.
*(Set 2)
Timer TX
Setting
Select whether to set the send time. Specifies the send time when
“ON” is selected.
Stamp
Specify whether the document is stamped to indicate that it has been
scanned. The document must be loaded into the ADF.
Note
To use the Stamp function, optional stamp unit must be
installed.
Network
*(Net.)
File Name
Enter when a set file name is to be specified as the file name when
saving the file. Up to 16 characters can be entered.
E-Mail Noti- Specify whether to have an e-mail message sent to a specified one-
fication touch destination to notify you when the transmission is complete.
*
Changes to ( ) if the optional fax kit has been installed.
200/250/350
5-15
Scan to SMB
5
Specifying the transmission report printing conditions
You can specify the conditions for printing a transmission report (TX Report).
The printing conditions for a transmission report are preset with the Report
Settings parameters from the Administrator Management screen. Select the
appropriate printing conditions.
Settings can be specified for the following.
Setting
Description
Default
Displays the printing conditions specified in the Administrator
Management screen.
ON
Prints regardless of the results.
If TX Fails
OFF
Prints when the transmission failed.
Does not print regardless of the results.
To specify the transmission report printing conditions
Touch [Menu].
1
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [FAX Menu].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
Search
Menu
IndexList
One-Touch
JPN
US
Fukuok
a
Tokyo Osaka
Nagoya
Center Center
1
2
Memory
100%
Job List
Free
5-16
200/250/350
Scan to SMB
5
2
Touch [Setting 1], then [TX Report].
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [Set 1], then [TX Re-
port].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct Quality&
Input Reduction
Search
Menu
One-Touch
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
TSI only
TSI
TX Report
2in1
2-Sided TX Rotation TX
Memory
Job List
100%
Free
3
Specify the desired printing conditions, and then touch [Enter].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction Menu
Search
One-Touch
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
TX Report
Enter
If TX
Fails
If TX
Fails
Single Dest
Broadcast
:
:
Default
ON
If TX Fails
OFF
Memory
Job List
100%
Free
200/250/350
5-17
Scan to SMB
5
Specifying 2in1 transmission
1
2
Touch [Menu].
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [FAX Menu].
–
Touch [Setting 1], then [2in1].
–
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [Set 1], then [2in1].
Touch the button again to cancel the setting.
The button is highlighted.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct Quality&
Input Reduction
Search
Menu
One-Touch
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
TSI only
TSI
TX Report
2in1
2-Sided TX Rotation TX
Memory
Job List
100%
Free
Specifying double-sided transmission
1
2
Touch [Menu].
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [FAX Menu].
–
Touch [Setting 1], then [2-Sided TX].
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [Set 1], then [2-Sided
TX].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct Quality&
Input Reduction
Search
Menu
One-Touch
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
TSI only
TSI
TX Report
2in1
2-Sided TX Rotation TX
Memory
Job List
100%
Free
5-18
200/250/350
Scan to SMB
5
3
Select the desired binding margin position.
–
Left Bind: The document is scanned with a binding margin on the
left side.
–
Top Bind: The document is scanned with a binding margin at the
top.
–
Auto: The binding margin is set according to the scanning direction.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Quality&
Reduction
Direct
Input
One-Touch Search
Menu
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
2-Sided TX
OFF
Enter
Original
Direction
Original Bind Direction
Left Bind
Job List
Top Bind
Auto
Memory
Free
100%
4
5
Touch [Original Direction].
Select the orientation of the document, and then touch [Enter].
–
Auto: The long side of the document is automatically set as the
binding position.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Quality&
Reduction
Direct
Input
One-Touch Search
Menu
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
Original Direction
Enter
Auto
1
2
3
4
Memory
Free
Job List
100%
6
Touch [Enter].
Touch [OFF] to cancel the setting.
–
200/250/350
5-19
Scan to SMB
5
!
Detail
When loading a double-sided document with pages of different widths,
we recommend loading the pages with the same orientation. When a
document with pages of different orientations is scanned, the orientation
of the image data may not be correct.
Specifying priority transmission
1
2
Touch [Menu].
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [FAX Menu].
–
Touch [Setting 2], then [Priority TX].
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [Set 2], then [Priority
TX].
–
Touch the button again to cancel the settings.
The button is highlighted.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
One-Touch Search
Menu
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
Timer TX
Setting
Priority TX
Job List
Stamp
Memory
Free
100%
5-20
200/250/350
Scan to SMB
Specifying timer transmission
5
1
2
Touch [Menu].
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [FAX Menu].
–
Touch [Setting 2], then [Timer TX Setting].
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [Set 2], then [Timer
TX Setting].
–
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
One-Touch Search
Menu
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
Timer TX
Setting
Priority TX
Job List
Stamp
Memory
Free
100%
3
Enter the time for transmission.
–
Touch [Hour] or [Minute], and then type in the desired value using
the keypad.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
One-Touch Search
Menu
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
Enter
Timer TX Setting
OFF
Current Time
15 : 55
16
24
Hour
Minute
Memory
Free
Job List
100%
4
Touch [Enter].
–
Touch [OFF] to cancel the setting.
200/250/350
5-21
Scan to SMB
5
Specifying the stamp setting
1
2
Touch [Menu].
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [FAX Menu].
–
Touch [Setting 2], then [Stamp].
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [Set 2], then [Stamp].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
One-Touch Search
Menu
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
Timer TX
Setting
Priority TX
Job List
Stamp
Memory
Free
100%
3
Select the print position of the stamp, and then touch [Enter].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Menu
Quality&
Reduction
Direct
Input
One-Touch Search
Setting 1
Stamp
Setting 2
Network
Enter
Trail Edge
Job List
Lead&Trail
OFF
Memory
Free
100%
5-22
200/250/350
Scan to SMB
Specifying the e-mail notification destination
5
When the transmission of the data is complete, an e-mail message can be
sent to the destination specified in the URL of the upload destination.
1
Touch [Menu].
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [FAX Menu].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
Search
Menu
IndexList
One-Touch
JPN
US
Fukuok
a
Tokyo Osaka
Nagoya
Center Center
1
2
Memory
100%
Job List
Free
2
Touch [Network], then [Email Notification].
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [Net.], then [Email
Notification].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality/
Reduction
One-Touch Search
Menu
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
Subject
Selection
Reply
Address
File Name
Email Noti-
fication
Memory
Free
Job List
100%
200/250/350
5-23
Scan to SMB
5
3
Select the destination address, and then touch [Enter].
Touch [OFF] to cancel the setting.
–
Select E-Mail Notification Address
from One-Touch keys.
E-Mail Notification
Address
Enter
OFF
IndexList
JPN
US
Tokyo Osaka Nagoya Fukuok
a
Center Center
1
2
Memory
Free 100%
Job List
Specifying a file name
You can specify the file name of the image data to be sent. Up to 16 charac-
ters can be entered.
When no file name is specified, the file is automatically sent with a name in
the following format: <machine_name><scan_date_and_time>.<extension>.
1
Touch [Menu].
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [FAX Menu].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
Search
Menu
IndexList
One-Touch
JPN
US
Fukuok
a
Tokyo Osaka
Nagoya
Center Center
1
2
Memory
100%
Job List
Free
5-24
200/250/350
Scan to SMB
5
2
Touch [Network], then [File Name].
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [Net.], then [File
Name].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality/
Reduction
One-Touch Search
Menu
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
Subject
Selection
Reply
Address
File Name
Email Noti-
fication
Memory
Free
Job List
100%
3
Type in the file name, and then touch [Enter].
–
–
Touch [OFF] to cancel the setting.
It is not necessary to type in an extension.
File Name
OFF
Enter
Del.
@
Q
W
Z
E
X
R
C
T
V
Y
U
I
O
P
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
L
B
N
M
SPACE
Caps
Alpha
Job List
Memory
100%
Free
200/250/350
5-25
Scan to SMB
5
5.4
If transmission could not be completed
If the transmission could not be completed correctly, a transmission report
is printed.
!
Detail
You can change the transmission report printing conditions. For details,
refer to “Specifying the transmission report printing conditions (Report
Settings)” on page 9-18.
Viewing a transmission report
2
P.1
The following document has not been transmitted. Try to retransmit.
(TUE) APR 19 2006 10:31
CHICAGO
1
User/Account
DESTINATION
ADDRESS
:SALES
DOCUMENT# :6614316-761
TIME STORED :APR 1910:24
:NEW YORK
:192.168.1.111
TX START
DURATION
MODE
:APR 1910:30
:6 sec
:SMB
PAGES
:1page
RESULT
:ED09C6
3
4
IMAGE
5
No.
1
Item
Description
Report output date and time
Shows the registered transmission source name.
2
Transmission source infor-
mation (TSI)
3
4
Transmission information
Shows the document number, the duration of the
transmission, and the transmission mode.
Transmission result
Shows the transmission result. Any of the following
may appear.
OK: The transmission was completed successfully.
INTERR: The transmission was interrupted.
F. MEM: The memory capacity was exceeded.
NG: The transmission failed.
PT. DEL: The transmission to some destinations failed.
Error code: For details, refer to “Network error list” on
page 11-3.
5
Transmission image
Shows a part of the sent image.
5-26
200/250/350
Scan to SMB
5
Resending
You can resend up to 20 failed transmissions.
1
Touch [Job List], then [Type], and then select the document that could
not be sent.
–
If [Retry] and [Change Destination] appear in the screen, the docu-
ment does not need to be scanned again.
2
To send to the same destination, touch [Retry].
To send to a different destination, touch [Change Destination].
–
200/250/350
5-27
Scan to SMB
5
5.5
Registering destinations
Programming one-touch dial button
By registering a destination with a one-touch dial button, transmissions can
be performed easily and accurately.
Note
If the “Restrict One-Touch Editing” parameter on the Administrator Set
screen (displayed from the Administrator Management screen) is set to
“ON”, [E-Mail Input] is added to the Administrator Management 1 screen
and can be used to register, change and delete one-touch dial buttons.
For details on the Administrator Set screen, refer to the User’s Guide
[Copy Operations].
If the optional fax kit has been installed, the [E-Mail Input] changes to the
[FAX].
Settings can be specified for the following.
Item
Description
Remote Destination Name
Type in the destination name that will appear on the one-touch
dial button. Up to 12 characters can be entered.
Host Address
Directory
Specifies the destination computer with an IP address or host
name.
Type in the file path of the destination folder. Up to 128 charac-
ters can be entered.
Note
A shared folder created on the domain controller of
Windows Server 2003 cannot be specified.
User Name
Type in the login name for the destination computer. Up to 32
characters can be entered.
Password
Type in the login password for the destination computer. Up to
14 characters can be entered.
File Type/Coding Method
Sets the file type and encoding method for saving data.
You can select from TIFF (multiple), TIFF (single), and PDF for
the file type.
Select either “MH” or “MMR” as the encoding method for the
selected file format. The data capacity is lowest with “MMR”
and highest with “MH”.
5-28
200/250/350
Scan to SMB
To program a one-touch dial button
5
1
Press the [Utility/Counter] key.
Utility/
Counter
2
Touch [User Setting].
Utility/Counter
Exit
User
Management
User
Setting
Total
Counter
357
Total Copy
Counter
Admin.
Management
Reports
285
Total
Copy Size
Printer
Setting
5
Check
Detail
Memory
Free
100%
3
Touch [E-Mail Input].
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [FAX].
–
Utility/Counter
User Setting
Enter
E-Mail
Input
Memory
Free
100%
200/250/350
5-29
Scan to SMB
5
4
Touch [One-Touch].
Utility/Counter
E-Mail
Input
Enter
One-Touch
Index
Mail Program
Domain Name
Memory
Free
100%
5
Touch the one-touch dial button to be programmed.
–
Touch an Index tab or [Index List], then the desired one-touch dial
button.
–
If the machine is set to allow LDAP searches, a screen appears, al-
lowing you to permit or prohibit the address registered with the
one-touch dial button to be found with an LDAP search. If LDAP
searches are not to be allowed, select “No”.
Select One-Touch to REG/CHANGE/DEL.
Touch [Enter].
One-Touch
Enter
IndexList
JPN
US
Tokyo Osaka Nagoya Fukuok
a
Center Center
1
2
Memory
100%
Free
5-30
200/250/350
Scan to SMB
5
6
Type in the destination name that will appear on the one-touch dial but-
ton, and then touch [Next].
One-Touch
Name
Cancel
Next
Del.
@
Q
W
Z
E
R
T
Y
U
I
O
P
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
SPACE
Caps
Alpha
Memory
100%
Free
7
Select the communication mode. Touch [PC], [SMB], then [Next].
–
If mode 476 of the software switch settings was changed, only
communication modes that can be selected appear. For details, re-
fer to “Specifying software switch settings (machine functions)” on
page 9-29.
Select default Communication Mode.
Com. mode
Cancel
Back
Next
InternetFAX
PC
E-Mail
SMB
FTP
Memory
Free
100%
200/250/350
5-31
Scan to SMB
Enter the destination host address, and then touch [Next].
5
8
–
To change the host name, touch [Host Name], and then touch
[Next].
–
To reenter an address, touch [←] or [→] to move the cursor, or
press the [C] (clear) key to enter a new address.
Set IP address of destination PC.
Utility/Counter
IP
Input
Cancel
Back
Next
.
.
.
Delete
Host
Name
Memory
Free
100%
9
Enter the file path of the data to be saved, and then touch [Next].
Directory
Cancel
Back
Next
Del.
@
Q
W
Z
E
X
R
C
T
Y
U
N
I
O
P
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
_
L
-
V
B
M
.
,
SPACE
Caps
Alpha
Memory
100%
Free
10 Type in the login user name, and then touch [Next].
User Name
Cancel
Back
Next
Del.
@
Q
W
Z
E
X
R
C
T
Y
U
N
I
O
P
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
L
V
B
M
SPACE
Caps
Alpha
Memory
100%
Free
5-32
200/250/350
Scan to SMB
5
11 Type in the login password, and then touch [Next].
To confirm the password, enter the password again.
–
Utility/Counter
Next
Back
Cancel
New Password
Confirm New
Password
Memory
100%
Free
12 Check the destination information.
SMB
Setting
Enter
192.168.1.30
public
Host Address
Directory
user
User Name
User Password
Memory
100%
Free
13 Check the information to be registered.
One-
Touch
#014
Cancel
Enter
Delete
One-
Touch
NEW YORK
Dest.
Mode 1
Mode 2
Remote Dest-
ination Name
NEW YORK
SMB
Communication mode
Destination
192.168.1.30
Memory
Free
100%
14 To specify the file type of the file to be saved and the encoding method,
touch [Mode 1].
200/250/350
5-33
Scan to SMB
5
15 Select the file format and encoding method, and then touch [Enter].
Select the desired file type and
coding method for scan-to-e-mail.
Utility/Counter
Scanning Mode
Cancel
Enter
File Type/
Coding Method
Mul-
tiple
TIFF
PDF
MH
Single
MMR
Memory
Free
100%
16 Touch [Enter] until the initial screen appears.
Changing or deleting a one-touch dial button
1
2
Perform steps 1 through 4 of the procedure in “To program a one-
touch dial button”.
Touch the one-touch dial button to be changed or deleted.
–
If the specified one-touch dial button is programmed as an admin-
istrator forwarding destination, the screen for entering the adminis-
trator number appears.
Select One-Touch to REG/CHANGE/DEL.
Touch [Enter].
One-Touch
Enter
IndexList
JPN
US
Tokyo Osaka Nagoya Fukuok
a
Tokyo2
Center Center
1
2
Memory
100%
Free
5-34
200/250/350
Scan to SMB
5
3
Touch the button for the information to be changed, and then make the
change.
–
To delete the information, touch [Delete].
One-
Touch
#014
Cancel
Mode 2
Enter
Delete
One-
Touch
NEW YORK
Dest.
Mode 1
Remote Dest-
ination Name
NEW YORK
SMB
Communication mode
Destination
192.168.1.30
Memory
Free
100%
4
5
Check the information to be registered, and then touch [Enter].
Touch [Enter] until the initial screen appears.
200/250/350
5-35
Scan to SMB
5
Copying a one-touch dial button
1
Perform steps 1 through 4 of the procedure in “To program a one-
touch dial button”.
2
3
Touch the one-touch dial button to be copied.
Touch [One-Touch], then [One-Touch Copy].
One-
Touch
Tokyo2
Dest.
#014
Cancel
Enter
Delete
One-
Touch
Mode 1
Mode 2
One-Touch Copy
Memory
Free
100%
4
Touch the one-touch dial button where the information is copied to.
–
–
Select a one-touch dial button that has not yet been programmed.
To deselect the one-touch dial button where the information is to
be copied to, touch the selected one-touch dial button again.
Select the One-Touch key
you wish to copy to.
One-Touch Copy
JPN US
Cancel
Enter
IndexList
Tokyo Osaka Nagoya Fukuok
a
Center
1
Center
2
Tokyo2
Memory
Free
100%
5
Touch [Enter] until the initial screen appears.
5-36
200/250/350
6 Internet faxing
Internet faxing
6
6
6.1
You can transmit data simply by touching a one-touch dial button if the e-
mail address of a destination or a mail program has been registered with a
one-touch dial button in advance.
!
Detail
For registering one-touch dial buttons, refer to “Registering destinations”
on page 6-39.
For registering mail programs, refer to “Registering mail programs” on
page 3-45.
To change the index name, refer to “Naming an index” on page 3-44.
Selecting a one-touch button
A one-touch dial button can be selected in any of the following ways. Use the
appropriate method according to the number of recipients and the desired
use.
-
-
-
Directly touching the one-touch dial button
Entering the number of the one-touch dial button
Specifying chain dialing
Specifying a destination by touching a one-touch dial button
1
2
Position the document to be scanned.
Press the [Fax/Scan] key.
Fax/Scan
6-2
200/250/350
Internet faxing
6
3
4
Touch [One-Touch].
Select the index containing the desired destination, and then touch the
one-touch dial button.
–
To select an index, touch the corresponding tab, or touch [←] or [→]
to select a different one.
–
You can specify multiple destinations for one transmission with the
same one-touch dial button. Up to 300 destinations can be speci-
fied at a time.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct Quality&
Input Reduction
Search
Menu
One-Touch
IndexList
JPN
US
Tokyo Osaka Nagoya Fukuok
Center Center
1
2
Memory
100%
Job List
Free
5
Specify the Quality & Reduction settings for the original document to
be sent.
–
For details, refer to “Specifying the scanning quality and zoom ra-
tio” on page 6-16.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
Menu
One-Touch Search
Reduction/
Area
Quality
Density
600
dpi
Standard
Fine
Super Fine
Text/Photo
Job List
GSR
Super GSR
Memory
100%
Free
200/250/350
6-3
Internet faxing
6
6
Specify the necessary Menu settings.
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, specify the FAX Menu set-
tings.
–
For details, refer to “Specifying additional functions” on page 6-21.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Quality&
Reduction
Direct
Input
One-Touch Search
Menu
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
TSI only
TSI
TX Report
2in1
2-Sided TX Rotation TX
Memory
Job List
100%
Free
7
Press the [Start] key.
6-4
200/250/350
Internet faxing
Entering the number of a one-touch dial button
6
A one-touch dial button is assigned a number, as shown in the illustration.
You can quickly select a destination by specifying the number of a one-touch
dial button instead of touching the button.
1
2
Position the document to be scanned.
Press the [Fax/Scan] key.
Fax/Scan
200/250/350
6-5
Internet faxing
6
3
Press the [#] key on the control panel.
4
Use the keypad to type in the number of the one-touch dial button.
–
You can specify multiple destinations for simultaneous transmis-
sion with the same one-touch dial button. Up to 300 destinations
can be specified at a time.
Fine
SCANReady
#
Quality&
Reduction
Direct
Input
Search
Menu
One-Touch
IndexList
JPN
US
Tokyo Osaka Nagoya Fukuok
a
Center Center
1
2
Memory
Free
JobList
100%
The specified one-touch dial button is highlighted.
6-6
200/250/350
Internet faxing
6
5
Specify the Quality & Reduction settings for the original document to
be sent.
–
For details, refer to “Specifying the scanning quality and zoom ra-
tio” on page 3-15.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
Menu
One-Touch Search
Reduction/
Area
Quality
Density
600
dpi
Standard
Fine
Super Fine
Text/Photo
Job List
GSR
Super GSR
Memory
100%
Free
6
Specify the necessary Menu settings.
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, specify the FAX Menu set-
tings.
–
For details, refer to “Specifying additional functions” on page 6-21.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Quality&
Reduction
Direct
Input
One-Touch Search
Menu
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
TSI only
TSI
TX Report
2in1
2-Sided TX Rotation TX
Memory
Job List
100%
Free
7
Press the [Start] key.
200/250/350
6-7
Internet faxing
6
Searching for a one-touch dial button
To find a one-touch dial button, the name of a destination registered with the
button can be searched for.
1
2
Position the document to be scanned.
Press the [Fax/Scan] key.
Fax/Scan
3
4
Touch [Search].
–
If “LDAP Search” in the Network Settings screen is set to “Yes”, a
screen appears, allowing you to select the search method. Touch
[One-Touch Search] when the screen appears.
Type in the destination name, and then touch [Search].
A screen appears, containing the one-touch dial buttons programmed
with a destination that begins with the entered name.
Search One-Touch Keys
Cancel
Search
Del.
@
Q
W
Z
E
X
R
C
T
V
Y
B
U
N
I
O
P
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
_
L
-
M
.
,
SPACE
Alpha
Caps
Memory
Free
100%
Job List
6-8
200/250/350
Internet faxing
6
5
Touch the desired one-touch dial button.
–
You can specify multiple destinations for simultaneous transmis-
sion with the same one-touch dial button. Up to 300 destinations
can be specified at a time.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Menu
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
One-Touch
Search
#001 Osaka
1
1
Search
Memory
Free
Job List
100%
6
Specify the Quality & Reduction settings for the original document to
be sent.
–
For details, refer to “Specifying the scanning quality and zoom ra-
tio” on page 6-16.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
Menu
One-Touch Search
Reduction/
Area
Quality
Density
600
dpi
Standard
Fine
Super Fine
Text/Photo
Job List
GSR
Super GSR
Memory
100%
Free
200/250/350
6-9
Internet faxing
6
7
Specify the necessary Menu settings.
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, specify the FAX Menu set-
tings.
–
For details, refer to “Specifying additional functions” on page 6-21.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Quality&
Reduction
Direct
Input
One-Touch Search
Menu
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
TSI only
TSI
TX Report
2in1
2-Sided TX Rotation TX
Memory
Job List
100%
Free
8
Press the [Start] key.
6-10
200/250/350
Internet faxing
Specifying chain dialing
6
If the destination address is longer than 64 characters, the address can be
specified by combining addresses registered to one-touch dial buttons and
an entered address.
Touch [Chain], and then select one-touch dial buttons or enter an address.
!
Detail
- Chain dialing can only be used with one destination per transmission.
- With chain dialing, the address can contain up to 192 digits (64 charac-
ters from a one-touch dial button + 64 characters from a one-touch dial
button + 64 characters from an entered address).
- The one-touch dial buttons to be used with chain dialing must be pro-
grammed in advance.
Fine
SCANReady
One-Touch Search
Detail
Chain
Quality&
Reduction
Direct
Input
Menu
Domain
Delete
@
Q
W
E
R
T
Y
B
U
N
I
O
.
P
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
L
Z
X
C
V
M
PC(Email)
TIFF-MH
Change
Comm.Mode
Alpha
Caps
Scan Mode
Memory
Free
Job List
100%
200/250/350
6-11
Internet faxing
6
6.2
Entering an address
You can directly enter destinations that have not been registered in a one-
touch dial button. In addition, multiple destinations can be specified using
chain dialing to combine destinations registered in a one-touch dial button
and destinations that are entered.
To enter an address
1
2
Position the document to be scanned.
Press the [Fax/Scan] key.
Fax/Scan
3
4
Touch [Direct Input].
To select the communication mode. Touch [Change Comm. Mode].
Fine
SACNReady
Chain
Menu
Quality&
Reduction
Direct
Input
One-Touch
Search
Domain
Delete
Add.
@
Q
W
E
X
R
T
Y
B
U
N
I
O
P
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
L
Z
C
V
M
.
PC(Email)
Change
Comm.Mode
TIFF-MH
Caps
Alpha
Scan Mode
Memory
Free
Job List
100%
6-12
200/250/350
Internet faxing
6
5
Touch [InternetFAX], [Internet FAX], then [Enter].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Quality&
Reduction
Direct
Input
One-Touch Search
Menu
Enter
Com.Mode
Internet
FAX
InternetFAX
PC
Memory
Free
100%
Job list
6
Type in the destination address.
–
To change an entered address, press the [C] (clear) key, and then
enter a new address.
–
If parts of frequently used addresses are registered, they can be
quickly entered by touching [Domain]. For details, refer to “Regis-
tering a domain name” on page 2-53.
Fine
SCANReady
No.of Dest. 0
Quality&
Reduction
Direct
Input
One-Touch Search
Menu
Add.
Delete
Domain
@
Q
W
Z
E
X
R
T
Y
B
U
N
I
O
P
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
L
C
V
M
.
Internet
FAX
Change
Comm.Mode
E-Mail
Mode
Alpha
Caps
Memory
Free
Job List
100%
200/250/350
6-13
Internet faxing
6
7
To select the maximum transmission size and the encoding method,
touch [E-Mail Mode].
–
For details, refer to “Priority Compress Level (E-Mail Mode)” on
page 2-31.
–
After specifying the desired settings, touch [Enter].
Fine
SACNReady
No.of Dest. 0
Quality&
Reduction
Direct
Input
One-Touch Search
Menu
Enter
E-Mail Mode
MH
11x17
600dpi
MH
TX Size (Max.)
TX Quality (Max.)
Coding Method
Job List
Memory
Free
100%
8
Specify the Quality & Reduction settings for the original document to
be sent.
–
For details, refer to “Specifying the scanning quality and zoom ra-
tio” on page 6-16.
Fine
SCANReady
No.of Dest. 0
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
Menu
One-Touch Search
Reduction/
Area
Quality
Density
Fine
600
dpi
Standard
Super Fine
Text/Photo
Job List
GSR
Super GSR
Memory
100%
Free
6-14
200/250/350
Internet faxing
6
9
Specify the necessary Menu settings.
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, specify the FAX Menu set-
tings.
–
For details, refer to “Specifying additional functions” on page 6-21.
Fine
SCANReady
No.of Dest. 0
Quality&
Reduction
Direct
Input
One-Touch Search
Menu
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
TSI only
TSI
TX Report
2in1
2-Sided TX Rotation TX
Memory
Job List
100%
Free
10 Press the [Start] key.
200/250/350
6-15
Internet faxing
6
6.3
Specifying the scanning quality and zoom ratio
You can specify the scanning quality and zoom ratio by touching [Quality &
Reduction] in the screen that appears when the [Fax/Scan] key on the control
panel is pressed.
!
Detail
When the transmission is complete, the specified settings return to their
defaults.
Quality
You can select the scan resolution (amount of details). Select from the fol-
lowing resolution settings according to the type of document being scanned.
Item
Description
Standard
For documents containing plain text such as handwriting
Fine
Super Fine
For documents containing small print, such as newspapers, or
detailed illustrations
600 dpi Text
Text/Photo
600 dpi Text&Photo
For documents containing both text and images with color
shades, such as photos
GSR
For documents containing color shades, such as photos
Super GSR
600 dpi Photo
!
Detail
If data is sent using the “Text/Photo” setting, moiré patterns may appear
in some photos. To reduce the appearance of moiré patterns, send the
data using the “GSR” or “Super GSR” setting.
When a high resolution is selected to send a clearer image, the size of the
attached image data may exceed the size limitations of the provider or
server being used. Before sending the data, check the transmission ca-
pacity.
6-16
200/250/350
Internet faxing
To specify the scanning quality
Touch [Quality & Reduction].
6
1
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
Search
Menu
IndexList
One-Touch
JPN
US
Fukuok
a
Tokyo Osaka
Nagoya
Center Center
1
2
Memory
100%
Job List
Free
2
Touch [Quality], and then touch the desired quality setting.
–
To select a higher resolution, touch [600dpi].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
One-Touch Search
Menu
Reduction/
Area
Density
Quality
600
dpi
Standard
Fine
Super Fine
Text/Photo
Job List
GSR
Super GSR
Memory
100%
Free
200/250/350
6-17
Internet faxing
6
Density
According to the type of document being sent, select the appropriate density
from the settings described below.
Item
Description
Light
↑
For documents with a dark background color, such as newspa-
pers and blueprints
For normal documents
Std.
↓
Dark
For documents with faint or colored text
!
Detail
If “600 dpi Text” or “600 dpi Text & Photo” is selected, the density can be
set to one of three levels: “Light”, “Std.”, and “Dark”.
To specify a density settings
1
Touch [Quality & Reduction].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
Search
Menu
IndexList
One-Touch
JPN
US
Fukuok
a
Tokyo Osaka
Nagoya
Center Center
1
2
Memory
100%
Job List
Free
6-18
200/250/350
Internet faxing
6
2
Touch [Density], and then touch the desired density setting.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
One-Touch Search
Menu
Reduction/
Area
Quality
Density
Light
Std.
Dark
Memory
Free
Job List
100%
Original Size Set.
You can specify the scan area as a standard size. A portion of a large original
document as well as a non-standard-sized document can be sent in a stand-
ard size.
1
Touch [Quality & Reduction].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
Search
Menu
IndexList
One-Touch
JPN
US
Fukuok
a
Tokyo Osaka
Nagoya
Center Center
1
2
Memory
100%
Job List
Free
2
Touch [Reduction/Area], and then touch [Original Size Set.].
200/250/350
6-19
Internet faxing
6
–
The “Zoom” parameter has no effect, even if settings have been
specified.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
One-Touch Search
Menu
Reduction/
Area
Density
Quality
Auto
Detect.
Auto Zoom
Zoom
Original
Size Set.
Memory
Free
Job List
100%
3
Select a scan area size, and then touch [Enter].
–
Touch [Auto Detect] to automatically select the size closest to the
size of the document. However, Letter size is selected for docu-
ments smaller than Letter size.
–
Touch [Metric] to specify metric sizes.
SCANReady
Fine
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
One-Touch Search
Menu
Reduction/
Area
Quality
Density
Original Size Setting
Enter
Letter
Letter
11
x
17
Auto Detect
1
1
1
1
/
2
/
/
/
2x
2x
5
8
2
5
8
Legal
Exec.
Exec.
Metric
Memory
Free
Job List
100%
6-20
200/250/350
Internet faxing
6
6.4
Specifying additional functions
You can add the following functions by pressing the [Fax/Scan] key on the
control panel, then touching [Menu] on the screen that appears.
Note
If the optional fax kit has been installed, [Menu] changes to [Fax Menu].
Note
fied.
- “File name” on the Network tab
- “E-Mail Notification” on the Network tab
Item
Description
Setting 1 TSI
**(Set 1)
Select the entered information, such as this machine‘s name, fax
number or address, that is printed at the edge of the page. In addition,
the destination name registered with a one-touch dial button can be
printed in this information. For details on registering transmission
source information, refer to “Registering transmission source names”
on page 9-4.
TX Report
Select under which conditions the transmission report is to be output.
Default: Outputs according to the specifications of the administrator.
ON: Prints regardless of the transmission results.
If TX Fails: Prints only when undeliverable.
OFF: Does not print regardless of the transmission results.
2in1
Select whether to send using the 2in1 function (printing two pages to
fit on one page).
2-Sided TX Select whether to perform double-sided transmission. You can spec-
ify the position of the binding margin and the document orientation.
Rotation TX Select whether to rotate the image according to the paper orientation
of the receiving machine.
The quality can be specified as 200 dpi or less when sending A4 size.
Setting 2 Priority TX
Select whether a job is given priority over others.
**(Set 2)
Timer TX
Setting
Select whether to set the send time. Specifies the send time when
“ON” is selected.
Stamp
Specify whether the document is stamped to indicate that it has been
scanned. The document must be loaded into the ADF.
Note
To use the Stamp function, optional stamp unit must be
installed.
200/250/350
6-21
Internet faxing
6
Item
Description
Network
**(Net.)
Subject Se- The subject line of an e-mail message can be selected from subject
lection*
lines registered in advance.
Reply Ad-
dress*
Displays the e-mail address of this machine as the sender of the e-
mail message. When specifying e-mail addresses other than that of
this machine, select an address from a registered one-touch dial but-
ton.
File Name
Enter when a set file name is to be specified as the file name when
saving the file. Up to 16 characters can be entered.
Note
The file name in Network functions only when the desti-
nation is a computer e-mail address.
* The receiving machine prints these items when “Yes” is specified on the RX
Doc. Header Print screen.
**Changes to ( ) if the optional fax kit has been installed.
Specifying the transmission source setting
Entered text such as the name, fax number, and address can be printed at
the top of the output page.
FROM: NEWYORK
Image data has been attached to the e-mail.
1
2
Touch [Menu].
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [FAX Menu].
–
Touch [Setting 1], then [TSI].
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [Set 1], then [TSI].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct Quality&
Input Reduction
Search
Menu
One-Touch
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
TSI only
TSI
TX Report
2in1
2-Sided TX Rotation TX
Memory
Job List
100%
Free
6-22
200/250/350
Internet faxing
6
3
Select the desired type of transmission source information.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
One-Touch Search
Menu
Setting1
Setting2
Network
TSI
Enter
TSI
Selection
TSI only
Job List
Att./TSI
OFF
Memory
Free
100%
4
5
To print the transmission source information, touch [TSI Selection].
Select the name of the transmission source, and then touch [Enter].
–
Touch [OFF] to cancel the setting.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct Quality&
Input Reduction
One-Touch Search
Menu
Enter
TSI
OFF
1
2
3
4
Center
SALES
0123456
1
/
2
Memory
Free
100%
Job List
200/250/350
6-23
Internet faxing
6
Specifying the transmission report printing conditions
You can specify the conditions for printing a transmission report (TX Report).
The printing conditions for a transmission report are preset with the Report
Settings parameters from the Administrator Management screen. Select the
appropriate printing condition.
1
2
Touch [Menu].
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [FAX Menu].
–
Touch [Setting 1], then [TX Report].
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [Set 1], then [TX Re-
port].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct Quality&
Input Reduction
Search
Menu
One-Touch
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
TSI only
TSI
TX Report
2in1
2-Sided TX Rotation TX
Memory
Job List
100%
Free
3
Check the printing conditions, and then touch [Enter].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction Menu
Search
One-Touch
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
TX Report
Enter
If TX
Fails
If TX
Fails
Single Dest
Broadcast
:
:
Default
ON
If TX Fails
OFF
Memory
Job List
100%
Free
6-24
200/250/350
Internet faxing
Specifying 2in1 transmission
6
1
2
Touch [Menu].
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [FAX Menu].
–
Touch [Setting 1], then [2in1].
–
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [Set 1], then [2in1].
Touch the button again to cancel the settings.
The button is highlighted.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct Quality&
Input Reduction
Search
Menu
One-Touch
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
TSI only
TSI
TX Report
2in1
2-Sided TX Rotation TX
Memory
Job List
100%
Free
Specifying double-sided transmission
1
2
Touch [Menu].
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [FAX Menu].
–
Touch [Setting 1], then [2-Sided TX].
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [Set 1], then [2-Sided
TX].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct Quality&
Input Reduction
Search
Menu
One-Touch
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
TSI only
TSI
TX Report
2in1
2-Sided TX Rotation TX
Memory
Job List
100%
Free
200/250/350
6-25
Internet faxing
6
3
Select the desired binding margin position.
–
–
–
Left Bind: The document is scanned with a binding margin on the
left side.
Top Bind: The document is scanned with a binding margin at the
top.
Auto: The binding margin is set according to the scanning direction.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Quality&
Reduction
Direct
Input
One-Touch Search
Menu
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
2-Sided TX
OFF
Enter
Original
Direction
Original Bind Direction
Left Bind
Job List
Top Bind
Auto
Memory
Free
100%
4
5
Touch [Original Direction].
Select the orientation of the document, and then touch [Enter].
–
Auto: The long side of the document is automatically set as the
binding position.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Quality&
Reduction
Direct
Input
One-Touch Search
Menu
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
Original Direction
Enter
Auto
1
2
3
4
Memory
Free
Job List
100%
6
Touch [Enter].
Touch [OFF] to cancel the setting.
–
6-26
200/250/350
Internet faxing
6
!
Detail
When loading a double-sided document with pages of different widths,
we recommend loading the pages with the same orientation. When a
document with pages of different orientations is scanned, the orientation
of the image data may not be correct.
Specifying rotation transmission
1
2
Touch [Menu].
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [FAX Menu].
–
Touch [Setting 1], then [Rotation TX].
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [Set 1], then [Rota-
tion TX].
–
Touch the button again to cancel the settings.
The button is highlighted.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct Quality&
Input Reduction
Search
Menu
One-Touch
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
TSI only
TSI
TX Report
2in1
2-Sided TX Rotation TX
Memory
Job List
100%
Free
200/250/350
6-27
Internet faxing
6
Specifying priority transmission
1
2
Touch [Menu].
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [FAX Menu].
–
Touch [Setting 2], then [Priority TX].
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [Set 2], then [Priority
TX].
–
Touch the button again to cancel the settings.
The button is highlighted.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
One-Touch Search
Menu
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
Timer TX
Setting
Priority TX
Job List
Stamp
Memory
Free
100%
Specifying timer transmission
1
2
Touch [Menu].
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [FAX Menu].
–
Touch [Setting 2], then [Timer TX Setting].
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [Set 2], then [Timer
TX Setting].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
One-Touch Search
Menu
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
Timer TX
Setting
Priority TX
Job List
Stamp
Memory
Free
100%
6-28
200/250/350
Internet faxing
6
3
Enter the time for transmission.
Touch [Hour] or [Minute], and then type in the desired value using
the keypad.
–
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
One-Touch Search
Menu
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
Enter
Timer TX Setting
OFF
Current Time
15 : 55
16
24
Hour
Minute
Memory
Free
Job List
100%
4
Touch [Enter].
–
Touch [OFF] to cancel the setting.
Specifying the stamp setting
1
2
Touch [Menu].
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [FAX Menu].
–
Touch [Setting 2], then [Stamp].
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [Set 2], then [Stamp].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
One-Touch Search
Menu
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
Timer TX
Setting
Priority TX
Job List
Stamp
Memory
Free
100%
200/250/350
6-29
Internet faxing
Select the print position of the stamp, and then touch [Enter].
6
3
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Menu
Quality&
Reduction
Direct
Input
One-Touch Search
Setting 1
Stamp
Setting 2
Network
Enter
Trail Edge
Job List
Lead&Trail
OFF
Memory
Free
100%
Changing the subject
The subject line of an e-mail message can be selected from subject lines reg-
istered in advance. To specify settings, refer to the Scanner Settings screen,
displayed from the Administrator Management screen on page 2-36.
0 The subject line is printed by the receiving machine when “Yes” is spec-
ified in the RX Doc. Header Print screen.
1
2
Touch [Menu].
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [FAX Menu].
–
Touch [Network], then [Subject Selection].
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [Net.], then [Subject
Selection].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality/
Reduction
One-Touch Search
Menu
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
Subject
Selection
Reply
Address
File Name
Email Noti-
fication
Memory
Free
Job List
100%
6-30
200/250/350
Internet faxing
6
3
Select a subject, and then touch [Enter].
Touch [OFF] to cancel the setting.
–
SCANReady
Fine
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
One-Touch Search
Subject Selection
Menu
Enter
OFF
1
2
3
4
Information
Minutes
Connection
Conference
Memory
Free
Job List
100%
!
Detail
When no subject is registered, the e-mail subject line “[Image File] (one-
touch name), (machine name), (number)” is sent.
Specifying a reply address
From the e-mail addresses registered with a one-touch dial button, you can
specify the return e-mail address displayed to the recipient.
0 The reply address is printed by the receiving machine when “Yes” is
specified in the RX Doc. Header Print screen.
1
2
Touch [Menu].
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [FAX Menu].
–
Touch [Network], then [Reply Address].
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [Net.], then [Reply
Address].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality/
Reduction
One-Touch Search
Menu
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
Subject
Selection
Reply
Address
File Name
Email Noti-
fication
Memory
Free
Job List
100%
200/250/350
6-31
Internet faxing
6
3
Select a return address, and then touch [Enter].
Touch [OFF] to cancel the setting.
–
Select the One-Touch key
to be the Reply E-Mail Address.
Reply E-Mail Address
OFF
Enter
IndexList
JPN
US
Nagoya Fukuok
a
Tokyo Osaka
Center Center
1
2
Memory
Free
Job List
100%
Specifying a file name
You can specify the file name of the image data to be attached in an e-mail.
Up to 16 characters can be entered.
1
Touch [Menu].
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [FAX Menu].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality&
Reduction
Search
Menu
IndexList
One-Touch
JPN
US
Fukuok
a
Tokyo Osaka
Nagoya
Center Center
1
2
Memory
100%
Job List
Free
6-32
200/250/350
Internet faxing
6
2
Touch [Network], then [File Name].
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [Net.], then [File
Name].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct
Input
Quality/
Reduction
One-Touch Search
Menu
Setting 1
Setting 2
Network
Subject
Selection
Reply
Address
File Name
Email Noti-
fication
Memory
Free
Job List
100%
3
Type in the file name, and then touch [Enter].
–
–
Touch [OFF] to cancel the setting.
It is not necessary to type in an extension.
File Name
OFF
Enter
Del.
@
Q
W
Z
E
X
R
C
T
V
Y
U
I
O
P
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
L
B
N
M
SPACE
Caps
Alpha
Memory
100%
Job List
Free
Note
When no file name is specified, the file is automatically sent with a name
in the following format: <machine_name><scan_date_and_time>.<ex-
tension>.
200/250/350
6-33
Internet faxing
6
6.5
If transmission could not be completed
If the transmission could not be completed correctly, a transmission report
is printed.
!
Detail
You can change the transmission report printing conditions. For details,
refer to “Specifying the transmission report printing conditions (Report
Settings)” on page 9-18.
Viewing a transmission report
2
P.1
The following document has not been transmitted. Try to retransmit.
1
(TUE) APR 19 2006 11:32
CHICAGO
User/Account
DESTINATION
ADDRESS
:SALES
DOCUMENT# :6614316-761
TIME STORED :APR 19 11:30
:NEW YORK
TX START
DURATION
MODE
:APR 19 11:31
:28 sec
:Email
PAGES
:0 page
RESULT
:EA0006
3
4
IMAGE
5
No.
Item
Description
1
Report output date and Shows the date and time that the report was printed.
time
2
3
Transmission source in- Shows the registered transmission source name.
formation (TSI)
Transmission Informa-
tion
Shows the document number, the duration of the transmis-
sion, and the transmission mode.
6-34
200/250/350
Internet faxing
6
No.
Item
Description
4
Transmission result
Shows the transmission result. Any of the following may ap-
pear.
OK: The transmission was completed successfully.
INTERR: The transmission was interrupted.
F. MEM: The memory capacity was exceeded.
NG: The transmission failed.
PT. DEL: The transmission to some destinations failed.
Error code: For details, refer to “Network error list” on
page 11-3.
5
Transmission image
Shows a part of the sent image.
Resending
You can resend up to 20 failed transmissions.
1
Touch [Job List], then [Type], and then select the document that could
not be sent.
–
If [Retry] and [Change Destination] appear in the screen, the docu-
ment does not need to be scanned again.
2
To send to the same destination, touch [Retry].
To send to a different destination, touch [Change Destination].
–
200/250/350
6-35
Internet faxing
6
6.6
Receiving Internet faxes
Not only can this machine send Internet faxes, it can also receive Internet
faxes. The methods for receiving Internet faxes are described below.
Settings for Internet faxing
Specify the following settings in advance. If the settings are not specified
correctly, communication malfunctions may occur and Internet faxes may
not be properly received.
-
-
-
-
IP address of this machine
POP3 server address
POP3 user name
POP3 password
Receiving Internet faxes automatically
tioned settings are correctly specified, the arrival of Internet faxes to the
specified POP3 server is periodically checked and faxes are received (print-
ed).
However, if “Auto-RX Check” in the POP3 Settings screen (displayed from
the Network Setting screen) is set to “Check OFF”, the data is stored in the
POP3 server and not printed. In this case, perform reception manually. For
details, refer to “Receiving Internet faxes manually” on page 6-37.
In addition, you can specify whether to print the received document or save
it in a box. For details, refer to “Specifying the processing method for re-
ceived documents (Document Management)” on page 9-23.
Data the can be received
Data of the following formats can be received.
-
-
-
-
Text format
TIFF-F image
Text and TIFF-F image combination
DSN and MDN
The following formats may not be received.
The file format of an original application
-
!
Detail
If the e-mail message is in a format that cannot be received, a result no-
tification (MDN) is returned to the sender as described below.
- TIFF and PDF files sent using Scan to E-Mail
- Data forwarded to the Internet fax address
6-36
200/250/350
Internet faxing
Receiving Internet faxes manually
6
1
Press the [Utility/Counter] key.
Utility/
Counter
2
Touch [User Management].
Utility/Counter
Exit
User
Management
User
Setting
Total
Counter
357
Total Copy
Counter
Admin.
Management
Reports
285
Total
Copy Size
Printer
Setting
5
Check
Detail
Memory
Free
100%
200/250/350
6-37
Internet faxing
6
3
Touch [POP3 RX].
When an Internet fax has been received by the POP3 server, it is re-
ceived and printed.
Utility/Counter
Enter
User Management
Confirma-
tion Beep
Alarm
Volume
Job Comp
plete Beep
Panel
Cleaning
Toner
Supply
Memory RX
ON/OFF
POP3 RX
Memory
Free
100%
4
A mark is displayed at the bottom of the screen during reception.
Utility/Counter
Enter
User Management
Confirma-
tion Beep
Alarm
Volume
Job Comp
plete Beep
Panel
Cleaning
Toner
Supply
Memory RX
ON/OFF
POP3 RX
Memory
Free
100%
5
When reception is complete, touch [Enter] until the initial screen ap-
pears.
6-38
200/250/350
Internet faxing
6
6.7
Registering destinations
Programming a one-touch dial button
By registering a destination with a one-touch dial button, transmissions can
be performed easily and accurately.
You can register two types of destinations with a one-touch dial button: a
main destination and a secondary destination, where the data is sent if trans-
mission to the main destination fails.
Note
A secondary recipient can be specified if the optional scanner unit or fax
kit is installed.
If the “Restrict One-Touch Editing” parameter on the Administrator Set
screen (displayed from the Administrator Management screen) is set to
“ON”, [E-Mail Input] is added to the Administrator Management 1 screen
and can be used to register, change and delete one-touch dial buttons.
For details on the Administrator Set screen, refer to the User’s Guide
[Facsimile Operations].
If the optional fax kit has been installed, the [E-Mail Input] changes to the
[FAX].
!
Detail
The following communication modes can be specified for the secondary
destination.
- PC (E-Mail)
- PC (Scanner)
*
- InternetFAX (Internet FAX)
*
- InternetFAX (IP Address Fax)
*
- InternetFAX (IP Relay)
- FAX (G3)**
*The communication mode can be specified if the optional scanner unit
or fax kit is installed.
**The communication mode can be specified if the optional fax kit is in-
stalled.
Settings can be specified for the following.
Item
Description
One-Touch Name
Type in the destination name that will appear on the one-touch
dial button. Up to 12 characters can be entered.
200/250/350
6-39
Internet faxing
6
Item
Description
Destination
Type in the destination e-mail address. Up to 64 characters can
be entered.
TX Size (Max.)
TX Quality (Max.)
Coding method
Specify the maximum document size that can be transmitted. Se-
lect “Letter”, “Legal”, or “11 × 17”.
Specify the maximum resolution that can be sent. Select “200
dpi”, “400 dpi”, or “600 dpi”.
Select the encoding method for data to be sent. Select “MH”,
“MR”, or “MMR”. The data capacity is lowest with “MMR” and
highest with “MH”.
6-40
200/250/350
Internet faxing
To program a one-touch dial button
6
1
Press the [Utility/Counter] key.
Utility/
Counter
2
Touch [User Setting].
Utility/Counter
Exit
User
Management
User
Setting
Total
Counter
357
Total Copy
Counter
Admin.
Management
Reports
285
Total
Copy Size
Printer
Setting
5
Check
Detail
Memory
Free
100%
3
Touch [E-Mail Input].
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [FAX].
–
Utility/Counter
User Setting
Enter
E-Mail
Input
Memory
Free
100%
200/250/350
6-41
Internet faxing
6
4
5
Touch [One-Touch].
Utility/Counter
E-Mail
Input
Enter
One-Touch
Index
Mail Program
Domain Name
Memory
Free
100%
Touch the one-touch dial button to be programmed.
–
Touch an index tab or [Index List], then the desired one-touch dial
button.
–
If the machine is set to allow LDAP searches, a screen appears, al-
lowing you to permit or prohibit the address registered with the
one-touch dial button to be found with an LDAP search. If LDAP
searches are not to be allowed, select “No”.
Select One-Touch to REG/CHANGE/DEL.
Touch [Enter].
One-Touch
Enter
IndexList
JPN
US
Tokyo Osaka Nagoya Fukuok
a
Center Center
1
2
Memory
100%
Free
6
Type in the destination name that will appear on the one-touch dial but-
ton, and then touch [Next].
One-Touch
Name
Cancel
Next
Del.
@
Q
W
Z
E
X
R
C
T
V
Y
B
U
N
I
O
P
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
SPACE
Caps
Alpha
Memory
100%
Free
6-42
200/250/350
Internet faxing
6
7
Select the communication mode. Touch [InternetFAX], [Internet FAX],
then [Next].
–
If mode 476 of the software switch settings was changed, only
communication modes that can be selected appear. For details, re-
fer to “Specifying software switch settings (machine functions)” on
page 9-29.
Select default Communication Mode.
Com. mode
Cancel
Back
Next
Internet
FAX
InternetFAX
PC
Memory
Free
100%
8
Enter the destination e-mail address, and then touch [Next].
–
If parts of frequently used addresses are registered, they can be
quickly entered by touching [Domain]. For details, refer to “Regis-
tering a domain name” on page 2-53.
–
To change an entered address, press the [C] (clear) key, and then
enter a new address.
E-Mail
Address
Cancel
Back
Next
Del.
@
Q
W
Z
E
X
R
T
V
Y
B
U
I
O
P
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
L
C
N
M
Domain
E-Mail
Mode
Alpha
Caps
Memory
Free
100%
200/250/350
6-43
Internet faxing
6
9
To change “TX Size (Max.)”, “TX Quality (Max.)”, or “Coding Method”,
which have been specified in advance by the administrator, touch [E-
Mail Mode], specify the settings, and then touch [Enter].
Select E-Mail Mode.
Utility/Counter
E-Mail mode
Enter
11x17
600dpi
MH
TX Size (Max.)
TX Quality (Max.)
Coding Method
Memory
Free
100%
10 Check the information to be registered, and then touch [Enter].
One-
Touch
#014
Cancel
Enter
Delete
One-
Touch
NEW YORK
Dest.
Mode 1
Mode 2
One-Touch Name
Communication Mode
Destination
NEW YORK
Internet FAX
newyork@xyz. com
Memory
100%
Free
11 Touch [Enter] until the initial screen appears.
6-44
200/250/350
Internet faxing
Changing or deleting a one-touch dial button
6
1
2
Perform steps 1 through 4 of the procedure in “To program a one-
touch dial button”.
Touch the one-touch dial button to be changed or deleted.
–
If the specified one-touch dial button is programmed as an admin-
istrator forwarding destination, the screen for entering the adminis-
trator number appears.
Select One-Touch to REG/CHANGE/DEL.
Touch [Enter].
One-Touch
Enter
IndexList
JPN
US
Tokyo Osaka Nagoya Fukuok
a
Tokyo2
Center Center
1
2
Memory
100%
Free
3
Touch the button for the information to be changed, and then make the
change.
–
To delete the information, touch [Delete].
One-
Touch
#014
Cancel
Enter
Delete
One-
Touch
Tokyo2
Dest.
Mode 1
Mode 2
One-Touch Name
Communication Mode
Destination
Tokyo2
Internet FAX
Tokyo2@xyz. com
Memory
100%
Free
4
5
Check the information to be registered, and then touch [Enter].
Touch [Enter] until the initial screen appears.
200/250/350
6-45
Internet faxing
6
Copying a one-touch dial button
1
Perform steps 1 through 4 of the procedure in “To program a one-
touch dial button”.
2
3
Touch the one-touch dial button to be copied.
Touch [One-Touch], then [One-Touch Copy].
One-
Touch
Tokyo2
Dest.
#014
Cancel
Mode 2
Enter
Delete
One-
Touch
Mode 1
One-Touch Copy
Memory
Free
100%
4
Touch the one-touch dial button where the information is copied to.
–
–
Select a one-touch dial button that has not yet been programmed.
To deselect the one-touch dial button where the information is to
be copied to, touch the selected one-touch dial button again.
Select the One-Touch key
you wish to copy to.
One-Touch Copy
JPN US
Cancel
Enter
IndexList
Tokyo Osaka Nagoya Fukuok
a
Center
1
Center
2
Tokyo2
Memory
Free
100%
5
Touch [Enter] until the initial screen appears.
6-46
200/250/350
Internet faxing
Registering/deleting a secondary destination
6
0 A secondary recipient can be specified if the optional scanner unit or fax
kit is installed.
1
2
3
Perform steps 1 through 9 of the procedure in “To program a one-
touch dial button”.
Touch the one-touch dial button where the secondary destination is to
be registered.
Touch [One-Touch], then [Sub Address Registration].
One-
Touch
Tokyo2
Dest.
#014
Cancel
Mode 2
Enter
Delete
One-
Touch
Mode 1
One-Touch Copy
Sub Address
Registration
NO
Switch Sub/Main
Addresses
Memory
Free
100%
4
Select the communication mode for the secondary destination.
Select default Communication Mode.
Com.Mode
Cancel
Enter
FAX
InternetFAX
PC
E-Mail
Scanner
Memory
Free
100%
–
If mode 476 of the software switch settings was changed, only
communication modes that can be selected appear. For details, re-
fer to “Specifying software switch settings (machine functions)” on
page 9-29.
200/250/350
6-47
Internet faxing
6
5
Enter the secondary destination information, and then touch [Enter].
Sub Address
Registration
Cancel
Enter
Destination
Mode 2
Mode 1
Communication Mode
Destination
E-Mail
Memory
Free
100%
6
Touch [Enter] until the initial screen appears.
6-48
200/250/350
7 Using an LDAP server
Using an LDAP server
7
7
Using an LDAP server
7.1
Searching the destination information from the server
You can search a destination from the LDAP server. To use the LDAP search
function, set “LDAP Search” in the LDAP Setting screen (displayed from the
Network Setting screen) to “Yes” in advance to enable LDAP searches, and
register the information of the LDAP server to be connected. For details, refer
to “Specifying the network settings” on page 2-4.
To register the LDAP server, refer to “LDAP Setting” on page 2-44.
Note
If “^” is included in the registered information, the destination may not be
found correctly.
Basic Search and Detail Search
The LDAP server contains various types of destination information. With the
LDAP search function of this machine, you can use a basic search method
by specifying a keyword that meets the information contained in the address,
or you can use an advanced search method by specifying detailed search
items and conditions.
Item
Description
Basic Search
If a keyword is entered, the search can be performed
based on the keyword. The keyword can contain up to 10
characters.
Detail Search
Searches the address by specifying a keyword for various
search items and specifying conditions. Up to 10 charac-
ters can be entered. In addition, four conditions can be
specified at a time.
The following search items can be selected: Full name, E-
Mail, Last Name, First Name, Fax, City, Company, De-
partment
The following conditions can be selected: Contains (key-
word), AND, START, End, OFF
Note
If 11 or more characters are entered for the keyword, the tenth character
is replaced with the last character entered, preventing the search from
being performed correctly. Therefore, be sure to enter no more than 10
characters.
7-2
200/250/350
Using an LDAP server
To search the destination information
7
1
2
Press the [Fax/Scan] key.
Touch [Search].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct Quality&
Input Reduction
Search
Menu
One-Touch
IndexList
JPN
US
Tokyo Osaka Nagoya Fukuoka
Center Center
1
2
Memory
100%
Job List
Free
3
Touch [LDAP Search].
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct Quality&
Input Reduction
Menu
One-Touch
Search
Search One-
Touch Keys
LDAP Search
Memory
Free
Job List
100%
4
When multiple LDAP servers are registered, select the server to be
searched, and then touch [Enter].
Select LDAP server to search.
LDAP Search
LDAP Server
Select
Cancel
Enter
LDAP1
LDAP2
Memory
Free
Job List
100%
200/250/350
7-3
Using an LDAP server
7
5
Touch [Name].
To specify detailed search conditions, touch [Detail Search].
–
Input Key Word and
press [Start Search]
LDAP Search
Detail
Search
Cancel
Start
Search
Basic Search
Name
Memory
Free
Job List
100%
6
7
Type in the keyword, and then touch [Enter].
Touch [Start Search].
Input Key Word and
press [Start Search]
Detail
LDAP Search
Cancel
Search
Start
Search
Basic Search
user
Name
Memory
Free
Job List
100%
8
Select the destination.
To check the search conditions, touch [Search Condition].
–
Select the destination
LDAP Search
Search Result
Cancel
user01
user02
user03
user04
user01@ test.local
user02@ test.local
user03@ test.local
user04@ test.local
1
1
Server
Change
Search
Condition
Memory
Free
Job List
100%
7-4
200/250/350
Using an LDAP server
Enter the destination information, and then touch [Dest. Register].
7
9
Dest.
Register
LDAP Search
Back
Detail
Full Name : user01
E-Mail
Last Name : sanagawa
First Name : tarou
Department : design
Company : ABC
City
Fax
:
:
112345678
00
Memory
Free
Job List
100%
10 Select the transmission method, and then touch [Enter].
Select transmission method
LDAP Search
TX Method
Cancel
Enter
Internet
FAX
InternetFAX
PC
Memory
100%
Job List
Free
200/250/350
7-5
Using an LDAP server
7
7.2
Registering destination information to one-touch dial
buttons
To register destination information to a one-touch dial button
If bit 7 of mode 466 is set to “1” in the Soft SW Setting screen, you must log
on with external server authentication before an LDAP search can be per-
formed.
1
2
3
Press the [Utility/Counter] key.
Touch [User Setting].
Touch [E-Mail Input].
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [FAX].
4
5
Touch [One-Touch].
Select the one-touch dial button to be programmed.
Fine
SCANReady
Chain
Direct Quality&
Input Reduction
Search
Menu
One-Touch
IndexList
JPN
US
Tokyo Osaka Nagoya Fukuoka
Center Center
1
2
Memory
100%
Job List
Free
6
On the LDAP Search screen, touch [ON], and then touch [Enter].
Select ON to activate One-Touch
Registration function for LDAP search
Utility/Counter
LDAP Search
Cancel
Enter
ON
OFF
Memory
100%
Free
7-6
200/250/350
Using an LDAP server
When multiple LDAP servers are registered, select the server to be
7
7
searched, and then touch [Enter].
Select LDAP server to search.
LDAP Search
LDAP Server
Select
Cancel
Enter
LDAP1
LDAP2
Memory
Free
100%
8
Touch [Name].
–
To specify detailed search conditions, touch [Detail Search].
Input Key Word and
press [Start Search]
Ultility/Counter
Detail
Search
Cancel
LDAP Search
Basic Search
Start
Search
Name
Memory
Free
100%
9
Type in the keyword, and then touch [Enter].
10 Touch [Start Search].
Input Key Word and
press [Start Search]
Ultility/Counter
Detail
Search
Cancel
user
LDAP Search
Basic Search
Start
Search
Name
Memory
Free
100%
200/250/350
7-7
Using an LDAP server
7
11 Select the destination.
–
To check the search conditions, touch [Search Condition].
Select the destination
Utility/Counter
Cancel
LDAP Search
/Search Results
user01
user02
user03
user04
user01@ test.local
user02@ test.local
user03@ test.local
user04@ test.local
1
1
Server
Change
Search
Condition
Memory
Free
100%
12 Enter the destination information, and then touch [Set].
Search
Set
Back
Detail
Full Name
E-Mail
: user01
Last Name : sanagawa
First Name : tarou
Department : design
Company
City
Fax
: ABC
:
: 00112345678
Memory
Free
100%
13 Select the transmission method, and then touch [Enter].
Select transmission method
Search
TX Method
Cancel
Enter
Internet
FAX
InternetFAX
PC
Memory
100%
Free
7-8
200/250/350
Using an LDAP server
7
14 Check the information to be registered, and then touch [Enter].
One-
Touch
#015
Cancel
Enter
user01
Dest.
Delete
One-
Touch
Mode 1
Mode 2
user01
One-Touch Name
Communication Mode Internet FAX
Destination
Memory
100%
Free
15 Touch [Enter] until the initial screen appears.
200/250/350
7-9
Using an LDAP server
7
7-10
200/250/350
8 Specifying settings using
PageScope Web
Connection
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
8
Specifying settings using PageScope
Web Connection
8.1
Items that can be specified using PageScope Web
Connection
PageScope Web Connection is a device management utility supported by
the HTTP server built into the device. Using a Web browser on a computer
connected to the network, machine settings can be specified from Page-
Scope Web Connection.
When changing settings, operations such as typing text can be performed
more easily from your computer.
Settings for the following network and scan functions can be specified.
PageScope Web Connection provides a User mode, which can be accessed
by all users, and an Administrator mode, which can only be accessed with
the required administrator password. Settings for the following can be spec-
ified in each mode.
Scan tab (User mode)
Item
Description
One-Touch Key Registration
Register one-touch dial destinations for recipients of data
sent using the Scan to E-Mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to SMB,
or Internet fax operation. The registered data can also be
changed or deleted. In addition, the index name can be
changed.
FAX Program Registration
Domain Name Registration
Register fax programs as one-touch dial destinations.
Unlike the one-touch dial destination where only recipients
can be registered, scan settings and multiple recipients
can be registered. The registered data can also be
changed or deleted.
Register specific characters in advance for quick input
such as when entering a domain name.
!
Detail
When the “Restrict One-Touch Editing” parameter on the Administrator
Set screen (displayed from the Administrator Management screen) is set
to “ON”, the Scan (2) tab is added to the Administrator mode page so that
one-touch dial destinations can be registered, changed, or deleted. The
Scan tab does not appear on the User mode page.
8-2
200/250/350
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
Scan tab (Administrator mode)
Item
Description
One-Touch Key
Registration
Export
Import
Exports the one-touch dial button information registered
on this machine and saves the data as a file.
Imports the one-touch dial button information saved on a
computer and writes the data to this machine.
TSI Registration
TX Settings
Register the text, such as a name, fax number, or
address, that is printed at the top of pages sent with the
Internet fax operation.
Register the transmission source name that is added at
the top of e-mail messages sent using the Scan to E-Mail
operation.
TX Settings
Com. Mode
Specify the default transmission settings.
Select whether or not each communication mode can be
used.
RX Settings
Scan Setting
Specify the time and day of the week to print documents
received with the Internet fax operation.
Specify the device name of this machine, which will be
used in file names, and the transmission settings for
scanned data.
TX Document
RX Document
When sending documents from this machine, the docu-
ment can be forwarded simultaneously to the addresses
specified by the administrator. Specify the address of the
forwarding destination.
Port
Specify how documents received over a network are
processed and forwarded.
All Other
Documents
Specify how documents not received over a network are
processed and forwarded.
Report Settings
Specify the output conditions of result reports and
transmission reports.
Note
If the optional fax kit has been installed, the Scan tab changes to the Fax/
Scan tab.
200/250/350
8-3
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
Network tab (Administrator mode)
8
Item
Description
Common
Setting
TCP/IP
Specify the required settings for using this machine over
a network.
IP Filtering
Select whether or not reception is possible within the
range of specified IP addresses.
IPP
For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Print Operations].
For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Print Operations].
For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Print Operations].
For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Print Operations].
For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Print Operations].
Specify whether to use the LDAP search function.
NetWare
NetWare Status
Windows
AppleTalk
LDAP
LDAP Server Setting Register the LDAP server to be searched when using the
LDAP search function.
E-Mail/
Internet
FAX
POP3
SMTP
Specify the POP3 server to be used with Internet faxing.
Specify the SMTP server to be used with the Scan to E-
Mail or Internet fax operation.
Subject/Text
Other
Register the subject and text of e-mail messages sent
with the Scan to E-Mail or Internet fax operation.
Specify other e-mail transmission settings.
FTP Configuration
Specify FTP server settings and FTP proxy server set-
tings.
SNMP
Select whether or not SNMP is used.
SSL/TLS
When SSL/TLS is enabled, the communication between
the machine and the client computer can be encrypted.
Specify settings for creating, deleting, or encrypting cer-
tificates.
User Authentication
Displays the authentication type when “External Server
Authentication” is specified. Specify the server type and
domain name to be used in authentication.
8-4
200/250/350
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
8.2
Using PageScope Web Connection
Operating environment
Item
Environment
Network
Ethernet (TCP/IP)
Computer applications
For Windows 98 SE/Me/NT 4.0:
Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 or later, or Netscape
Navigator 4.73 or 7.0
For Windows 2000:
Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 or later, or Netscape
Navigator 7.0
For Windows XP:
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 or later, or Netscape
Navigator 7.0
* With Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5, the one-touch dial
buttons may not exported correctly. Use Microsoft Internet
Explorer 5.5 Service Pack 1 or later.
!
Detail
PageScope Web Connection is a device management utility supported
by the HTTP server built into the device. Using a Web browser on a com-
puter connected to the network, machine settings can be specified from
PageScope Web Connection.
Accessing PageScope Web Connection
PageScope Web Connection can be accessed directly from a Web browser.
Do not use a proxy server when accessing from PageScope Web Connec-
tion.
1
2
Start the Web browser.
In the Address bar, type the IP address of this machine, and then press
the [Enter] key.
–
http://<IP_address_of_the_machine>/
Example: If the IP address of the machine is 192.168.1.20
http://192.168.1.20/
!
Detail
When SSL/TLS is enabled, the URL becomes:
https://<IP_address_of_machine>/
Even if “http://” is entered, the URL at “https://” is automatically ac-
cessed.
200/250/350
8-5
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
If user authentication settings have been applied
8
If user authentication or external server authentication settings have been
applied, the following page appears.
Type in the user name and password, and then click [Log-in].
Note
For details on user authentication, refer to User’s Guide [Copy Opera-
tions].
Contact the network administrator for a user name and password.
When logged on with user authentication, a timeout occurs and you will
automatically be logged off from Administrator mode if no operation is
performed for 10 minutes.
If user authentication is performed with an external server and a domain
other than the default domain name is used as an Active Directory, type
in the user name as “user_name@domain_name”.
To log off, click [Log-out] in the upper-left corner of the page.
If account track settings have been applied
If account track settings have been applied, the account number is not re-
quired in order to access PageScope Web Connection.
8-6
200/250/350
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
Page structure
The page that appears immediately after PageScope Web Connection is ac-
cessed is called the User mode page. All users can view this page.
The configuration of the PageScope Web Connection page is shown below.
6
2
1
4
5
8
7
9
10
3
Note
To reset the status display and message display, click [Refresh] in the
Web browser.
No.
Item
Description
1
KONICA MINOLTA logo
Click the logo to go to the Konica Minolta Web
site at the following URL.
http://konicaminolta.com/
2
3
4
PageScope Web Connection logo
Administrator mode logon button
Status display
Click the PageScope Web Connection logo to
display the version information.
Click the button to log on to Administrator
mode.
The statuses of this machine’s printer section
and scanner section are displayed using icons.
200/250/350
8-7
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
No.
Item
Description
5
Message display
If an error occurred in the machine, the status of
the malfunction/error and other error
information are displayed.
6
7
Device name
The name of the device being accessed is dis-
played.
[Log-out] button
This button appears after you have logged on
when user authentication or external server au-
thentication settings have been applied. Click
this button to log off.
8
Tabs
Select the category of the page to be displayed.
The following tabs are displayed in User mode.
•
•
•
•
System
Job
Print
Scan
Note
If the optional fax kit has been in-
stalled, the Scan tab changes to the
Fax/Scan tab.
9
Menu
Information and settings for the selected tab are
listed. The menu that appears differs depending
on the tab that is selected.
10
Information and settings
Details of the item selected from the menu are
displayed.
Logging on to Administrator mode
You can switch between User mode and Administrator mode. However, in
order to specify system or network settings, you must be logged on to Ad-
ministrator mode.
0 When logged on to Administrator mode, the machine’s control panel is
locked and cannot be used.
0 Depending on the status of the machine, you may not be able to log on
to Administrator mode.
0 When logged on to Administrator mode, if no operation is performed for
10 minutes, a timeout occurs and you will automatically be logged off
from Administrator mode.
8-8
200/250/350
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
1
Type in the administrator password, and then click [Log-in].
The Administrator mode page appears.
2
To return to User mode, click [Log-out].
200/250/350
8-9
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
Web browser cache
8
The newest information may not appear in the PageScope Web Connection
pages because older versions of pages are saved in the cache for the Web
browser. In addition, problems may occur when the cache is used.
When using PageScope Web Connection, disable the cache for the Web
browser.
!
Detail
If the utility is used with the cache enabled and Administrator mode was
timed out, the timeout page may appear even after the utility is accessed
again. In addition, since the machine’s control panel remains locked and
cannot be used, the machine must be restarted. In order to avoid this
problem, disable the cache.
Note
The menus and commands may vary depending on the Web browser ver-
sion. For details, refer to the Help for the Web browser.
For Internet Explorer
1
2
3
On the “Tools” menu, click “Internet Options”.
On the General tab, click [Settings] under “Temporary Internet files”.
Select “Every visit to the page”, and then click [OK].
For Netscape
1
2
3
On the “Edit” menu, click “Preferences”.
In the “Category” box, click “Advanced”, then “Cache”.
Under “Compare the page in the cache to the page on the network”,
select “Every time I view the page”.
8-10
200/250/350
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
8.3
One-Touch Key Registration (User mode)
The recipients of scanned data can be registered with one-touch dial desti-
nations. A secondary recipient can also be registered with the one-touch dial
destination in case the transmission to the main recipient failed. In addition,
the index name can be specified.
Note
The secondary recipient can be specified when the optional scanner unit
is installed.
36 indexes can be registered on this machine, and up to 15 one-touch
dial buttons and fax programs can be registered in each index.
The following destination types can be registered here.
Item
Description
TX: PC (E-mail)
TX: PC (FTP Server)
TX: Internet FAX
TX: PC (SMB)
Register a recipient of a Scan to E-Mail operation.
Register a recipient of a Scan to FTP operation.
Register a recipient of an Internet fax operation.
Register a recipient of a Scan to SMB operation.
200/250/350
8-11
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
The following parameters are available on the page for each communication
mode.
When “TX: PC (E-mail)” is selected
Item
Description
One-Touch Name
Type in the name of the recipient that will appear as the name of the one-
touch dial destination. Up to 12 characters can be entered.
Destination Address
File Type
Type in the e-mail address of the recipient.
Select the format (“TIFF” or “PDF”) of the file that is to be sent.
Coding Method
Select the coding method (“MH” or “MMR”) for the data to be sent. The
data amount with the MMR coding method is less than with the MH
method.
8-12
200/250/350
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
When “TX: PC (FTP Server)” is selected
8
Item
Description
One-Touch Name
Type in the name of the recipient that will appear as the name of the one-
touch dial destination. Up to 12 characters can be entered.
FTP Server Address
Type in the IP address or host name of the server where the data is to
be uploaded.
Note
The host name can be entered if “DNS Setting” in the Net-
work Setting screen is set to “YES”.
Use Proxy
Select whether to use a proxy server when uploading data.
Port Number
Enter the server port number. Enter a numeric value within the range of
1 to 65535.
Anonymous
User Name
Select whether to permit anonymous user access (access that does not
require a login name or password).
Enter the user name. Up to 32 characters can be entered.
200/250/350
8-13
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
Item
Description
Password
Enter the login password for the server. Up to 32 characters can be
entered.
Note
The password appears as “••••”. To correct the entered
password, clear “••••”, and then type in the correct pass-
word.
Retype Password
Directory
Reenter the login password.
Specify the name of the directory where the data is to be uploaded. Up
to 128 characters can be entered.
Passive Mode
File Type
Select whether to enable or disable the passive mode.
Select the format (“Multi Page TIFF”, “Single Page TIFF” or “PDF”) of the
file that is to be sent.
Coding Method
Select the coding method (“MH” or “MMR”) for the data to be sent. The
data amount with the MMR coding method is less than with the MH
method.
When “TX: Internet FAX” is selected
Item
Description
One-Touch Name
Type in the name of the recipient that will appear as the name of the one-
touch dial destination. Up to 12 characters can be entered.
Destination Address
TX Size (Max.)
Type in the e-mail address of the recipient. Up to 64 characters can be
entered.
Select the maximum document size (“Letter/Legal” or “11*17”) for the
data to be sent.
8-14
200/250/350
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
Item
Description
TX Quality (Max.)
Select the maximum resolution (“200 dpi”, “400 dpi” or “600 dpi”) for the
data to be sent.
Coding Method
Select the coding method (“MH”, “MR” or “MMR”) for the data to be
sent. The data amount for the coding methods increase as follows:
MMR, MR, MH.
When “TX: PC (SMB)” is selected
Item
Description
One-Touch Name
Type in the name of the recipient that will appear as the name of the one-
touch dial destination. Up to 12 characters can be entered.
Destination Address
File Path
Type in the IP address or host name of the server where the data is to
be uploaded.
Type in the path to the destination folder. Up to 128 characters can be
entered.
Note
A shared folder created on the domain controller of Win-
dows Server 2003 cannot be specified.
User Name
Enter the user name. Up to 32 characters can be entered.
200/250/350
8-15
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
Item
Description
Password
Type in the login password for the computer where the data is to be
sent. Up to 14 characters can be entered.
Note
The password appears as “••••”. To correct the entered
password, clear “••••”, and then type in the correct pass-
word.
Retype Password
File Type
Reenter the login password.
Select the format (“Multi Page TIFF”, “Single Page TIFF” or “PDF”) of the
file that is to be sent.
Coding Method
Select the coding method (“MH” or “MMR”) for the data to be sent. The
data amount with the MMR coding method is less than with the MH
method.
8-16
200/250/350
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
Naming an index
1
Click the Scan tab.
If the optional fax kit has been installed, click the Fax/Scan tab.
–
2
3
Click [One-Touch Key Registration].
From the “Index” list (center table), click the index that is to be named.
The one-touch dial destinations that are saved in the selected index
appear in the lower half of the page.
200/250/350
8-17
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
4
Enter the index name, and then click [Apply].
Up to 8 characters can be entered.
The index name appears in the index list in the upper half of the page.
–
8-18
200/250/350
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
Registering a one-touch dial destination
1
Click the Scan tab.
If the optional fax kit has been installed, click the Fax/Scan tab.
–
2
3
Click [One-Touch Key Registration].
From the “Index” list, click the index where the one-touch dial destina-
tion is to be saved.
The one-touch dial destinations saved in the selected index appear in
the lower half of the page.
4
Click a box where a one-touch dial destination has not yet been regis-
tered.
Which are the boxes where a one-touch dial destination has not yet
been registered?
?
% The boxes where a one-touch dial destination has not yet been reg-
istered contain “---”.
5
Select the communication mode, and then click [Next].
200/250/350
8-19
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
–
If mode 476 of the software switch settings was changed, only
communication modes that can be selected appear. For details, re-
fer to “Specifying software switch settings (machine functions)” on
page 9-29.
6
7
Specify settings for the parameters in the page for the selected com-
munication mode.
–
To also register the secondary recipient, specify settings for the pa-
rameters, and then click [Sub Address Registration].
For details on the parameters, refer to “One-Touch Key Registration
(User mode)” on page 8-11.
–
Click [Apply].
The one-touch dial destination is registered.
Registering a secondary recipient
A secondary recipient can be specified in case the transmission to the recip-
ient of the one-touch dial destination failed. The communication modes in
which a secondary recipients can be specified are “TX: PC (E-mail)” and “TX:
Internet FAX”.
0 A secondary recipient can be specified if the optional scanner unit or fax
kit is installed.
0 Any of the following communication modes can be specified for the sec-
ondary recipient.
- TX: PC (E-mail)
- TX: PC (Scanner)*
- TX: InternetFAX (E-mail)*
- TX: InternetFAX (IP-TX)*
- TX: InternetFAX (IP-Relay)*
8-20
200/250/350
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
- FAX (G3)**
- TX: SIP-FAX**
*The communication mode can be specified if the optional scanner unit
or fax kit is installed.
**The communication mode can be specified if the optional fax kit is in-
stalled.
1
2
Click the box for the one-touch dial destination to be programmed with
a secondary recipient.
Click [Next].
–
If mode 476 of the software switch settings was changed, only
communication modes that can be selected appear. For details, re-
fer to “Specifying software switch settings (machine functions)” on
page 9-29.
200/250/350
8-21
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
Click [Sub Address Registration].
8
3
4
Select the communication mode for the secondary recipient, and then
click [Next].
–
If mode 476 of the software switch settings was changed, only
communication modes that can be selected appear. For details, re-
fer to “Specifying software switch settings (machine functions)” on
page 9-29.
8-22
200/250/350
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
5
Specify the various settings, and then click [Apply].
–
For details on the parameters, refer to “One-Touch Key Registration
(User mode)” on page 8-11.
Note
The name that appears beside “One-Touch Name” is the same as that
specified for the main recipient. Settings for all other parameters can be
specified.
To delete the registered secondary recipient, click [Sub Address Delete].
200/250/350
8-23
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
Changing the settings for a one-touch dial destination
8
1
Click the Scan tab.
If the optional fax kit has been installed, click the Fax/Scan tab.
–
2
3
Click [One-Touch Key Registration].
From the “Index” list, click the index that contains the one-touch dial
destination that is to be changed.
The one-touch dial destinations saved in the selected index appear in
the lower half of the page.
4
Click the one-touch dial destination whose settings are to be changed.
–
A one-touch dial button programmed as an administrator forward-
ing destination cannot be selected.
Are there one-touch dial destinations that cannot be selected even
if they are clicked?
?
% A fax program cannot be selected, even if it is clicked.
8-24
200/250/350
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
5
To change the communication mode, select the communication mode,
and then click [Next].
6
Specify settings for the parameters in the page for the selected com-
munication mode.
–
For details on the parameters, refer to “One-Touch Key Registration
(User mode)” on page 8-11.
200/250/350
8-25
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
Deleting a one-touch dial destination
8
1
Click the Scan tab.
If the optional fax kit has been installed, click the Fax/Scan tab.
–
2
3
Click [One-Touch Key Registration].
From the “Index” list, click the index that contains the one-touch dial
destination that is to be deleted.
The one-touch dial destinations saved in the selected index appear at
the bottom of the page.
8-26
200/250/350
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
4
Select the check box of the one-touch dial destination that is to be de-
leted.
–
A one-touch dial button programmed as an administrator forward-
ing destination cannot be selected.
5
Click [Delete].
200/250/350
8-27
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
8.4
FAX Program Registration (User mode)
Fax programs can be registered as one-touch dial destinations. Unlike the
one-touch dial destination where only recipients can be registered, scan set-
tings and multiple recipients can be registered. The registered data can also
be changed or deleted.
Note
Up to 30 fax programs can be registered. However, the total number of
one-touch dial destinations and fax programs must not exceed 540.
Some functions or parameters registered with a fax program have no effect
depending on the operation performed, as shown in the following table. For
details on each function and parameter, refer to the appropriate page.
o : Has an effect
+ : Has an effect under certain conditions
– : Does not have an effect
Operation Scan to
Function/ E-Mail
Scan to FTP Scan to
SMB
Scan to
HDD
Internet fax
Parameter
Original Type
Density
o
o
o
–
o
o
–
o
o
–
o
o
–
o
–
Reduction
Scan Area
TSI
o
–
o
–
o
–
o
–
o
o
o
o
o
o
+
Dest. Insert
TX Report
2in1
–
–
–
–
o
o
o
–
o
o
o
–
o
o
o
–
o
o
o
–
2-Sided TX
Rotation TX
Priority TX
Timer
o
o
+
o
o
o
+
–
o
o
+
–
o
o
+
–
o
o
+
Stamp
Subject Selec-
tion
+
Set Reply E-Mail
Address
o
–
–
–
–
+
–
E-Mail Notifica-
tion Destination
o
o
o
o
o
o
Set File Name
o
+
8-28
200/250/350
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
When registering a fax program, specify settings for the following functions/
parameters.
Item
Description
Program Name
Type in the name of the program that will appear as the name of
the one-touch dial destination. Up to 12 characters can be
entered.
Mode
Select “TX”.
Destination
Specify the program destination. Click [Select Destination], select
the check box of a registered one-touch dial destination, and then
click [Apply].
Original Type
Original Type
Density
Select the scan resolution.
Select the scan density.
Reduction
This is a fax setting. For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Facsimile
Operations].
Scan Area
Menu 1
TSI
Specify the document size for scanning.
Select transmission source information to print the registered text,
such as the name, fax number, or address, at the edge of pages
sent with the Internet fax operation.
For details on registering transmission source information, refer to
“TSI Registration” on page 8-42.
Dest. Insert
TX Report
Select whether to print the destination name registered with the
one-touch dial button together with other transmission source
information when TSI1 through TSI8 is selected.
Select the conditions for outputting the transmission results report.
Default: Select this setting to output the report according to the
setting specified from the Administrator Management screen.
Output On: Select this setting to output the report, regardless of
the transmission result.
If TX Fail: Select this setting to output the report only if the
transmission failed.
Output Off: Select this setting to not output the report, regardless
of the transmission result.
2in1
Select whether to send an Internet fax using the 2in1 function
(printing two pages on one page).
2-Sided TX
Select whether or not a double-sided transmission is performed
with the Internet fax operation.
On: Select this setting to perform a double-sided transmission.
When set to “On”, specify the binding margin and page orientation.
Off: Select this setting to not perform a double-sided transmission.
Rotation TX
Priority TX
Select whether or not to rotate the scan image according to the
paper orientation of the receiving machine when sending an
Internet fax.
The resolution can be set to 200 dpi or less when sending an A4-
size document.
Select whether or not the data is sent with priority over other jobs.
200/250/350
8-29
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
Item
Description
Timer
Select whether or not the transmission time is to be set. Specify
the transmission time when “On” is selected.
Stamp
Specify whether the scanned document is stamped to indicate
that it has been scanned. In addition, load the document into the
ADF.
Note
To use the Stamp function, optional stamp unit must
be installed.
Menu 2
Subject Selection
Select the subject of the e-mail message from the text that has
been registered in advance. For details on registering subject text,
refer to “E-Mail/Internet FAX (Administrator mode)” on page 8-69.
Set Reply E-Mail Address
The e-mail address of this machine is displayed as the e-mail reply
destination. To select an e-mail address other than that of this
machine, click [Select Reply E-Mail Address], and select an e-mail
address from those registered with one-touch dial destinations.
E-Mail Notification
Destination
data location is sent when performing the Scan to FTP, Scan to
registered with one-touch dial destinations.
Set File Name
to 16 characters can be entered.
!
Detail
For procedures on specifying settings for the various operations, refer to
the following pages.
- Scan to E-Mail (p. 3-11, p. 3-15)
- Scan to FTP (p. 4-11, p. 4-16)
- Scan to SMB (p. 5-10, p. 5-15)
- Scan to E-HDD (User’s Guide [Box Operations])
- Internet fax (p. 6-12, p. 6-16)
Registering fax programs
0 To specify the recipient of a fax program, register the recipient with a
one-touch dial destination in advance.
1
2
Click the Scan tab.
If the optional fax kit has been installed, click the Fax/Scan tab.
–
Click [FAX Program Registration].
8-30
200/250/350
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
3
4
From the “Index” list, click the index where the fax program is to be
registered. The one-touch dial destinations saved in the selected index
appear in the lower half of the page.
Click a box where a one-touch dial destination has not yet been regis-
tered.
Which are the boxes where a one-touch dial destination has not yet
been registered?
?
% The boxes where a one-touch dial destination has not yet been reg-
istered contain “---”.
200/250/350
8-31
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
Specify settings for the various parameters.
8
5
6
Click [Apply].
8-32
200/250/350
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
Changing the settings of the fax program
1
Click the Scan tab.
If the optional fax kit has been installed, click the Fax/Scan tab.
–
2
3
Click [FAX Program Registration].
From the “Index” list, click the index that contains the fax program that
is to be changed.
The one-touch dial destinations saved in the selected index appear in
the lower half of the page.
4
5
6
Click the fax program that is to be changed.
–
A one-touch dial destination other than a fax program cannot be se-
lected, even if it is clicked.
Specify settings for the program parameters.
–
For details on the parameters, refer to “FAX Program Registration
(User mode)” on page 8-28.
Click [Apply].
200/250/350
8-33
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
Deleting a fax program
8
1
Click the Scan tab.
If the optional fax kit has been installed, click the Fax/Scan tab.
–
2
3
Click [FAX Program Registration].
From the “Index” list, click the index that contains the fax program that
is to be deleted.
The one-touch dial destinations saved in the selected index appear at
the bottom of the page.
8-34
200/250/350
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
4
Select the check box of the fax program to be deleted.
5
Click [Delete].
200/250/350
8-35
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
8.5
Domain Name Registration (User mode)
When entering an e-mail address from this machine’s control panel, the des-
tination address can be entered quickly if domain names that are often en-
tered have been registered in advance.
On this machine’s control panel, a registered domain name can be selected
after touching [Domain] in the displayed screen.
Up to 6 domain names can be registered.
To register domain names
1
Click the Scan tab.
If the optional fax kit has been installed, click the Fax/Scan tab.
–
2
3
Click [Domain Name Registration].
Enter the domain name, and then click [Apply].
Up to 64 characters can be entered.
4
Click [OK].
8-36
200/250/350
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
8.6
Export/Import (Administrator mode)
The data that was registered with one-touch dial button on this machine can
be exported as a file.
Files can be exported with the following four modes.
Item
Description
Mode 1
Select this setting to export the data in its complete format, including the mail
program data (fax program data if the optional fax kit has been installed). The
data can be edited and imported again. In addition, the data can be imported
onto a different machine of the same model.
Note
Before importing the data onto a different machine, erase all of
the data first.
Since all of the data is exported, it can also be used as a backup
of the data.
Mode 2
Select this setting to export the data in its simple format, which does not
include the mail program data (fax program data if the optional fax kit has
been installed). The data can be edited and imported only onto the machine
from where it was exported.
Mode 3
Mode 4
In addition to the conditions described for Mode 1, the password is
encrypted. The password cannot be edited.
In addition to the conditions described for Mode 2, the password is
encrypted. The password cannot be edited.
!
Detail
The exported data is written in the UTF-8 character code. Edit the data
with the UTF-8 character code.
Note
Do not edit data exported with “Mode 3” or “Mode 4” selected, otherwise
the data may not be imported correctly.
Exporting data as files
1
In the Administrator mode, click the Scan tab.
–
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, click the Fax/Scan tab.
For the procedure to log on to Administrator mode, refer to “Log-
ging on to Administrator mode” on page 8-8.
2
Click [One-Touch Key Registration], then [Export].
200/250/350
8-37
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
Select the export format, and then click [Execute].
8
3
4
Click [Save].
8-38
200/250/350
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
Specify the directory where the data is to be saved. The file name can
8
5
also be changed.
6
Click [Save].
The exported data is saved in the specified directory.
Importing files
The one-touch dial button data that was saved on a computer can be import-
ed and written to this machine.
1
In the Administrator mode, click the Scan tab.
–
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, click the Fax/Scan tab.
For the procedure to log on to Administrator mode, refer to “Log-
ging on to Administrator mode” on page 8-8.
2
Click [One-Touch Key Registration], then [Import].
200/250/350
8-39
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
3
Click [Browse].
4
Select the file to be imported, and then click [Open].
8-40
200/250/350
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
5
Click [Execute].
The registered one-touch dial button data is imported.
Note
Check in advance for information regarding the models that can use the
exported data.
200/250/350
8-41
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
8.7
TSI Registration
Text, such as a name, fax number, or address, can be registered so that it
can be printed at the top of pages sent with the Internet fax operation.
source names can be registered, a different transmission source name can
be used for different recipients or for different accounts. The registered
transmission source name can be changed by following the same procedure
used to register it.
To register transmission sources
1
In the Administrator mode, click the Scan tab.
–
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, click the Fax/Scan tab.
For the procedure to log on to Administrator mode, refer to “Log-
ging on to Administrator mode” on page 8-8.
2
3
Click [TSI Registration].
Enter the transmission source name, and then click [Apply].
–
–
Up to 8 transmission source names can be registered.
Up to 40 characters can be entered.
4
Click [OK].
8-42
200/250/350
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
8.8
TX Settings (Administrator mode)
Default transmission settings can be specified.
Settings can be specified for the following.
Item
Description
Quality/Mode
Default Quality
Select the default quality setting that is specified after an operation is
complete.
Default Density Select the default density setting that is specified after an operation is
complete.
Com. Mode
Select the default communication mode that is specified after an operation is
complete. Select “TX: PC (E-mail)” or “TX: Internet FAX”.
FAX Menu
TSI
Select how the transmission source name is attached and the type of
transmission source information from 1 through 8.
Off: Select this setting to not attach the transmission source name.
Inside Body Text: Select this setting to print the transmission source name on
the original document.
Outside Body Text: Select this setting to not print the transmission source
name on the original document.
Rotation TX
2-Sided TX
Specify whether to reset the rotation transmission after the operation is
complete.
Specify whether to reset the double-sided transmission after the operation is
complete.
Original Bind
Direction
If “2-Sided TX” was set to “On”, select from “Left Binding”, “Top Binding” or
“Auto” for the binding position of the document.
200/250/350
8-43
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
Specifying the transmission settings
8
1
In the Administrator mode, click the Scan tab.
–
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, click the Fax/Scan tab.
For the procedure to log on to Administrator mode, refer to “Log-
ging on to Administrator mode” on page 8-8.
2
3
Click [TX Settings].
Specify settings for each parameter, and then click [Apply].
Com. Mode
Select whether or not each communication mode can be used.
1
In the Administrator mode, click the Scan tab.
If the optional fax kit has been installed, click the Fax/Scan tab.
–
2
3
4
Click [TX Settings].
Click [Com. Mode].
Specify a setting for each parameter, and then click [Apply].
8-44
200/250/350
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
–
If mode 476 of the software switch settings was changed, only
communication modes that can be selected appear. For details, re-
fer to “Specifying software switch settings (machine functions)” on
page 9-29.
Note
The communication modes that can be set differ depending on the op-
tions that are installed.
200/250/350
8-45
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
8.9
RX Settings (Administrator mode)
Specify the time and day for printing an Internet fax that is received while the
machine is in the off mode (mode where printing is not immediate, even when
a fax is received).
By regulating the time when printing is performed, Internet faxes transmitted
late at night can be safely received.
Settings can be specified for the following.
Item
Description
Timer
Specify whether or not received Internet faxes are printed at a specified time
instead of being printed immediately.
On: Select this setting to collect all received Internet faxes during the
specified time period on the specified days, and print them together. Specify
the days, starting time and ending time.
Off: Select this setting to immediately print an Internet fax that is received.
Stop Time
Start Time
Type in the ending time for printing received Internet faxes.
Type in the starting time for printing received Internet faxes.
Select the day of the week to print at the specified time.
Day Of The
Week
Memory Lock
Password
Specify the four-digit password used to print Internet faxes received outside
word], and then specify a new password.
Note
The password appears as “••••”. To correct the entered pass-
word, clear “••••”, and then type in the correct password.
Note
For details on entering a password to print received Internet faxes, refer
to “To print manually” on page 9-16.
8-46
200/250/350
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
Specifying the reception settings
1
In the Administrator mode, click the Scan tab.
–
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, click the Fax/Scan tab.
For the procedure to log on to Administrator mode, refer to “Log-
ging on to Administrator mode” on page 8-8.
2
3
Click [RX Settings].
Specify a setting for each parameter, and then click [Apply].
200/250/350
8-47
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
8.10 Scan Setting (Administrator mode)
The device name of this machine used in the file name and the transmission
of the scanned data can be specified.
Settings can be specified for the following.
Item
Description
Machine Name Enter the device name of this machine that is used for the file name. Up to 16
characters can be entered.
Division by
Page
Applied when performing the Scan to E-Mail or Internet fax operation.
Select whether the data is divided by page when scanned data is sent.
Division by Size Applied when performing the Scan to E-Mail operation.
Select whether the data is divided by a fixed size when scanned data is sent.
Note
Depending on the e-mail software used by the recipient, the bi-
nary division (“Division by Size”) may not be available.
Size of Division When “Division by Size” is set to “On”, type in the size of the data sections
(between 16 and 2000 KB)
Interval of
Division
When “Division by Size” is set to “On”, type in the number of seconds
(between 1 and 255) for the interval when the divided data is sent.
Transmission
E-mail Mode
TX Quality
(Max.)
Select the maximum resolution (“200 dpi”, “400 dpi” or “600 dpi”) for the data
to be sent as an Internet fax.
TX Size (Max.)
Select the maximum document size (“Letter”, “Legal” or “11*17”) for the data
to be sent as an Internet fax.
Coding Method Select the coding method (“MH”, “MR” or “MMR”) for the data to be sent as
an Internet fax. The data amount for the coding methods increase as follows:
MMR, MR, MH.
Scan Mode
B/W: File Type
Select the format (“TIFF” or “PDF”) of the data that is to be saved when
performing the Scan to E-Mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to SMB, or Scan to HDD
operation.
If “TIFF” was selected, the setting changes to “Multi Page TIFF” with the Scan
to FTP, Scan to SMB or Scan to HDD operation.
B/W: Coding
Method
Select the coding method (“MH” or “MMR”) for the data to be sent when
performing the Scan to E-Mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to SMB, or Scan to HDD
operation. The data amount with the MMR coding method is less than with
the MH method.
8-48
200/250/350
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
Specifying the scan settings
1
In the Administrator mode, click the Scan tab.
–
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, click the Fax/Scan tab.
For the procedure to log on to Administrator mode, refer to “Log-
ging on to Administrator mode” on page 8-8.
2
3
Click [Scan Setting].
Specify a setting for each parameter, and then click [Apply].
200/250/350
8-49
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
8.11 TX Document (Administrator mode)
When sending documents from this machine, the document can be forward-
ed simultaneously to the addresses specified by the administrator. Specify
the address of the forwarding destination.
Note
Select the forwarding recipient from a one-touch dial destination. Be sure
destination in advance.
A document that was sent and forwarded cannot be forwarded to the ad-
ministrator.
Specifying the address of the forwarding destination
1
In the Administrator mode, click the Scan tab.
–
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, click the Fax/Scan tab.
For the procedure to log on to Administrator mode, refer to “Log-
ging on to Administrator mode” on page 8-8.
2
3
Click [TX Document].
Select the address of the forwarding destination. Click [Select For-
warding Destination].
The list of one-touch dial destinations appears.
8-50
200/250/350
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
4
5
Select the address of the forwarding destination, and then click [Apply].
Only one address can be selected.
–
Click [Apply].
200/250/350
8-51
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
8.12 RX Document (Administrator mode)
The method for processing a received document can be specified. This can
be specified only for documents received over a network.
The following processing methods are available.
-
Processing documents received on each line (Port): Specify the operation
performed, such as printing or forwarding the received document, for
each line where a document is received.
-
Processing all other received documents (All Other Documents): Specify
the processing method of documents received on lines other than ports.
If “Port” is clicked, settings can be specified for the following.
Item
Description
Distribution
Conditions
Select whether or not an operation is performed when a document is received
on the selected line.
Auto: Select this setting to not process the received document
Specifies: Select this setting to specify where the received document is saved
or forwarded.
RX Doc.
Settings
When “Distribution Conditions” is set to “Specified”, select the processing
method for the received document.
Forward: Select this setting to forward the data to the specified destination.
Print: Select this setting to print the document.
Print & Forward: Select this setting to print the document and forward the data
to the specified destination.
Forwarding
Destination
Specify a forwarding destination when “RX Doc. Settings” is set to “Forward”.
Click [Select Forwarding Destination], select the forwarding destination
address, and then click [Apply].
If “All Other Documents” is clicked, settings can be specified for the follow-
ing.
Item
Description
RX Doc.
Settings
Select how the received document is processed.
Memory RX: Select this setting to save the document in the memory.
Forward: Select this setting to forward the data to the specified destination.
Print: Select this setting to print the document.
Print & Forward: Select this setting to print the document and forward the data
to the specified destination.
Forwarding
Destination
Specify a forwarding destination when “RX Doc. Settings” is set to “Forward”.
Click [Select Forwarding Destination], select the forwarding destination
address, and then click [Apply].
8-52
200/250/350
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
Note
If bit 7 of mode 306 is set to “1” in the Soft SW Setting screen, only “Port”
is available. For details, refer to “Specifying software switch settings (ma-
chine functions)” on page 9-29.
Specifying the processing of received documents at each line
1
In the Administrator mode, click the Scan tab.
–
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, click the Fax/Scan tab.
For the procedure to log on to Administrator mode, refer to “Log-
ging on to Administrator mode” on page 8-8.
2
3
Click [RX Document], then [Port].
Click [Network].
200/250/350
8-53
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
Specify a setting for each parameter, and then click [Apply].
8
4
8-54
200/250/350
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
Specifying the processing of other received documents
1
In the Administrator mode, click the Scan tab.
–
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, click the Fax/Scan tab.
For the procedure to log on to Administrator mode, refer to “Log-
ging on to Administrator mode” on page 8-8.
2
3
Click [RX Document], then [All Other Documents].
Specify a setting for each parameter, and then click [Apply].
200/250/350
8-55
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
8.13 Report Settings (Administrator mode)
The conditions for outputting the transmission results report and activity re-
port can be specified.
Settings can be specified for the following.
Item
Description
TX Report
(Single
destination)
Select the conditions for outputting the results report for a transmission to a
single destination.
Output On: Select this setting to output the report, regardless of the
transmission result.
If TX Fail: Select this setting to output the report only if the transmission failed.
Output Off: Select this setting to not output the report, regardless of the
transmission result.
TX Report
(Multiple
destinations)
Select the conditions for outputting the results report for a transmission to
multiple destinations.
Output On: Select this setting to output the report, regardless of the
transmission result.
If TX Fail: Select this setting to output the report only if the transmission failed.
Output Off: Select this setting to not output the report, regardless of the
transmission result.
Activity Report
Select whether or not the activity report is outputted with every 50
transmissions.
8-56
200/250/350
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
Specifying the report output settings
1
In the Administrator mode, click the Scan tab.
–
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, click the Fax/Scan tab.
For the procedure to log on to Administrator mode, refer to “Log-
ging on to Administrator mode” on page 8-8.
2
3
Click [Report Settings].
Specify a setting for each parameter, and then click [Apply].
200/250/350
8-57
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
8.14 TCP/IP (Administrator mode)
Specify the required settings for using this machine over a network.
If “TCP/IP” is clicked, settings can be specified for the following.
Item
Description
TCP/IP [*]
Select whether to enable or disable TCP/IP.
DHCP
Configuration
[*]
Select whether the DHCP server is enabled (the IP address is acquired
automatically) or disabled (a fixed IP address is specified).
IP Address [*]
Specify the IP address of this machine. Specify a setting when “DHCP Con-
figuration” is set to “Disable”.
Subnet Mask [*] Type in the subnet mask of the network to be connected. Specify a setting
when “DHCP Configuration” is set to “Disable”.
Gateway
Address [*]
Type in the default gateway of the network to be connected. Specify a setting
when “DHCP Configuration” is set to “Disable”.
RAW Port [*]
Select whether or not a port number is used with RAW printing.
RAW Port
Number
Specify the RAW port number. Enter the port number within the range of 1 to
65535.
Self-Domain
Name [*]
Specify the domain name of this machine. Specify this setting when
performing a direct fax transmission over a mail server. For details on
specifying the domain device settings, refer to the User’s Guide [Facsimile
Operations].
Note
“Self-Domain Name” and “Port Number” appear if the optional
scanner unit or fax kit has been installed.
To send a direct fax, the optional fax kit must be installed.
Port Number[*] Type in a port number between 1 and 65535 for this machine’s domain.
DNS
Configuration
Select “Yes” or “No” for the DNS (Domain Name System).
When using a DNS server within a network, select “Yes”. When not using a
DNS server within a network, select “No”.
When using an external server such as an Internet provider, select “No” if the
IP address of the mail server is public. If the DNS name of the mail server is
public and the IP address is not public, select “Yes”.
For details on the network environment, contact the network administrator.
Host Name
Specify the host name of this machine.
For details on the settings to be specified, contact the network administrator.
Specify a setting when “DNS Configuration” is set to “No”.
Domain Name
Specify the domain name of the DNS server.
For details on the settings to be specified, contact the network administrator.
Specify a setting when “DNS Configuration” is set to “No”.
DNS Server
Address 1 to 3
Specify the IP addresses of the DNS server.
For details on the settings to be specified, contact the network administrator.
Specify a setting when “DNS Configuration” is set to “No”.
8-58
200/250/350
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
Item
Description
DNS Query
Timeout
Select the time when a query to the DNS server is timed out. Select 20, 40,
80, 160, 320, or 640 seconds.
SLP [*]
LPD [*]
Select whether to enable or disable SLP (Service Location Protocol).
Select whether to enable or disable LPD (Line Printer Daemon).
*
If the setting of a parameter marked with [*] is changed, turn this machine off, then on again.
Note
When specifying an IP address or DNS server address, the IP address
cannot be specified to begin with “0.”, “127.”, or a number greater than
224.
200/250/350
8-59
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
Specifying the TCP/IP settings
8
1
In the Administrator mode, click the Network tab.
–
For the procedure to log on to Administrator mode, refer to “Log-
ging on to Administrator mode” on page 8-8.
2
3
Click [Common Setting], then [TCP/IP].
Specify a setting for each parameter, and then click [Apply].
4
If the setting of a parameter marked with [*] is changed, turn this ma-
chine off, then on again.
8-60
200/250/350
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
Reminder
When turning the machine off, then on again with the main power switch,
wait about 10 seconds to turn the machine on after turning it off.
The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after
being turned off.
200/250/350
8-61
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
8.15 IP Filtering
Select whether or not reception is possible within the range of specified IP
addresses.
Settings can be specified for the following.
Item
Description
Accept IP
Range
Reception of only the IP addresses in the specified range is permitted.
Reject IP
Range
IP addresses in the specified range are blocked.
Note
0.0.0.0 cannot be included in a specified range. For example, to specify
the range of addresses before 192.168.1.20, specify the range from
0.0.0.1 to 192.168.1.20.
To specify IP filtering settings
1
2
In the Administrator mode, click the Scan tab.
If the optional fax kit has been installed, click the Fax/Scan tab.
–
Click [IP Filtering].
8-62
200/250/350
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
3
Specify a setting for each parameter, and then click [Apply].
200/250/350
8-63
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
8.16 LDAP (Administrator mode)
The settings used by the LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) serv-
er in a network can be specified.
Settings can be specified for the following.
Item
Description
LDAP
Select whether to enable or disable address searches where the LDAP server
is used. If “Enable” is selected, the LDAP server can be specified.
Search Default
Setting
Select which of the registered LDAP servers is to be accessed. This
parameter appears if an LDAP server has been registered.
Specifying the LDAP settings
1
In the Administrator mode, click the Network tab.
–
For the procedure to log on to Administrator mode, refer to “Log-
ging on to Administrator mode” on page 8-8.
2
3
Click [Common Setting], then [LDAP].
Select whether to enable or disable LDAP searches, and then click [Ap-
ply].
8-64
200/250/350
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
8.17 LDAP Server Setting (Administrator mode)
If LDAP searches are enabled, the LDAP server to be accessed can be reg-
istered. Up to 5 LDAP servers can be registered in this machine.
For details on the LDAP search methods, refer to “Searching the destination
information from the server” on page 7-2.
Reminder
If “LDAP” is not set to “Enable”, the LDAP server information cannot be
registered. To register the LDAP server information, be sure to set
“LDAP” to “Enable”.
If “LDAP Server Setting” is clicked, settings can be specified for the follow-
ing.
Item
Description
LDAP Server
Name
Enter the LDAP server name. Up to 16 characters can be entered.
LDAP Server
Address: IP
Address
Specify the IP address of the LDAP server.
LDAP Server
Address: Host
Name
Enter the LDAP server host name. Up to 64 characters can be entered.
SSL/TLS
Select whether to perform SSL/TLS encryption of the sent data.
Port Number
Type in the port number (between 1 and 65535) used to communicate with the
LDAP server.
Search Base
Specify the location on the LDAP server where searches are to be started. Up
to 255 characters can be entered.
Connection
timeout
Type in the time (between 5 and 300 seconds) when a search is timed out.
Maximum
number of
Search
Type in the maximum number of hits (between 5 and 100) to be received as
LDAP search results.
Authentication
Setting
Select the LDAP authentication method.
Domain Name
Login Name
Password
Specify a setting when “Authentication Setting” is set to “Active Directory”.
Up to 64 characters can be entered.
Specify a setting when “Authentication Setting” is not set to “Anonymous”.
Up to 64 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be entered, excluding ^.
Specify a setting when “Authentication Setting” is not set to “Anonymous”.
Up to 32 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be entered, excluding ^.
[Check
connection]
Click to use the entered settings and check the connection to the LDAP
server.
200/250/350
8-65
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
Note
If bit 7 of mode 466 is set to “1” in the Soft SW Setting screen, select
“GSS-SPNEGO” beside “Authentication Setting”. For details on the soft-
ware switch settings, refer to “Specifying software switch settings (ma-
chine functions)” on page 9-29.
If bit 7 of mode 466 is set to “1” in the Soft SW Setting screen, the infor-
mation entered beside “Login Name” and “Password” is used when
checking the connection. For details on the software switch settings, re-
fer to “Specifying software switch settings (machine functions)” on
page 9-29.
Registering an LDAP server
1
In the Administrator mode, click the Network tab.
–
For the procedure to log on to Administrator mode, refer to “Log-
ging on to Administrator mode” on page 8-8.
2
3
Click [Common Setting], then [LDAP Server Setting].
Click a box containing “---” for the LDAP server to be registered.
8-66
200/250/350
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
4
Specify a setting for each parameter.
5
6
Click [Apply].
Click [OK].
200/250/350
8-67
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
Deleting an LDAP server
8
1
In the Administrator mode, click the Network tab.
–
For the procedure to log on to Administrator mode, refer to “Log-
ging on to Administrator mode” on page 8-8.
2
3
Click [Common Setting], then [LDAP Server Setting].
Select the check box of the LDAP server to be deleted.
4
Click [Delete].
8-68
200/250/350
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
8.18 E-Mail/Internet FAX (Administrator mode)
Transmission settings for the Scan to E-Mail and Internet fax operations can
be specified.
Settings can be specified for the following.
Item
Description
POP3
Specify the POP3 server for sending Internet faxes.
Specify the SMTP server for sending data with the Scan to E-Mail operation.
SMTP
Subject/Text
Specify the subject and any text to be used when sending data with the Scan
to E-Mail or Internet fax operation.
Other
Specify all other related send and receive settings.
Specify settings for the following.
POP3
Item
Description
POP3 Server
Address
Specify the settings required to receive Internet faxes.
Type in the IP address or host name (up to 64 characters).
For details on the settings to be specified, contact the network administrator.
POP3 User
Name
Specify the POP3 user name (up to 64 characters) of this machine.
For details on the settings to be specified, contact the network administrator.
POP3
Password
Specify the POP3 password (up to 32 characters) of this machine.
For details on the settings to be specified, contact the network administrator.
Note
The entered password appears as “••••”. To correct the en-
tered password, clear “••••”, and then type in the correct pass-
word.
Auto-RX Check Select whether to automatically check for received e-mail messages (Internet
fax) when connected to the POP3 server.
Auto-RX Check If “Auto-RX Check” is set to “Yes”, type in the time interval (between 1 and 99)
Interval
at which the check is performed.
Port Number
Type in the number (between 1 and 65535) of the port where the POP3 server
is connected.
POP3 Timeout
[*]
Select the time until the connection with the POP3 server is timed out. Select
from 30, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180, 210, 240, 270, and 300 seconds.
APOP [*]
Select whether or not APOP authentication is enabled.
*
If the setting of a parameter marked with [*] is changed, turn this machine off, then on again.
200/250/350
8-69
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
SMTP
Item
Description
SMTP Server
Address
Specify a setting for sending data with the Scan to E-mail or Internet fax
operation. In addition, specify a setting when using the E-Mail Notification
function with the Scan to FTP, Scan to SMB or Scan to HDD operation.
Type in the IP address or host name (up to 64 characters). For details on the
settings to be specified, contact the network administrator.
Port Number [*] Type in the number (between 1 and 65535) of the port where the SMTP server
is connected.
SMTP TX
Timeout [*]
Select the time until the connection with the SMTP server is timed out. Select
from 30, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180, 210, 240, 270, and 300 seconds.
SMTP RX
Timeout [*]
Select the time until the connection with the SMTP server is timed out. Select
from 30, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180, 210, 240, 270, and 300 seconds.
E-Mail Address Specify the e-mail address (up to 64 characters) of this machine. This address
appears as the From address when sending data with the Scan to E-Mail or
Internet fax operation.
For details on the settings to be specified, contact the network administrator.
SMTP Authen-
tication User
Name
Specify the user name for using e-mail transmission authentication (SMTP au-
thentication). For details on the settings to be specified, contact the network
administrator.
It is not necessary to specify a setting when the SMTP authentication user
name and the POP3 user name are the same.
SMTP Authen-
tication User
Password
Specify the password for using e-mail transmission authentication (SMTP au-
thentication). For details on the settings to be specified, contact the network
administrator.
It is not necessary to specify a setting when the SMTP authentication pass-
word and the POP3 password are the same.
Note
The entered password appears as “••••”. To correct the en-
tered password, clear “••••”, and then type in the correct pass-
word.
*
If the setting of a parameter marked with [*] is changed, turn this machine off, then on again.
Note
The following parameters appear when bits 6 and 2 of mode 380 are set
to “1” in the Software Switch Setting screen. For details, refer to “Speci-
fying software switch settings (machine functions)” on page 9-29.
- SMTP Authentication User Name
- SMTP Authentication User Password
If bit 4 of mode 371 is set to “1” in the Software Switch Setting screen,
two SMTP servers can be registered. For details, refer to “Specifying
software switch settings (machine functions)” on page 9-29.
8-70
200/250/350
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
Subject/Text
Item
Description
Subject 1 to 4
The subject can be specified for sending data with the Scan to E-Mail or
Internet fax operation.
Up to 4 subjects can be registered, therefore, subjects can be used depend-
ing on the contents of the transmission.
Up to 40 characters can be entered.
Text
Type in the text attached to data sent with the Scan to E-Mail or Internet fax
operation. Text that has been specified in advance is “fixed text”, and text that
can be specified freely is “custom text”. The text entered here is registered as
“custom text”.
Up to 256 characters can be entered.
200/250/350
8-71
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
Other
Item
Description
Activity Report
Specify whether to notify the destination of the results when an Internet fax is
received.
RX Doc.
Header Print
Select whether to print the e-mail header on the first page of the received
document when an Internet fax is printed.
TX Doc. Text
Insert
Text can be inserted into the text of data sent with the Scan to E-Mail or
Internet fax operation.
No: Select this setting to not insert text. For the Scan to E-Mail operation,
fixed text is inserted even if “No” is selected.
Default: Select this setting to insert the fixed text that has been saved in
advance on this machine.
Custom: Select this setting to insert text that can be set freely.
Gateway TX
Select “Restict” for this machine.
8-72
200/250/350
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
Specifying the POP3 settings
1
In the Administrator mode, click the Network tab.
For the procedure to log on to Administrator mode, refer to “Log-
ging on to Administrator mode” on page 8-8.
–
2
3
Click [E-Mail/Internet FAX], then [POP3].
Specify a setting for each parameter, and then click [Apply].
4
5
Click [OK].
If the setting of a parameter marked with [*] is changed, turn this ma-
chine off, then on again.
200/250/350
8-73
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
Reminder
When turning the machine off, then on again with the main power switch,
wait about 10 seconds to turn the machine on after turning it off.
The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after
being turned off.
8-74
200/250/350
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
Specifying the SMTP settings
1
In the Administrator mode, click the Network tab.
For the procedure to log on to Administrator mode, refer to “Log-
ging on to Administrator mode” on page 8-8.
–
2
3
Click [E-Mail/Internet FAX], then [SMTP].
Specify a setting for each parameter, and then click [Apply].
4
5
Click [OK].
If the setting of a parameter marked with [*] is changed, turn this ma-
chine off, then on again.
Reminder
When turning the machine off, then on again with the main power switch,
wait about 10 seconds to turn the machine on after turning it off.
The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after
being turned off.
200/250/350
8-75
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
Specifying the subject or text settings
8
1
In the Administrator mode, click the Network tab.
–
For the procedure to log on to Administrator mode, refer to “Log-
ging on to Administrator mode” on page 8-8.
2
3
Click [E-Mail/Internet FAX], then [Subject/Text].
Specify a setting for each parameter, and then click [Apply].
4
Click [OK].
8-76
200/250/350
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
Specifying other settings
1
In the Administrator mode, click the Network tab.
For the procedure to log on to Administrator mode, refer to “Log-
ging on to Administrator mode” on page 8-8.
–
2
3
Click [E-Mail/Internet FAX], then [Other].
Specify a setting for each parameter, and then click [Apply].
4
Click [OK].
200/250/350
8-77
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
8.19 FTP Configuration (Administrator mode)
Detailed FTP proxy server and FTP server settings can be specified.
Settings can be specified for the following.
Item
Description
Proxy IP
Address
Type in the IP address or host name (up to 64 characters) for the proxy server.
For details on the settings to be specified, contact the network administrator.
Port Number
Type in the number (between 1 and 65535) of the port where the FTP server
is connected.
FTP Server [*]
Select whether or not the FTP server is used.
FTP
Connection
Select the time until the connection with the FTP server is timed out. Select
from 30, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180, 210, 240, 270 and 300 seconds.
Timeout
*
If the setting of a parameter marked with [*] is changed, turn this machine off, then on again.
Specifying the FTP settings
1
In the Administrator mode, click the Network tab.
–
For the procedure to log on to Administrator mode, refer to “Log-
ging on to Administrator mode” on page 8-8.
2
3
Click [FTP Configuration].
Specify a setting for each parameter, and then click [Apply].
8-78
200/250/350
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
4
5
Click [OK].
If the setting of a parameter marked with [*] is changed, turn this ma-
chine off, then on again.
Reminder
When turning the machine off, then on again with the main power switch,
wait about 10 seconds to turn the machine on after turning it off.
The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after
being turned off.
200/250/350
8-79
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
8.20 SNMP
Select whether or not SNMP is used.
Specifying the SNMP setting
1
In the Administrator mode, click the Network tab.
–
For the procedure to log on to Administrator mode, refer to “Log-
ging on to Administrator mode” on page 8-8.
2
3
Click [SNMP].
Specify a setting for each parameter, and then click [Apply].
4
After changing the settings, turn the machine off, then on again.
Reminder
When turning the machine off, then on again with the main power switch,
wait about 10 seconds to turn the machine on after turning it off.
The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after
being turned off.
8-80
200/250/350
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
8.21 SSL/TLS (Administrator mode)
The SSL/TLS settings can be specified. When SSL/TLS is enabled, the com-
munication between the machine and the client PC is encrypted to prevent
information, such as passwords, from being leaked.
Certificates can be created and deleted, and the SSL/TLS status can be
specified.
If “Create a Self-Signed Certificate” is clicked, settings can be specified for
the following.
Item
Description
Common Name The machine’s IP address is displayed. When DHCP is enabled, the host
name is displayed.
Organization
Enter the organization name or group name. (Up to 63 ASCII characters)
Enter the department name. (Up to 63 ASCII characters)
Organization
Unit
Locality
Enter the locality name. (Up to 127 ASCII characters)
State/Province
Country
Enter the state or province name. (Up to 127 ASCII characters)
Type in the two-character country code defined by ISO03166.2.
United States: US
United Kingdom: GB
Italy: IT
Australia: AU
Netherlands: NL
Canada: CA
Spain: ES
Czech Republic: CZ
China: CN
Denmark: DK
Germany: DE
Japan: JP
France: FR
Belgium: BE
Russia: RU
Validity Start
Date
The valid start date (date and time when this screen is displayed) is displayed.
Validity Period
(day)
Enter the number of days that the certificate is valid from the valid start date.
The input range is 1 to 3650.
Encryption
Strength
Specify the SSL/TLS encryption type.
Specify settings for the following in order to specify the SSL/TLS settings.
Item
Description
SSL/TLS
Select whether SSL/TLS is enabled or disabled.
Select the encryption type.
Encryption
Strength
200/250/350
8-81
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
Creating certificates
1
In the Administrator mode, click the Network tab.
For the procedure to log on to Administrator mode, refer to “Log-
ging on to Administrator mode” on page 8-8.
–
2
3
Click [SSL/TLS].
Select “Create a Self-Signed Certificate”, and then click [Next].
200/250/350
8-83
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
Specify a setting for each parameter.
8
4
5
6
Click [Create].
The certificate is created.
When creation of the certificate is complete, click [OK].
Log off from Administrator mode.
8-84
200/250/350
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
Deleting certificates
1
In the Administrator mode, click the Network tab.
For the procedure to log on to Administrator mode, refer to “Log-
ging on to Administrator mode” on page 8-8.
–
2
3
Click [SSL/TLS].
Click [SSL/TLS Setting].
–
If “Enhance Security” is set to “ON”, certificates cannot be deleted.
200/250/350
8-85
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
Select “Delete Certificate”, and then click [Next].
8
4
5
Check the message, and then click [OK].
The certificate is deleted.
6
Click [OK].
Log off from Administrator mode.
8-86
200/250/350
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
Specifying the SSL/TLS settings
1
In the Administrator mode, click the Network tab.
For the procedure to log on to Administrator mode, refer to “Log-
ging on to Administrator mode” on page 8-8.
–
2
3
Click [SSL/TLS].
Click [SSL/TLS Setting].
200/250/350
8-87
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
4
Select “Set Encryption Strength and Enable/Disable of SSL/TLS.”, and
then click [Next].
5
Specify a setting for each parameter.
–
If “Enhance Security” is set to “ON”, “SSL/TLS” cannot be set to
“Off”.
6
7
Click [Apply].
Click [OK].
8-88
200/250/350
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
8
8.22 User Authentication (Administrator mode)
This page appears when “External Server” is specified as the authentication
method. The user authentication server type and domain name can be spec-
ified.
If “User Authentication” is clicked, settings can be specified for the following.
Item
Description
Active
Directory
Type in a domain name of up to 64 characters for the Active Directory. Ten
domain names can be registered. Specify the default domain name in the
“Default Domain Setting” box.
NTLM
Type in the domain name for the NT server. Up to 15 characters can be
entered.
NDS: Tree
Name
Type in the NDS tree name. Up to 63 characters can be entered.
NDS: Context
Name
Type in the NDS context name. Up to 127 characters can be entered.
Note
If user authentication is performed and a domain other than the default
domain name is used as an Active Directory, type in the user name as
“user_name@domain_name”.
For “user_name@domain_name”, specify a domain name of up to 64
characters.
If bit 7 of mode 466 is set to “1” in the Soft SW Setting screen, select “Ac-
tive Directory”. For details on the software switch settings, refer to “Spec-
ifying software switch settings (machine functions)” on page 9-29.
200/250/350
8-89
Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection
Specifying user authentication settings
8
1
In the Administrator mode, click the Network tab.
–
For the procedure to log on to Administrator mode, refer to “Log-
ging on to Administrator mode” on page 8-8.
2
3
Click [User Authentication].
Select the server type used for authentication, and specify a setting for
each parameter.
4
Click [Apply].
8-90
200/250/350
9 Specifying management
settings
Specifying management settings
9
9
Specifying management settings
9.1
Available parameters
The following Administrator Management parameters are related to the infor-
mation in this manual.
Administrator Management 1
Item
Description
Initial Setting
TSI
Registration
Prints the entered text such as the name, fax
number, and address at the top of the output
page when sending an Internet fax.
Registers this transmission source name.
TX Settings
RX Settings
Specifies the default settings for transmission.
Specifies the time and day of the week to print
when receiving an Internet fax.
Report Settings
Specifies the output conditions of the result
reports and communication control reports.
Document
Management
TX Document
When sending documents from this machine,
they can simultaneously be forwarded to the
addresses specified by the administrator.
Specifies the forwarding addresses.
RX Document Port
Specifies the processing and forwarding of
documents received over a network.
All Other
Documents
Specifies the processing and forwarding of
documents received in other ways than over a
network.
Administrator Management 2
Item
Description
Network Settings
Specifies the required settings for using this machine over a net-
work. For details, refer to Chapter 2, “Setup” on page 2-2.
Software SW
Ping
Specifies function status settings.
Checks whether this machine is connected to a network. For
details, refer to Chapter 2, “Setup” on page 2-2.
SSL/TLS
When SSL/TLS is enabled, the communication between the ma-
chine and the client computer can be encrypted. Specifies the
creation, deletion, or encryption of certificates.
9-2
200/250/350
Specifying management settings
9
Reminder
If the [Utility/Counter] key was pressed to register items and specify set-
tings, be sure to press the [Reset] key in the control panel after returning
to the initial screen.
200/250/350
9-3
Specifying management settings
9
9.2
Registering transmission source names
When sending Internet faxes, the text of the transmission source entered can
be printed. You can register the transmission source name.
The transmission source name can be used with the following operations.
Item
Description
Internet fax
Prints the name of the transmission source at the top of the
page.
Note
Up to 8 transmission source names can be registered. Since multiple
transmission sources can be registered, the names for each destination
and track can be used separately.
Transmission source names of up to 40 characters can be registered.
To register a transmission source name
1
2
Enter Administrator mode, and then touch [Admin. 1].
Touch [Initial Setting].
Utility/Counter
Administrator Management 1
Enter
Initial
Admin.Set
Setting
Account/
User Auth.
TX Settings
Print Lists
RX Settings
Report
Settings
Document
Management
Memory
Free
100%
9-4
200/250/350
Specifying management settings
Touch [TSI Registration].
9
3
4
5
Initial Setting
Enter
Date & Time
Setting
Language for
Communication
TSI Registration
Memory
Free
100%
Select the number of the transmission source to be registered.
Select the TSI you wish to register or
change. The TSI is used to indetify
the sender at the receiving destina-
tion.
Utility/Counter
TSI Registration
Enter
1
2
3
4
1
2
Memory
Free
100%
Type in the transmission source name, and then touch [Enter].
TSI Registration
Cancel
Enter
Del.
@
Q
W
Z
E
X
R
C
T
V
Y
U
N
I
O
P
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
L
B
M
SPACE
Alpha
Caps
Memory
Free
100%
6
7
Check the information to be registered, and then touch [Enter].
Touch [Enter] until the initial screen appears.
200/250/350
9-5
Specifying management settings
9
9.3
Specifying transmission report settings (TX Settings)
You can specify the default settings for transmission.
Settings can be specified for the following.
Item
Description
Quality/Mode
Default Quality
Specify the quality default value that is reset after an operation
is completed.
Default Density
Specify the density default value that is reset after an operation
is completed.
Communication Mode
Specify the communication mode default value that is reset af-
ter an operation is completed. Select from PC (e-mail) or Inter-
net FAX (Internet FAX).
Comm. Menu
TSI
Select the transmission source name.
OFF: Does not attach the transmission source name.
Inside Body Text: Prints the transmission source name on the
original document.
Outside Body Text: Does not print the transmission source
name on the original document.
Rotation TX
2-Sided TX
Specify whether to reset the rotation transmission after an op-
eration is completed.
Specify whether to reset the duplex transmission after an oper-
ation is completed.
Specifying the Quality/Mode settings
1
2
Enter Administrator mode, and then touch [Admin. 1].
Touch [TX Settings].
Utility/Counter
Administrator Management 1
Enter
Initial
Admin.Set
Setting
Account/
User Auth.
TX Settings
Print Lists
RX Settings
Report
Settings
Document
Management
Memory
Free
100%
9-6
200/250/350
Specifying management settings
9
3
Touch [Quality/Mode].
TX Settings
Enter
Quality/Mode
Comm. Menu
Memory
Free
100%
4
Select a setting, and then touch [Enter].
In the Default Quality screen, select the desired quality.
–
Select default Quality.
Utility/Counter
Default Quality
Cancel
Enter
Standard
Fine
GSR
SuperFine
Text/Photo
Super GSR
Memory
100%
Free
–
In the Default Density screen, select the desired density by touch-
ing [Light] or [Dark].
Select default Density.
Utility/Counter
Default Density
Cancel
Enter
Light
Std.
Dark
Memory
Free
100%
200/250/350
9-7
Specifying management settings
9
–
In the Com.Mode screen, select the desired communication mode.
Select default Communication Mode.
Utility/Counter
Com.Mode
Cancel
Enter
InternetFAX
PC
FAX
E-Mail
Memory
Free
100%
5
Touch [Enter].
Quality/Mode
Enter
Fine
Default Quality
Default Density
E-Mail
Communication Mode
Memory
Free
100%
6
Touch [Enter] until the initial screen appears.
9-8
200/250/350
Specifying management settings
Specifying Comm. Menu settings
9
1
2
Enter Administrator mode, and then touch [Admin. 1].
Touch [TX Settings].
Utility/Counter
Administrator Management 1
Enter
Initial
Admin.Set
Setting
Account/
User Auth.
TX Settings
Print Lists
RX Settings
Report
Settings
Document
Management
Memory
Free
100%
3
Touch [Comm. Menu].
TX Settings
Enter
Quality/Mode
Comm. Menu
Memory
Free
100%
200/250/350
9-9
Specifying management settings
Select a setting, and then touch [Enter].
9
4
–
In the TX Time Information screen, select the print position of the
transmission source.
Select TSI print position.
Utility/Counter
TX Time Information
Cancel
Enter
Inside Body
Text
Outside
Body Text
OFF
Memory
Free
100%
–
In the TSI Selection screen, select the transmission source name to
be printed.
Select TSI.
Utility/Counter
TSI Selection
Cancel
Enter
1
2
3
4
Tokyo
Tokyo,JPN,[email protected]
1
2
Memory
Free
100%
–
In the Rotation TX screen, select whether to enable rotation trans-
mission.
TX Rotaion setting can be set.
Utility/Counter
Rotation TX
Cancel
Enter
ON
OFF
Memory
Free
100%
9-10
200/250/350
Specifying management settings
9
–
In the 2-Sided TX screen, select whether to enable duplex transmis-
sion. If “ON” is selected, specify the binding position.
Select the desired bind direction for
double-sided TX.
Utility/Counter
2-Sided TX
Cancel
Enter
2-Sided TX
ON
OFF
Original Bind Direction
Left Bind
Top Bind
Auto
Memory
Free
100%
5
Touch [Enter].
Communication Menu
Enter
TSI
Rotation TX
2-Sided TX
ON
Memory
Free
100%
6
Touch [Enter] until the initial screen appears.
200/250/350
9-11
Specifying management settings
9
9.4
Specifying the print timing for received documents
(RX Settings)
The time and day of the week to print an Internet fax that was received can
be specified when the Off mode has been specified (setting that does not
print right after the fax is received).
By regulating the time when printing is performed, Internet faxes transmitted
late at night can be safely received.
Settings can be specified for the following.
Item
Description
Memory Lock Time
Specify whether or not received Internet faxes are printed at a
specified time instead of being printed immediately.
Specify whether to collect all received Internet faxes during the
specified time period on the specified days, and print them to-
gether. Specify the days, starting time and ending time.
Memory Lock Password
Specify the four-digit password used to print Internet faxes re-
ceived outside of the specified time period.
!
Detail
For details on entering a password to print received Internet faxes, refer
to “To print manually” on page 9-16.
Memory Lock Time
1
2
Enter Administrator mode, and then touch [Admin. 1].
Touch [RX Settings].
Utility/Counter
Administrator Management 1
Enter
Initial
Admin.Set
Setting
Account/
User Auth.
TX Settings
Print Lists
RX Settings
Report
Settings
Document
Management
Memory
Free
100%
9-12
200/250/350
Specifying management settings
Touch [Memory RX Time Setting].
9
3
4
5
RX Settings
Enter
Memory RX
Time Setting
Memory
Free
100%
Touch [Memory Lock Time].
Memory Lock Time
Utility/Counter
Memory Lock Timer Switch
Enter
Memory Lock Time
Disable
Memory Lock Password
Memory
Free
100%
Specify the settings, and then touch [Enter].
If no settings are to be specified, touch [OFF].
–
Memory Lock RX Settings.
Utility/Counter
Timer TX Setting
OFF
Enter
Stop Time 00:00
Start Time 00:00
SUN
THU
MON
FRI
TUE
SAT
WED
Day:
Memory
Free
100%
6
Touch [Enter] until the initial screen appears.
200/250/350
9-13
Specifying management settings
To specify the Memory Lock Password setting
9
1
2
Log on to the administrator mode, and then touch [Admin. 1].
Touch [RX Settings].
Utility/Counter
Administrator Management 1
Enter
Initial
Admin.Set
Setting
Account/
User Auth.
TX Settings
Print Lists
RX Settings
Report
Settings
Document
Management
Memory
Free
100%
3
Touch [Memory RX Time Setting].
RX Settings
Enter
Memory RX
Time Setting
Memory
Free
100%
4
Touch [Memory Lock Password].
Memory Lock Time
Utility/Counter
Memory Lock Timer Switch
Enter
Memory Lock Time
Disable
Memory Lock Password
Memory
Free
100%
9-14
200/250/350
Specifying management settings
9
5
Touch [New Password], type in the password, and then touch [Enter].
–
–
Type in a four-digit password using the keypad.
To erase the entered text, press the [C] (clear) key.
Change password.
Utility/Counter
Change Password
Cancel
Enter
New Password
Confirm New Password
Memory
Free
100%
6
Touch [Confirm New Password], type in the password again, and then
touch [Enter].
Change password.
Utility/Counter
Change Password
Cancel
Enter
New Password
****
Confirm New Password
Memory
Free
100%
7
Touch [Enter] until the initial screen appears.
200/250/350
9-15
Specifying management settings
9
To print manually
Use the following procedure to print outside of the specified time.
1
2
3
Press the [Utility/Counter] key.
Touch [User Management].
Touch [Memory RX ON/OFF].
Utility/Counter
Enter
User Management
Alarm
Volume
Confirma-
tion Beep
Job Comp
plete Beep
Panel
Cleaning
Toner
Supply
Memory RX
ON/OFF
POP3 RX
Memory
Free
100%
4
If the Memory Lock Password setting was specified, type in the pass-
word using the keypad, and then touch [Enter].
Input Memory Lock RX password.
Utility/Counter
Memory Lock Password
Cancel
Enter
Memory
Free
100%
9-16
200/250/350
Specifying management settings
Select [Lock OFF], and then touch [Enter].
9
5
–
To stop printing in the middle of a print job, touch [Lock ON], and
then touch [Enter].
–
To restart a stopped print job, touch [Temporarily Print].
Select Memory Lock ON/OFF of RX Doc.
Utility/Counter
Memory Lock RX
Cancel
Enter
Temporarily
Print
Lock OFF
Lock ON
Memory
Free
100%
6
Touch [Enter] until the initial screen appears.
200/250/350
9-17
Specifying management settings
9
9.5
Specifying the transmission report printing conditions
(Report Settings)
You can specify the printing conditions for the transmission results and ac-
tivity reports.
Settings can be specified for the following.
Item
Description
TX Report
Select to print the transmission report sent to single destinations
or broadcast.
ON: Prints regardless of the transmission results.
If TX Fails: Prints only when undeliverable.
OFF: Does not print regardless of the transmission results.
Activity Report
Select whether to print the activity report automatically every 50
transmissions.
!
Detail
If “Activity Report” is set to “ON”, the activity report contents can be out-
putted as a CSV file and sent by e-mail to the administrator when the ac-
tivity report is printed. To manage the contents of the activity report as
data, specify the e-mail address of the administrator.
For details on the specifying the e-mail address of the administrator, refer
to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations].
Specifying TX Report settings
1
2
Enter Administrator mode, and then touch [Admin. 1].
Touch [Report Settings].
Utility/Counter
Administrator Management 1
Enter
Initial
Admin.Set
Setting
Account/
User Auth.
TX Settings
Print Lists
RX Settings
Report
Settings
Document
Management
Memory
Free
100%
9-18
200/250/350
Specifying management settings
9
3
4
5
Touch [TX Report].
Report Settings
Enter
TX Report
Activity Report
ON
Memory
Free
100%
Specify the settings, and then touch [Enter].
Select TX Report Setting.
Utility/Counter
TX Report
Cancel
Enter
Single Dest:
ON
If TX Fails
OFF
OFF
Broadcasting
ON
If TX Fails
Memory
Free
100%
Touch [Enter] until the initial screen appears.
200/250/350
9-19
Specifying management settings
9
Specifying the Activity Report settings
1
2
Enter Administrator mode, and then touch [Admin. 1].
Touch [Report Settings].
Utility/Counter
Administrator Management 1
Enter
Initial
Admin.Set
Setting
Account/
User Auth.
TX Settings
Print Lists
RX Settings
Report
Settings
Document
Management
Memory
Free
100%
3
4
5
Touch [Activity Report].
Report Settings
Enter
TX Report
Activity Report
ON
Memory
Free
100%
Specify the settings, and then touch [Enter].
Select Activity Report setting.
Utility/Counter
Activity Report
Cancel
Enter
ON
OFF
Memory
Free
100%
Touch [Enter] until the initial screen appears.
9-20
200/250/350
Specifying management settings
9
9.6
Forwarding a transmission document to a specified
destination (TX Forwarding)
In order to control the documents sent from this machine, you can specify to
have a sent document forwarded to a destination specified by the adminis-
trator.
!
Detail
Select the forwarding destination with a one-touch dial button. Be sure to
first register the forwarding destination with a one-touch dial button.
A document that was sent, then forwarded cannot be forwarded to the
administrator.
Specifying the forwarding destination
1
2
Enter Administrator mode, and then touch [Admin. 1].
Touch [Document Management].
Utility/Counter
Administrator Management 1
Enter
Initial
Admin.Set
Setting
Account/
User Auth.
TX Settings
Print Lists
RX Settings
Report
Settings
Document
Management
Memory
Free
100%
3
Touch [TX Document].
Document Management
Enter
TX Document
RX Document
Memory
Free
100%
200/250/350
9-21
Specifying management settings
9
4
Touch [TX Forwarding].
TX Document
Enter
TX Forwarding
Memory
Free
100%
5
Specify the forwarding destination, and then touch [Enter].
–
–
–
To specify the forwarding destination with a one-touch dial button,
touch [One-Touch], specify the destination, and then touch [Enter].
To search for a one-touch dial button, touch [Search], specify the
destination, and then touch [Enter].
You can select one address for the forwarding destination.
Select the forwarding destination.
TX Forwarding
One-Touch
Enter
Search
Memory
Free
100%
6
Touch [Enter] until the initial screen appears.
9-22
200/250/350
Specifying management settings
9
9.7
Specifying the processing method for received docu-
ments (Document Management)
You can specify the method for processing documents received over a net-
work.
Specifying the processing of documents received on a port
On this machine, you can specify the processing method, such as printing
and forwarding, for documents received on a port.
Settings can be specified for the following.
Item
Description
Document management
Select whether to process the documents from a selected line.
NO: Does not process the received documents.
YES: Specifies the save destination and forwarding destination
of the received documents.
RX Doc. Settings
Forwarding Dest.
When “YES” is selected in the Document Management screen,
select the processing method for the received documents.
Print: Prints the document.
Forward: Forwards the data to the specified destination.
Print and Forward: Prints the document and at the same time
forwards the data to the specified destination.
Specify when “Forward” is selected in the Setting of RX Doc.
screen.
To specify the processing method for received documents
1
2
Enter Administrator mode, and then touch [Admin. 1].
Touch [Document Management].
Utility/Counter
Administrator Management 1
Enter
Initial
Admin.Set
Setting
Account/
User Auth.
TX Settings
Print Lists
RX Settings
Report
Settings
Document
Management
Memory
Free
100%
200/250/350
9-23
Specifying management settings
9
3
4
5
Touch [RX Document].
Document Management
Enter
TX Document
RX Document
Memory
Free
100%
Touch [Port].
Enter Document Management settings.
All other documents will be treated as
general documents.
Utility/Counter
RX Document
Enter
Port
All Other
Documents
Memory
Free
100%
Touch [Network].
Document Management
Port
Enter
Port
Forward Print
1dest. ON
Memory
Network
1
1
100%
Free
9-24
200/250/350
Specifying management settings
9
6
Select whether to enable document management.
If “YES” is selected in the Document Management screen, specify
the processing method for received documents.
–
Document Management
Port
Cancel
Enter
YES
Port
NO
Network
Print & Forward
001
RX Doc. Settings
Forwarding Dest.
Memory
Free
100%
7
Specify the processing method for received documents.
–
Touch [RX Doc. Settings], select the processing method, and then
touch [Enter].
Select processing of Received Doc.
Document Management
Setting of RX Doc.
Enter
Print &
Forward
Print
Forward
Memory
Free
100%
200/250/350
9-25
Specifying management settings
9
8
Specify the forwarding destination if “Forward” is selected in the Set-
ting of RX Doc. screen.
–
–
To add a new forwarding destination, touch [Next Destination].
To view the details of the forwarding destinations, touch [Forward],
and then touch [Detail].
–
To delete a forwarding destination, touch [Forward], and then touch
[Delete].
Forwarding Destination
Port
Enter
#001
#002
#011
#012
TOKYO
user2
user3
user4
tokyo@test.
user2@test.
user3@test.
user4@test.
1
1
Dest. : 4
Next
Destination
Delete
Detail
Dest.
Memory
100%
Free
9
Touch [Enter] until the initial screen appears.
Specifying the processing of documents received on other lines
You can specify the processing method for documents received on lines oth-
er than a port.
The following settings can be specified.
Item
Description
RX Doc. Settings
When “Distribution Conditions” is set to “Specified”, select the
processing method for the received document.
Print: Prints the document.
Forward: Forwards the data to the specified destination.
Print and Forward: Prints the document and at the same time
Memory RX: Receives the memory by force.
Forwarding Dest
Specify the forwarding destination if “Forward” is selected in the
Setting of RX Doc. screen.
Touch [Next Destination], touch the button for the recipient’s
address, and then touch [Enter].
Note
If bit 7 of mode 306 is set to “1” in the Soft SW Setting screen, only “Port”
is available. For details, refer to “Specifying software switch settings (ma-
chine functions)” on page 9-29.
9-26
200/250/350
Specifying management settings
To specify the processing of received documents
9
1
2
Enter Administrator mode, and then touch [Admin. 1].
Touch [Document Management].
Utility/Counter
Administrator Management 1
Enter
Initial
Admin.Set
Setting
Account/
User Auth.
TX Settings
Print Lists
RX Settings
Report
Settings
Document
Management
Memory
Free
100%
3
Touch [RX Document].
Document Management
Enter
TX Document
RX Document
Memory
Free
100%
4
Touch [All Other Documents].
Enter Document Management settings.
All other documents will be treated as
general documents.
Utility/Counter
RX Document
Enter
Port
All Other
Documents
Memory
Free
100%
200/250/350
9-27
Specifying management settings
Specify the processing method for received documents.
9
5
–
Touch [RX Doc. Settings], select the processing method, and then
touch [Enter].
Select processing of Received Doc.
Document Management
Setting of RX Doc.
Enter
Print &
Forward
Print
Forward
Memory RX
Memory
Free
100%
6
Specify when “Forward” is selected in the Setting of RX Doc. screen.
–
–
To add a new forwarding destination, touch [Next Destination].
To view the details of the forwarding destinations, touch [Forward],
and then touch [Detail].
–
To delete a forwarding destination, touch [Forward], and then touch
[Delete].
Forwarding Destination
All Other
Documents
Enter
#001
#002
#011
#012
TOKYO
user2
user3
user4
tokyo@test.
user2@test.
user3@test.
user4@test.
1
1
Dest. : 4
Next
Destination
Delete
Detail
Dest.
Memory
100%
Free
7
Touch [Enter] until the initial screen appears.
9-28
200/250/350
Specifying management settings
9
9.8
Specifying software switch settings (machine func-
tions)
By using the software switch settings, the mode, bit, and HEX values of each
function of the machine can be changed from the factory settings to meet
your specific needs.
Reminder
Do not change any modes or bits other than those described in this man-
ual.
Note
When “Enhance Security” is set to “ON”, the software switch settings
cannot be changed.
Software switch settings
Item
Description
Mode Selection
Parameters to be specified are represented by a three-digit
number. Type in the value using the keypad.
Bit Selection
A mode status is expressed with an eight-digit number. By
specifying a binary number (1 or 0) for each of the bits 0 through
7, a setting can be specified for each parameter.
HEX Selection
The settings of each mode are expressed using hexadecimal
numbers (combinations of 0-9 and A-F). The bit selection
“00110000” equals the HEX selection “30”.
Specify mode settings either with bit or hexadecimal selections.
Examples of settings in bit selection (binary numbers) and HEX selection
(hexadecimal numbers) are shown below.
Decimal
number
Bit Selection (binary number)
HEX Selection (hexadecimal
number)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0000 0000
0000 0001
0000 0010
0000 0011
0000 0100
0000 0101
0000 0110
0000 0111
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
200/250/350
9-29
Specifying management settings
9
Decimal
number
Bit Selection (binary number)
HEX Selection (hexadecimal
number)
8
0000 1000
0000 1001
0000 1010
0000 1011
0000 1100
0000 1101
0000 1110
0000 1111
0001 0000
0001 0001
0001 0010
0001 0011
0001 0100
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
14
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
252
253
254
255
1111 1100
1111 1101
1111 1110
1111 1111
FC
FD
FE
FF
9-30
200/250/350
Specifying management settings
To specify a software switch setting
9
1
2
Enter Administrator mode, and then touch [Admin. 2].
Touch [Software SW].
Utility/Counter
Administrator Management 2
Enter
Network
Settings
Printer
Setting
Software SW
Delete Job
Security
Setting
Ping
Memory
Management
3
Touch [Mode Selection], and then type in the mode number using the
keypad.
Soft SW Setting
Enter
000
Mode Selection
Bit Selection
00110000
76543210
30
HEX Selection
A
D
B
E
C
F
Set
Memory
Free
100%
200/250/350
9-31
Specifying management settings
9
4
Specify the mode setting using either bit selection or HEX selection.
–
To specify in bit values, touch [Bit Selection], touch [←] or [→] to
move the cursor to the bit to be changed, type in the value using
the keypad, and then touch [Enter].
Soft SW Setting
Enter
000
Mode Selection
Bit Selection
00110000
76543210
30
HEX Selection
A
D
B
E
C
F
Set
–
To specify in hexadecimal values, touch [HEX Selection], specify
the value by using the keypad and touching [A]—[F], and then touch
[Enter].
Soft SW Setting
Enter
Mode Selection
Bit Selection
000
00110000
76543210
30
HEX Selection
A
D
B
C
F
E
Set
Memory
Free
100%
5
6
7
To change the settings for other modes, repeat steps 3 and 4.
Touch [Enter] until the initial screen appears.
Turn the machine off, then on again.
Reminder
When turning the machine off, then on again with the main power switch,
wait about 10 seconds to turn the machine on after turning it off.
The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after
being turned off.
9-32
200/250/350
Specifying management settings
Specifying whether or not the destination name is inserted (mode 001)
9
Select whether or not the destination name is inserted as transmission
source information.
Factory settings
Bit
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Setting
0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 (HEX: 14)
Specifying settings
The shaded cells indicate the factory settings. The page numbers on the right
side refer to the descriptions for the corresponding function.
Bit
Description
Setting Description
Page Ref-
erence
7, 6, 5,
4, 3, 2, 1
-------
000101
0
*Do not change these bits
when specifying settings for
-------
this function.
0
Specifies whether or not the
destination name is inserted.
0
1
The destination name is not -------
inserted.
The destination name is in-
serted.
200/250/350
9-33
Specifying management settings
9
Specifying settings for address input and broadcast transmissions
(mode 018)
Select whether or not recipients can be specified by directly entering their
address, and select whether or not broadcast transmissions are permitted.
Factory settings
Bit
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Settings
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 (HEX: 01)
Specifying settings
The shaded cells represent the factory settings. The page numbers on the
right refer to the descriptions of the corresponding functions.
Bit
Description
Setting
Description
Page
Reference
7, 6, 5, 4
----------
0000
*Do not change these
bits when specifying set-
tings for this function.
----------
3
Specifies whether or not a
destination can be speci-
fied by directly entering its
address.* 1
0
1
Permitted
Prohibited
----------
2
Specifies whether or not
broadcast transmissions
are permitted.
0
1
Permitted
Prohibited
----------
----------
1, 0
----------
01
*Do not change these
bits when specifying set-
tings for this function.
*1
Prohibited when bit 6 of software switch setting mode 477 is set so that
the settings can only be specified in Administrator mode
9-34
200/250/350
Specifying management settings
Specifying settings for the image in the results report (Mode 023)
9
Specify whether or not an image of the transmitted document is added to the
results report.
Factory settings
Bit
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Setting
1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 (HEX: F8)
Specifying settings
The shaded cells represent the factory settings. The page numbers on the
right refer to the descriptions of the corresponding functions.
Bit
Description
Setting
Description
Page Refer-
ence
7, 6, 5, 4
----------------------- 1111
*Do not change these bits ----------
when specifying settings
for this function.
3
Specifies whether or
not an image of the
transmitted docu-
ment is added to the
results report.
0
1
Is not added
Is added
----------
2, 1, 0
----------------------- 000
*Do not change these bits ----------
when specifying settings
for this function.
200/250/350
9-35
Specifying management settings
Specifying administrator forwarding settings (mode 198)
9
You can specify whether a received document is forwarded to a destination
specified by the administrator.
Factory settings
Bit
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Setting
1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 (HEX: D0)
Specifying settings
The shaded cells represent the factory settings. The page numbers on the
right refer to the descriptions of the corresponding functions.
Bit
Description
Setting Description
Page Ref-
erence
7
Specifies whether a received
document is forwarded to a
destination specified by the
administrator.
0
1
Not forwarded
Forwarded
page 9-21
6
Specifies whether to enable
TX Forwarding when scan-
ning.(*)
0
1
Not forwarded
Forwarded
---------
---------
5, 4
Specifies the print condi-
tions of transmission reports
for TX Forwarding.(*)
00
01
10
11
Not output
Undeliverable
Always prints
*Do not specify these set-
tings.
3, 2, 1, 0 -----------------------------
0000
*Do not change these bits
when specifying settings for
this function.
---------
(*) Bit 7 of mode 198 is enabled only when “1 (transmit)” is specified.
9-36
200/250/350
Specifying management settings
Blocking calls from callers that are not specified (mode 306)
9
This mode can be set if the optional fax kit is installed. Specify whether or not
only faxes (G3) received from callers with a specified F-code (bulletin board/
confidential/forwarding) can be received and all other faxes (G3) are blocked.
Factory settings
Bit
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Setting
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEX: 00)
Specifying settings
The shaded cells indicate the settings selected during production.
Bit
Description
Setting
Description
Page
Refer-
ence
7
Specifies whether or not to
block calls from callers that
are not specified.
0
1
Does not block
Blocks
---------
6, 5, 4, 3, -----------------------------
2, 1, 0
0000000
*Do not change these bits
when specifying settings for
this function.
---------
Note
If bit 7 is set to “1”, a setting for “All Other Documents” (displayed by
touching [Admin. 1], then [RX Document]) cannot be specified.
200/250/350
9-37
Specifying management settings
Specifying Internet fax settings (mode 350)
9
You can specify the Internet fax capabilities of the destination machine and
POP3 settings.
Factory settings
Bit
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Setting
1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 (HEX: A8)
Specifying settings
The shaded cells represent the factory settings. The page numbers on the
right refer to the descriptions of the corresponding functions.
Bit
7
Description
Setting
Description
Page
Refer-
ence
----------------------------
1
*Do not change this bit when ---------
specifying settings for this
function.
6
Specifies whether to enable
a confirmation (POP3) be-
fore arriving to SMTP.
0
1
Arrival not confirmed
Arrival confirmed
---------
5, 4, 3, 2, ----------------------------
1, 0
101000
*Do not change these bits
when specifying settings for
this function.
---------
9-38
200/250/350
Specifying management settings
Specifying whether to add the transmission source information when
9
faxing or when forwarding received documents (mode 352)
You can specify how the transmission source information is added when fax-
ing directly and when forwarding received documents.
Factory settings
Bit
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Setting
1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 (HEX: D0)
Specifying settings
The shaded cells represent the factory settings. The page numbers on the
right refer to the descriptions of the corresponding functions.
Bit
7
Description
Status
Description
Page
Refer-
ence
-----------------------------
1
*Do not change this bit when ---------
specifying settings for this
function.
6
Specifies how transmission
source information is added
to direct faxes.
0
1
Outside of the document
Inside the document
---------
5
Specifies whether transmis-
sion source information is
added when forwarding re-
ceived documents.
0
1
Not added
Added
page 9-4
4
Specifies how transmission
source information is added
when forwarding received
documents.
0
1
Outside body text
Inside body text
---------
---------
3, 2, 1, 0 -----------------------------
0000
*Do not change these bits
when specifying settings for
this function.
200/250/350
9-39
Specifying management settings
Specifying SMTP transmission timeout settings (mode 356)
9
You can specify the time until a timeout of the SMTP server connection oc-
curs when sending e-mail messages.
Factory settings
Bit
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Setting
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEX: 40)
Specifying settings
The shaded cells represent the factory settings. The page numbers on the
right refer to the descriptions of the corresponding functions.
Bit
Description
Setting
Description
Page
Refer-
ence
7, 6, 5, 4 Specifies the time until a
timeout of the SMTP server
connection occurs when
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
Other
30 seconds
60 seconds
90 seconds
120 seconds
150 seconds
180 seconds
210 seconds
240 seconds
270 seconds
300 seconds
---------
sending e-mail messages.(*)
*Do not specify other set-
tings than the above.
3, 2, 1, 0 -----------------------------
0000
*Do not change these bits
when specifying settings for
this function.
---------
(*)
After changing the settings, the machine must be turned off, then on again.
Reminder
When turning the machine off, then on again with the main power switch,
wait about 10 seconds to turn the machine on after turning it off.
The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after
being turned off.
9-40
200/250/350
Specifying management settings
Specifying SMTP reception timeout settings (mode 357)
9
You can specify the time until a timeout of the SMTP server connection oc-
curs when receiving e-mail messages.
Factory settings
Bit
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Setting
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEX: 40)
Specifying settings
The shaded cells represent the factory settings. The page numbers on the
right refer to the descriptions of the corresponding functions.
Bit
Description
Setting
Description
Page
Refer-
ence
7, 6, 5, 4 Specifies the time until a
timeout of the SMTP server
connection occurs when
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
Other
30 seconds
60 seconds
90 seconds
120 seconds
150 seconds
180 seconds
210 seconds
240 seconds
270 seconds
300 seconds
---------
sending e-mail messages.(*)
*Do not specify other set-
tings than the above.
3, 2, 1, 0 -----------------------------
0000
*Do not change these bits
when specifying settings for
this function.
---------
(*)
After changing the settings, the machine must be turned off, then on again.
Reminder
When turning the machine off, then on again with the main power switch,
wait about 10 seconds to turn the machine on after turning it off.
The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after
being turned off.
200/250/350
9-41
Specifying management settings
Specifying POP3 reception timeout settings (mode 358)
9
You can specify the time until a timeout of the SMTP server connection oc-
curs when receiving e-mail messages.
Factory settings
Bit
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Setting
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 (HEX: 20)
Specifying settings
The shaded cells represent the factory settings. The page numbers on the
right refer to the descriptions of the corresponding functions.
Bit
Description
Setting
Description
Page
Refer-
ence
7, 6, 5, 4 Specifies the time until a
timeout of the SMTP server
connection occurs when
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
Other
30 seconds
60 seconds
90 seconds
120 seconds
150 seconds
180 seconds
210 seconds
240 seconds
270 seconds
300 seconds
---------
sending e-mail messages.(*)
*Do not specify other set-
tings than the above.
3, 2, 1, 0 -----------------------------
0000
*Do not change these bits
when specifying settings for
this function.
---------
(*)
After changing the settings, the machine must be turned off, then on again.
Reminder
When turning the machine off, then on again with the main power switch,
wait about 10 seconds to turn the machine on after turning it off.
The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after
being turned off.
9-42
200/250/350
Specifying management settings
Specifying the default address input screen (mode 366)
9
Specify the settings concerning the default address input screen for the Scan
to FTP and Scan to SMB operations.
Settings at time of purchase
Bit
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Setting
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 (HEX: 08)
Specifying settings
The shaded cells represent the factory settings.
Bit
7
Description
Setting
Description
Page
Refer-
ence
-----------------------------
0
*Do not change this bit when ---------
specifying settings for this
function.
6
Specifies the default screen
that is displayed when regis-
tering a one-touch dial but-
ton with the Scan to FTP and
Scan to SMB operations.
0
1
Gives priority to IP address
input
---------
---------
Gives priority to host name
input
5, 4, 3, 2, -----------------------------
1, 0
001000
*Do not change these bits
when specifying settings for
this function.
200/250/350
9-43
Specifying management settings
Specifying DNS query timeout setting (mode 367)
9
You can specify the time until a timeout of the DNS server connection oc-
curs.
Factory settings
Bit
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Setting
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 (HEX: 20)
Specifying settings
The shaded cells represent the factory settings. The page numbers on the
right refer to the descriptions of the corresponding functions.
Bit
Description
Setting
Description
Page
Refer-
ence
7, 6, 5, 4, Specifies the time until a
00001
00010
00011
00100
10101
00110
Other
20 seconds
40 seconds
80 seconds
160 seconds
320 seconds
640 seconds
---------
3
timeout of the DNS server
connection occurs.
*Do not specify other set-
tings than the above.
2, 1, 0
-----------------------------
000
*Do not change these bits
when specifying settings for
this function.
---------
9-44
200/250/350
Specifying management settings
Including the scan transmission log in the activity report (mode 368)
9
Specify whether or not the transmission log is included in the activity report.
Factory settings
Bit
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Setting
1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 (HEX: C2)
Specifying settings
The shaded cells represent the factory settings. The page numbers on the
right refer to the descriptions for the corresponding functions.
Bit
Description
Setting
Description
Page
Refer-
ence
7, 6, 5, 4, ----------
3, 2
110000
*Do not change these bits
when specifying settings for
this function.
----------
1
Specifies whether or not the
0
1
Not included
Included
----------
log is included in the activity
report during scan transmis-
sions.
0
----------
0
*Do not change this bit when ----------
specifying settings for this
function.
200/250/350
9-45
Specifying management settings
Specifying switching of the SMTP server (mode 371)
9
Two SMTP servers can be registered for Scan to E-Mail and Internet fax op-
erations. The SMTP server will be switched when a transmission error oc-
curs.
Factory settings
Bit
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Setting
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEX: 40)
Specifying settings
The shaded cells indicate the factory settings. The page numbers on the right
side refer to the descriptions for the corresponding function.
Bit
Description
Setting
Description
Page Ref-
erence
7, 6, 5
-------
010
*Do not change these bits
when specifying settings for
this function.
-------
4
Specifies operation of
the SMTP server.
0
The SMTP server is not
switched when an error oc-
curs.
page 2-20,
page 8-69
1
The SMTP server is
switched when an error oc-
curs.
3, 2, 1, 0 -------
0000
*Do not change these bits
when specifying settings for
this function.
-------
9-46
200/250/350
Specifying management settings
9
Specifying the transmission interval when e-mail messages are sepa-
rated (mode 372)
You can specify the transmission interval when e-mail messages are sepa-
rated.
Factory settings
Bit
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Setting
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 (HEX: 0F)
Specifying settings
The shaded cells represent the factory settings. The page numbers on the
right refer to the descriptions of the corresponding functions.
Bit
Description
Setting
Description
Page Ref-
erence
7, 6, 5, 4, Specifies the transmis-
3, 2, 1, 0 sion interval when email
messages are separat-
ed.(*)
00000101
00001010
00001111
00011110
00111100
01011010
01111000
10010110
10110100
11010010
11110000
00000000
5 seconds
page 2-36
10 seconds
15 seconds
30 seconds
60 seconds
90 seconds
120 seconds
150 seconds
180 seconds
210 seconds
240 seconds
*Do not specify this status.
(*)
Settings between “0000 0001 (HEX: 01) 1 second” and “1111 1111 (HEX:
FF) 255 seconds” can be specified. When specifying the value, refer to the
HEX selection table.
200/250/350
9-47
Specifying management settings
9
Specifying the Internet fax full mode function settings (mode 373)
You can specify the Internet fax full mode function settings.
Factory settings
Bit
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Setting
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 (HEX: 08)
Specifying settings
The shaded cells represent the factory settings. The page numbers on the
right refer to the descriptions of the corresponding functions.
Bit
Description
Setting
Description
Page
Refer-
ence
7
Specifies whether to enable
the full mode function.
0
1
No
page 1-7
Yes
6, 5, 4, 3, -----------------------------
2, 1, 0
0001000 *Do not change these bits
when specifying settings for
this function.
---------
Specifying e-mail security functions (mode 380)
You can specify security functions when receiving and sending e-mail mes-
sages.
Factory settings
Bit
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Setting
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEX: 00)
Specifying settings
The shaded cells represent the factory settings. The page numbers on the
right refer to the descriptions of the corresponding functions.
Bit
Description
Status
Description
Page Ref-
erence
7
Specifies whether to enable
the e-mail reception authen-
tication (APOP authentica-
tion) function.
0
1
No
---------
Yes
6
Specifies whether to enable
the e-mail transmission au-
thentication (SMTP authenti-
cation) function.(*1)
0
1
No
page 2-20
page 2-26
Yes
9-48
200/250/350
Specifying management settings
9
Bit
Description
Status
Description
Page Ref-
erence
5
Specifies whether to prohibit
the e-mail transmission au-
thentication (CRAM-MD5
authentication) function.(*2)
0
1
Not prohibited
Prohibited
---------
4
3
2
Specifies whether to prohibit
the e-mail transmission au-
thentication (LOGIN authen-
tication) function.(*2)
0
1
Not prohibited
Prohibited
page 2-20
page 2-26
Specifies whether to prohibit
the e-mail transmission au-
thentication (PLAIN authen-
tication) function.(*2)
0
1
Not prohibited
Prohibited
---------
---------
Specifies whether to enable
sharing of the SMTP authen-
tication ID & password with
the POP3 user name & pass-
word.
0
1
ID and password shared
ID and password not shared
1, 0
-----------------------------
00
*Do not change these bits
when specifying settings for
this function.
---------
(*1)
The SMTP authentication function is enabled when all of the conditions
described below have been met.
-
-
Bit 6 of mode 380 is set to “1”.
The SMTP authentication user name & password and the POP3 user
name & password are being shared, and bit 2 of mode 380 is set to “0”.
The SMTP authentication user name and & password and the POP3 user
name & password are not being shared, bit 2 of mode 380 is set to “1”,
and “SMTP Authentication User Name” and “SMTP Authentication User
Password” are specified in the Network Settings screen.
Either bit 5, 4, or 3 of mode 380 is set to “0”.
-
-
(*2)
When all of the authentication functions are enabled (bits 5, 4, and 3 are
set to “0”), the priority is given in the order of “CRAM-MD5 authentication (bit
5)”, “LOGIN authentication (bit 4)”, and “PLAIN authentication (bit 3)”.
200/250/350
9-49
Specifying management settings
9
Specifying use of registered user authentication information to log on to
the LDAP server (mode 466)
Specify whether or not user names and passwords registered with user au-
thentication are used to log on to the LDAP server.
Factory settings
Bit
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Setting
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEX: 00)
Specifying settings
The shaded cells indicate the settings selected during production.
Bit
Description
Setting
Description
Page
Refer-
ence
7
Specifies whether or not the
user name/password used
for external server authenti-
cation is used to log on to
the LDAP server.
0
1
Not used for logon
Used for logon
---------
6, 5, 4, 3, -----------------------------
2, 1, 0
0000000 *Do not change these bits
this function.
---------
!
Detail
The information for the LDAP server to be connected to must be regis-
tered in order to use the LDAP server. In addition, when LDAP and user
authentication are synchronized, select “Active Directory” as the user au-
thentication method. Select “GSS-SPNEGO” as the LDAP authentication
method. For details on the user authentication method, refer to the User’s
Guide [Copy Operations]. For details on the LDAP authentication meth-
od, refer to “LDAP Setting” on page 2-44 or “LDAP (Administrator mode)”
on page 8-64.
9-50
200/250/350
Specifying management settings
9
Specifying whether to enable access locks, and whether to enable the
password rules (mode 469)
Specify whether to lock access if the password is entered incorrectly, and
specify whether to apply the password rules.
Factory settings
Bit
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Setting
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEX: 00)
Specifying settings
The shaded cells represent the factory settings. The page numbers on the
right refer to the descriptions of the corresponding functions.
Bit
Description
Setting
Description
Page
Refer-
ence
7
Specify whether to
lock access when a
password (account
track and administra-
tor passwords) is en-
tered incorrectlythree
times.
0
1
Does not lock access
Locks access
----------
6, 5
4
---------------------
00
0
* Do not change these bits
when specifying settings
for this function.
----------
----------
For security, specify
whether to apply a
password rule.
Do not apply a password
rule
1
Apply a password rule
3, 2, 1, 0
---------------------
0000
* Do not change these bits
when specifying settings
for this function.
----------
Note
For the Access Lock function, refer to User’s Guide [Copy Operations].
If applying a password rule, the conditions that are required in the pass-
word are described below.
8 alphanumeric characters (only 8 alphanumeric character for the admin-
istrator password, and 8 alphanumeric characters or more for the user
authentication user password)
Only passwords with the same characters are not allowed.
200/250/350
9-51
Specifying management settings
9
Passwords that do not meet the password rule are not accepted. For the
password rules, refer to User’s Guide [Copy Operations].
Specifying the export file format (mode 470)
You can specify the file format and default value when exporting registered
information for one-touch dialing.
Factory settings
Bit
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Setting
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEX: 00)
Specifying settings
The shaded cells represent the factory settings. The page numbers on the
right refer to the descriptions of the corresponding functions.
Bit
Description
Setting
Description
Page Ref-
erence
7
Export file format
0
TXT format
CSV format
Mode 1
page 8-37
1
6
Default value of export file
type
0
1
Mode 2
5, 4, 3, 2, -----------------------------
1, 0
000000
*Do not change these bits
when specifying settings for
this function.
---------
9-52
200/250/350
Specifying management settings
Specifying settings to limit the use of communication modes-1 (mode
9
475)
Specify whether to permit or prohibit the use of individual communication
modes. Prohibited communication modes do not appear in their selection
screens.
Note
Programmed one-touch dial buttons can be used for transmission even
if a prohibited communication mode has been specified.
If all communication modes are prohibited (modes 475 to 477), some
screens, such as those for specifying transmission settings, may not nor-
mally be displayed.
Factory settings
Bit
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Setting
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEX: 00)
Specifying settings
The shaded cells represent the factory settings. The page numbers on the
right refer to the descriptions of the corresponding functions.
Bit
Description
Setting
Description
Page Refer-
ence
7
Specifies whether or
not the use of TCP/
IP is prohibited.
0
1
Permitted
Prohibited
----------
----------
----------
6
5
Specifies whether or
not the use of LPD is
prohibited.
0
1
Permitted
Prohibited
Specifies whether or
not the use of a
RAW port is prohib-
ited.
0
1
Permitted
Prohibited
4
3
Specifies whether or
not the use of SLP is
prohibited.
0
1
Permitted
Prohibited
----------
----------
Specifies whether or
not the use of a
Scan to FTP is pro-
hibited.
0
1
Permitted
Prohibited
2
Specifies whether or
not the use of an
FTP server is pro-
hibited.
0
1
Permitted
Prohibited
----------
200/250/350
9-53
Specifying management settings
9
Bit
Description
Setting
Description
Page Refer-
ence
1
Specifies whether or
not the use of SNMP
is prohibited.
0
1
Permitted
Prohibited
----------
0
-----------------------
0
*Do not change this bit
when specifying settings
for this function.
----------
Specifying settings to limit the use of communication modes-2 (mode
476)
Specify whether to permit or prohibit the use of individual communication
modes. Prohibited communication modes do not appear in their selection
screens.
Note
Programmed one-touch dial buttons can be used for transmission even
if a prohibited communication mode has been specified.
If all communication modes are prohibited (modes 475 to 477), some
screens, such as those for specifying transmission settings, may not nor-
mally be displayed.
Factory settings
Bit
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Setting
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEX: 00)
Specifying settings
The shaded cells represent the factory settings. The page numbers on the
right refer to the descriptions of the corresponding functions.
Bit
Description
Setting
Description
Page Refer-
ence
7
Specifies whether or
not the use of the
Scan to SMB opera-
tion is prohibited.
0
1
Permitted
Prohibited
----------
----------
----------
6
5
Specifies whether or
not the use of SMB
printing is prohibit-
ed.
0
1
Permitted
Prohibited
Specifies whether or
not the use of G3
faxing is prohibited.
0
1
Permitted
Prohibited
9-54
200/250/350
Specifying management settings
9
Bit
Description
Setting
Description
Page Refer-
ence
4
Specifies whether or
not the use of the
Scan to HDD opera-
tion is prohibited.
0
1
Permitted
Prohibited
----------
----------
----------
3
2
Specifies whether or
not the use of the
Scan to E-Mail oper-
ation is prohibited.
0
1
Permitted
Prohibited
Specifies whether or
not the use of the In-
ternet fax operation
is prohibited.
0
1
Permitted
Prohibited
1
0
Specifies whether or
not the use of IP re-
lay is prohibited.
0
1
Permitted
Prohibited
----------
----------
Specifies whether or
not the use of IP ad-
dress fax operation
is prohibited.
0
1
Permitted
Prohibited
Note
Bits 7 and 0 cannot be changed on the model for Europe.
200/250/350
9-55
Specifying management settings
9
Specifying settings to limit the use of communication modes-3/Specify-
ing restrictions for registering fax addresses and printing reports and
specifying how one-touch dial recipients are displayed (mode 477)
Specify whether to permit or prohibit the use of individual communication
modes. Prohibited communication modes do not appear in their selection
screens.
Specify whether or not fax addresses can be registered and reports can be
printed by users, and specify whether or not one-touch dial information is
displayed in screens and reports.
Note
Programmed one-touch dial buttons can be used for transmission even
if a prohibited communication mode has been specified.
If all communication modes are prohibited (modes 475 to 477), some
screens, such as those for specifying transmission settings, may not nor-
mally be displayed.
Factory settings
Bit
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Setting
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEX: 00)
Specifying settings
The shaded cells represent the factory settings. The page numbers on the
right refer to the descriptions of the corresponding functions.
Bit
Description
Setting
Description
Page Refer-
ence
7
Specifies whether or
not the use of the
computer (scanner)
is prohibited.
0
1
Permitted
Prohibited
----------
6
Specifies whether
settings for register-
ing mail addresses
or printing reports
can be specified by
only the administra-
tor or also by the us-
er.
0
1
Settings can also be
specified by users.
page 9-18
Settings can only be
specified in Administrator
mode.
9-56
200/250/350
Specifying management settings
9
Bit
Description
Setting
Description
Page Refer-
ence
5
Specifies whether or
not only recipient
namesaredisplayed
(and the fax number
or address is not
0
1
Displayed
----------
Not displayed
displayed) in reports
and Job List screens
and when a one-
touch dial button is
touched. *1, *2
4
-----------------------
0
*Do not change this bit
when specifying settings
for this function.
----------
----------
3
Specifies whether or
not the use of TCP-
Socket is prohibited.
0
1
Permitted
Prohibited
2, 1, 0
----------------------- 000
*Do not change these bits ----------
when specifying settings
for this function.
*1 If bit 6 is set to “1”, the settings will not be applied if bit 5 is set to “1” (not
displayed). If you do not wish to display the fax number or address of the re-
cipient, bit 6 must also be set to “1” (settings can only be specified in Admin-
istrator mode).
*2 If the recipient is directly specified from the Direct Input tab, the recipient
is displayed, even if “1” (not displayed) is selected.
200/250/350
9-57
Specifying management settings
9
Specifying the deleting method for [Del.] in input screens (mode 478)
Specify the deleting method for [Del.] in input screens.
Select whether the character at cursor’s position or the character to the left
of the cursor is deleted.
Factory settings
Bit
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Setting (North 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEX: 80)
American
model)
Setting (Oth-
er model)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEX: 00)
Specifying settings
The shaded cells represent the factory settings. The page numbers on the
right refer to the descriptions of the corresponding functions.
Bit
Description
Setting
Description
Page Refer-
ence
7
Specify the deleting
method for [Del.] in
input screens.
0
1
Deletes the character at
the cursor’s position
page 12-4
Deletes the character to
the left of the cursor
6, 5, 4, 3, 2, ----------------------- 0000000
1, 0
*Do not change these bits ----------
when specifying settings
for this function.
Note
North American model default setting: 1
Other model default setting: 0
Specifying settings for limiting user authentication to only Scan func-
tions (mode 479)
Specify whether or not user authentication is performed only when the [Fax/
Scan] or [Extra Scan] key is pressed.
Factory settings
Bit
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Setting
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEX: 00)
9-58
200/250/350
Specifying management settings
Specifying the setting
9
The shaded cells represent the factory settings. The page numbers on the
right refer to the descriptions of the corresponding functions.
Bit
Description
Setting
Description
Page Refer-
ence
7, 6, 5
----------------------
000
*Do not change these bits ----------
when specifying settings
for this function.
4, 3, 2, 1, 0 Specifies whether or 11001
not to limit authenti-
Limited
----------
00000
Not limited
cation on Fax and
Scan functions.
Reminder
Do not specify settings for mode 479 other than those described in
“Specifying the setting”.
!
Detail
If user authentication is limited to Scan functions, touch [Account/User
Auth.] in the Administrator Management 1 screen, and then select “Exter-
nal Server” as the user authentication method. For details on the external
server authentication settings, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Opera-
tions].
200/250/350
9-59
Specifying management settings
9
9.9
Specifying SSL/TLS settings
The SSL/TLS settings should be specified. When SSL/TLS is enabled, the
communication between the machine and the client PC is encrypted to pre-
vent leakage of information such as passwords.
Acquire SSL/TLS certificates in PageScope Web Connection. For details, re-
fer to “SSL/TLS (Administrator mode)” on page 8-81.
To specify SSL/TLS settings
1
2
Enter Administrator mode, and then touch [Admin. 2].
Touch [Security Setting].
Utility/Counter
Administrator Management 2
Enter
Network
Settings
Printer
Setting
Software SW
Delete Job
Security
Setting
Ping
Memory
Management
3
Touch [SSL/TLS].
Security
Settings
Enter
Enhance
Security
Unlock
SSL/TLS
4
Specify whether to use SSL/TLS, and then touch [Enter].
9-60
200/250/350
Specifying management settings
9
–
If “Enhance Security” is set to “ON”, “SSL/TLS” cannot be set to
“OFF”.
Select ON to activate SSL/TLS for
TX/RX.
Utility/Counter
SSL/TLS
ON
Cancel
Enter
OFF
Memory
Free
100%
5
Touch [Enter] until the Initial screen appears.
200/250/350
9-61
Specifying management settings
9
9-62
200/250/350
10 Reports and lists
Reports and lists
10
10 Reports and lists
10.1 Checking the transmission conditions (TX Report)
The transmission report (TX Report) shows the document number, start date
and time of the transmission, duration of the transmission, destination,
mode, number of pages transmitted, transmission results, and transmission
volume. According to the factory setting, the machine is set to automatically
print a report after every 50 transmissions. The method for manually printing
a report is described below.
!
Detail
To change the report-related settings, refer to User’s Guide [Copy Oper-
ations].
Note
If bit 6 of mode 477 is set to “1” in the Software Switch Setting screen,
reports can be printed with “Print Lists” in the Administrator Management
1 screen. For details, refer to “Specifying software switch settings (ma-
chine functions)” on page 9-29.
To print a transmission report
1
Press the [Utility/Counter] key.
Utility/
Counter
2
Touch [Reports].
10-2
200/250/350
Reports and lists
Touch [TX Report].
10
3
The transmission report is printed.
Utility/Counter
Print List
Enter
TX Report
RX Report
Mail Program List
One-Touch List
Contents of the report
1
2
P.1
TX REPORT
(TUE) MAR 23 2006 15:00
TOKYO
(*1)
DOCUMENT# TX START DATE DURATION DESTINATION
MODE
PC-M
Email
SMB
PAGES
RESULT
User/Account
user01
SIZE
7214316-763
7214316-764
7214316-765
7214316-766
7214316-767
7214316-768
MAR22 20:36
MAR22 21:00
MAR23 9:18
MAR23 9:55
MAR23 10:03
MAR23 14:00
Tokyo2
PC
2
1
1
2
2
1
EA1004
OK
0
1
1
2
2
1
user01
OK
user02
Osaka
FTP
OK
user01
[email protected] Email
OK
user01
BOX01
HDD
OK
user03
3
4
5
6
7
No.
Item
Description
1
Transmission source informa- Shows the name and number of the transmission
tion (TSI)
source.
2
Report output date and time
Shows the date and time that the report was printed.
200/250/350
10-3
Reports and lists
10
No.
Item
Description
3
Mode
Shows the transmission mode used. The following
may appear.
PC e-mail: PC-M
FTP: FTP
SMB: SMB
Internet fax: Email
Scan to HDD: HDD
IP-TX: IP address faxing
PC(SCANNER): Scan to PC
IP-RELAY: IP relay
Note
“HDD” appears if the optional hard disk
drive is installed.
“IP-TX”, “PC(SCANNER)”, and “IP-RE-
LAY” appear if the optional scanner unit is
installed.
4
Transmission function
Shows the symbol of the transmission function used.
I: Individual login
F: Forwarding
S: Transmission to secondary address
Blank: Other transmission
5
6
Pages
Result
transmitted.
Shows the transmission result. Any of the following
may appear.
OK: The transmission was completed successfully.
INTERR: The transmission was interrupted.
F. MEM: The memory capacity was exceeded.
NG: The transmission failed.
PT. DEL: The transmission to some destinations
failed.
F.DATA: The size of the data exceeds the allowable
limit.
IMG NG: The transmission resolution was incorrect so
the transmission was ended.
Error code: For details, refer to “Network error list” on
page 11-3.
7
User/Account
Shows the user name or account name that was au-
thenticated.
*1: When e-mail messages are transmitted separately by the separation set-
ting, only the actual time of the e-mail message transmission is displayed in
the “Duration” column. The control time for separating e-mail messages is
not included.
When e-mail messages are separated, the duration between the beginning
and end of the transmission and the duration time displayed in the report
may vary.
10-4
200/250/350
Reports and lists
10
10.2 Checking the reception conditions (RX Report)
The reception activity report (RX Report) shows the document number, start
date and time of the reception, duration of the reception, destination, mode,
number of pages received, and the transmission results.
Printing a reception activity report
1
Press the [Utility/Counter] key.
Utility/
Counter
2
3
Touch [Reports].
Touch [RX Report].
The reception activity report is printed.
Utility/Counter
Print List
Enter
TX Report
RX Report
Mail Program List
One-Touch List
200/250/350
10-5
Reports and lists
10
Contents of the report
1
2
P.1
RX REPORT
(TUE) MAR 29 2006 16:09
TOKYO
DOCUMENT# RX START DATE
3714316-753 MAR22 20:32
3502268-511 MAR22 21:00
3714316-753 MAR23 9:18
3714316-756 MAR23 9:55
6080361-236 MAR23 10:03
5114316-768 MAR23 14:00
DURAION DESTINATION
MODE
PAGES
RESULT
OK
User/Account
user01
49 [email protected] Email
2
1
1
2
2
1
26 192.168.1.30
48 192.168.1.40
Email
IP-RX
IP-RX
OK
OK
OK
50 [email protected] Email
OK
Email
OK
3
4
5
6
7
No.
Item
Description
1
TSI
Shows the name and address of the transmission
source.
2
3
Report output date and time
Mode
Shows the date and time that the report was printed.
Shows the mode used for transmission. The following
may appear.
Internet fax: Email
IP-RX: IP address faxing
Note
“IP-RX” appears if the optional scanner
unit is installed.
4
Reception functions
Shows the symbol of the transmission function used.
I: Individual login
F: Forwarding
Blank: Other transmission
5
6
Pages
Result
Shows the number of pages printed.
Shows the transmission result. Any of the following
may appear.
OK: The transmission was completed successfully.
INTERR: The transmission was interrupted.
F. MEM: The memory capacity was exceeded.
NG: The transmission failed.
IMG NG: The transmission resolution was incorrect so
the transmission was ended.
B.PRT: The job is being printed.
Error code: For details, refer to “Network error list” on
page 11-3.
7
User/Account
Shows the user name or account name that was au-
thenticated.
10-6
200/250/350
Reports and lists
10
10.3 Checking the destinations registered in one-touch
dial buttons (One-Touch List)
You can print a list of the destinations registered with one-touch dial buttons.
Printing the One-Touch List
1
Press the [Utility/Counter] key.
Utility/
Counter
2
3
Touch [Reports].
Touch [One-Touch List].
The one-touch list is printed.
Utility/Counter
Print List
Enter
TX Report
RX Report
Mail Program List
One-Touch List
200/250/350
10-7
Reports and lists
10
Contents of the list
2
1
3
No.
Item
Description
1
Transmission source informa- Shows the name and number of the transmission
tion (TSI)
source.
2
3
Report output date and time
Communication mode
Shows the date and time that the report was printed.
Shows the registered transmission mode. The follow-
ing may appear.
Internet fax: Internet FAX
PC (e-mail): PC (E-MAIL)
FTP: FTP
SMB: SMB
HDD: HDD
IP-TX: IP address faxing
PC(SCANNER): Scan to PC
IP-RELAY: IP relay
Note
“HDD” appears if the optional hard disk
drive is installed.
“IP-TX”, “PC(SCANNER)”, and “IP-RE-
LAY” appear if the optional scanner unit is
installed.
10-8
200/250/350
Reports and lists
10
10.4 Printing the mail program list
You can print the list of mail programs registered with one-touch dial but-
tons.
To print the mail program list
1
Press the [Utility/Counter] key.
Utility/
Counter
2
3
Touch [Reports].
Touch [Mail Program List].
–
If the optional fax kit has been installed, touch [Program List].
The mail program list is printed.
Utility/Counter
Print List
Enter
TX Report
RX Report
Mail Program List
One-Touch List
200/250/350
10-9
Reports and lists
10
Contents of the list
P.1
E-MAIL PROGRAM LIST
2005OCT30(TUE)19:07
TOKYO
PROGRAM NAME : PG-1
INDEX
: TEST01
PROGRAM TYPE : TX
TSI SELECTION: 1(TOKYO)
SUBJECT
: NONE
REPLY E-MAIL : NONE
FILE NAME
: DOCUMENT1
IMAGE QUALITY : FINE
TX STAMP
: OFF
REDUCTION
ROTAION TX
: AUTO ZOOM
: ON
ORIG.SIZE SET : AUTO DETECT
TX REPORT : DEFAULT
PRIORITY TX : OFF
PASSWORD TX : OFF
REMOTE COPY : OFF
BATCH TIME
: OFF
DOUBLE-SIDED: OFF
No.
DESTINATION NAME
No.
DESTINATION NAME
No.
DESTINATION NAME
No.
DESTINATION NAME
#000 TOKYO
#001 OSAKA
#002 NAGOYA
#003 FUKUOKA
10-10
200/250/350
Reports and lists
10
10.5 Checking the function settings (Setting List)
You can print a list of all of the machine functions. Only the administrator can
print the setting list.
Printing the setting list
1
2
3
Press the [Utility/Counter] key, and then enter Administrator mode.
Touch [Admin. 1].
Touch [Print Lists].
Utility/Counter
Administrator Management 1
Enter
Initial
Admin.Set
Setting
Account/
User Auth.
TX Settings
Print Lists
RX Settings
Report
Settings
Document
Management
Memory
Free
100%
4
Touch [Setting List].
The setting list is printed.
Print List
Enter
Setting List
Memory
Free
100%
200/250/350
10-11
11 Scan function
troubleshooting
Scan function troubleshooting
11
11 Scan function troubleshooting
11.1 When the following are displayed
Screen
Cause
Action
POP3 reception fails.
Check that the POP3 user
name and password are cor-
rectly specified.
The administrator is logged
on from a computer on the
network.
Wait until the administrator
operation are completed and
the administrator has logged
out.
If the administrator closes the
Web browser without logging
out, the administrator must log
in again and log off correctly.
Registering in network.
Now resistering the network
settings. All operations
cannot be done. Please
wait a while.
11-2
200/250/350
Scan function troubleshooting
11
11.2 Network error list
When an error occurs such as during a scan transmission, error codes are
displayed on the job list screen and in a report. When an error code is dis-
played, troubleshoot the problem as described below.
Internet fax transmission/Scan to E-Mail
Error code
Cause
Action
E4DXXX
Since the SMTP server ad-
Specify the SMTP server address. Refer
dress is not specified, connec- to page 2-20.
tion to the e-mail server is not
possible.
E5AXXX
E5DXXX
Since the DNS settings are in- Check the DNS settings. Refer to
correct, transmission is not
page 2-15.
possible.
Since the e-mail address or
Check the settings and the destination
the destination e-mail address e-mail address. Refer to page 2-20.
is not specified or is incorrect,
transmission is not possible.
E6FXXX
The data is too large to be
sent.
Even when scanning is complete, trans-
mission may not be possible depending
on the original document. Change the
quality to fine or standard, and then send
the data again.
E7XXXX
EAXXXX
SMTP authentication failed.
Check the SMTP authentication account
and password.
The LAN cable is not connect- Check that the LAN cable is properly
ed, communication to the
SMTP server failed, or trans-
mission was attempted to an
connected, that the SMTP server can
communicate, that the network settings
such as the subnet mask are correct,
incorrect destination address. and that the destination e-mail address
is correct. Refer to page 2-20.
EAX212
EABXXX
SMTP authentication is re-
quested.
Enable the SMTP authentication set-
tings. Refer to page 2-20.
POP3 before SMTP authenti-
cation failed.
Check the POP3 account and password.
Refer to page 2-26.
Internet fax reception
Error code
Cause
Action
E40XXX
Since the POP3 server ad-
Check the POP3 server address. Check
dress is not specified, connec- that the POP3 server is operating prop-
tion to the e-mail server is not erly. Refer to page 2-26.
possible, or connection to the
server is not possible due to
an error in the server.
200/250/350
11-3
Scan function troubleshooting
11
Error code
Cause
Action
E50XXX
E51XXX
E52XXX
Since the POP3 user name or Check the user name and password set-
password is not specified or is tings. Refer to page 2-26.
incorrect, reception is not pos-
sible.
E60XXX
E61XXX
Data incompatible with POP3 Check with the sender.
reception was received. An e-
mail with a file attachment of a
format other than TIFF-F, or
text that exceeds 1,000 char-
acters per line, or large data,
or an e-mail message contain-
ing no data was received.
E7XXXX
ECXXXX
APOP authentication failed.
Check the POP3 account and password.
Refer to page 2-26.
The LAN cable is not connect- Check that the LAN cable is properly
ed, communication to the connected and that the POP3 server set-
POP3 server failed, or the user tings are correct. Refer to page 2-26.
name and password are not
registered in the server and
differ from the settings on this
machine.
Scan to FTP
Error code
Cause
Action
ED09C6
The LAN cable is not connect- Check that the LAN cable is correctly
ed, or the destination address connected. Also, check that the settings
is incorrect.
for the FTP server address, port number,
and proxy server are correctly specified.
ED09C7
ED09C8
The user name or password is Check the user name and password.
incorrect.
The specified folder does not
exist.
Check that the save destination folder
exists and check the folder name.
ED09C9
ED09CA
The FTP server capacity is full. Free up disk space on the FTP server.
An error occurred when data
was being transferred.
Check that the FTP server is operating
properly, or check that the LAN cable is
not broken.
EF09CF
The protocol is incorrect.
Ask the administrator to deactivate the
protocol usage restrictions, or look for
other delivery methods.
ED09CC
EF09CD
EF09D0
The FTP server is malfunction- Check the status of the FTP server.
ing if other than the above.
Available memory is not suffi- Expand the memory of this machine.
cient.
Characters that cannot be
used have been entered.
Change the file name.
11-4
200/250/350
Scan function troubleshooting
11
Scan to SMB
Error code
Cause
Action
ED09C6
The LAN cable is not connect- Check that the LAN cable is correctly
ed, or the destination address connected. Also, check that the settings
is incorrect.
for the destination address and port
number are correctly specified.
ED09C7
ED09C8
ED09C9
ED09CF
The user name or password is Check the user name and password.
incorrect.
The specified folder does not
exist.
Check that the save destination folder
exists and check the folder name.
The disk capacity is full.
Free up the disk space on the corre-
sponding disk.
The protocol is incorrect.
Ask the administrator to deactivate the
protocol usage restrictions, or look for
other delivery methods, or look for other
delivery methods.
ED09CC
SMB transmission malfunc-
tions other than the above
Check the status of the destination de-
vice. A Scan to SMB transmission can-
not be performed with a UNIX or LINUX
system.
EF09CD
EF09D0
Available memory is not suffi- Expand the memory of this machine.
cient.
Characters that cannot be
used have been entered.
Change the file name.
200/250/350
11-5
Scan function troubleshooting
11
11.3 Troubleshooting
Perform the procedures described below to troubleshoot a malfunction.
Internet fax transmission/Scan to E-Mail
Symptom
Cause
Action
Cannot send
The connection is incorrect.
Check the hub LED indicator and check
the connection status.
A user is logging on and send- Register the e-mail address of the user
ing e-mails when a user e-mail who is logging on.
address is not registered.
Required settings for this ma- Specify the required network settings.
chine have not been regis-
tered.
Refer to page 2-4.
The LAN cable is broken.
Other causes
Replace the LAN cable.
Check the communication malfunction
under “Type” in the job list, and refer to
the error code. Refer to page 11-3.
Transmission is
possible, but the
image cannot be
output on the des-
tination terminal
and computer.
The destination terminal does Specify the settings such as the size,
not have the ability to process quality, and encoding method supported
the transmitted image.
by the destination terminal, and then
send the data again. Refer to page 2-36.
No text was inserted into the
transmitted document.
Depending on the e-mail software, at-
tachments cannot be viewed when only
the attachment is sent without text.
Specify the settings to insert text into the
document being sent, and then send the
document again. Refer to page 2-36.
The transmission
cancellation has
been specified, but
it is not canceled.
Time may be required to can- Wait until the job is canceled.
cel an Internet fax.
Internet fax reception
Symptom
Cause
Action
Cannot receive
The connection is incorrect.
Check the hub LED indicator and check
the connection status.
The Auto Receive Check set-
ting is not specified.
Specify the time interval to check recep-
tion automatically. Refer to page 2-30.
Required settings for this ma- Specify the required network settings.
chine have not been regis-
tered.
Refer to page 2-4.
The same POP3 user name is Do not use the same POP3 user name
being used by another e-mail
software and user.
with other e-mail software.
The LAN cable is broken.
Replace the LAN cable.
11-6
200/250/350
Scan function troubleshooting
11
Symptom
Cause
Action
Can be received
but cannot be
printed.
Data in a format that is not
supported is attached, or an
email with no data is received.
Ask the sender to send a TIFF-F file or
text.
The received document has
To print the received document, specify
not been specified to be print- the received document to be printed.
ed.
Refer to page 9-12, page 9-23.
Memory exceeded
Print the saved documents, decrease
the memory usage of this machine, and
then ask the sender to send the data
again.
Other causes
Check the communication malfunction
under “Type” in the job list, and refer to
the error code. Refer to page 11-3
Binary code data is Data is attached in a format
When data is attached in a format other
received (printed).
other than MIME, or the e-mail than MIME, the binary code is printed as
is received via a server that
does not support MIME.
text. (This is not a machine malfunction.)
Ask the sender to send the data in the
MIME format.
The same docu-
ment is received
many times.
Since the size of the e-mail is
too large, a connection time-
out with the server occurs
while the data is being re-
ceived.
From a computer, receive the data as
proxy and delete the corresponding e-
mail from the server. Ask the sender to
decrease the size of the e-mail and to
send it again.
The reception can- Time may be required to can- Wait until the job is canceled.
cellation has been
specified, but it is
not canceled.
cel an Internet fax reception.
The POP3 recep-
tion malfunction
icon does not dis-
appear.
Since the time of the Auto-RX Once the POP3 reception malfunction
has not elapsed since the pre- icon is displayed, it does not disappear
vious time a POP3 reception
failed, POP3 reception is not
performed.
until reception is successful. Specify the
setting to shorten time of the Auto-RX,
and check that POP3 reception is possi-
ble.
Other
Symptom
Cause
Action
An attempt to de-
liver an e-mail mes- specified user to which the
sage has been
made, but trans-
mission fails.
The e-mail address of the
When sending an e-mail message, the e-
mail address must be specified. Register
the email address of the specified user to
which the e-mail message is to be deliv-
ered.
email message is to be deliv-
ered is not registered.
The e-mail mes-
sage is delivered
from this machine,
but it is not deliv-
ered to the for-
warding
The forwarding destination
address is incorrect.
Check the one-touch e-mail address
specified for the forwarding destination.
Other causes
The user e-mail address of the specified
e-mail delivery may have returned an er-
ror e-mail message. Check the contents
of the email message.
destination.
200/250/350
11-7
Scan function troubleshooting
11
Symptom
Cause
Action
“Network Set-
Machine malfunction
Contact your technical representative.
tings” does not ap-
pear on the
Administrator Man-
agement screen.
11-8
200/250/350
12 Appendix
Appendix
12
12 Appendix
12.1 Product specifications
Internet fax specifications
Item
Specifications
E-mail send: SMTP (IETF RFC 2821 and RFC 2822), TCP/IP
Transmission protocol
E-mail receive: POP3 (IETF RFC 1725 and RFC 1939), TCP/IP
Original document sizes
transmitted
Letter w/v, Legal w, 11 × 17 w, A4 w/v, B4 w, A3 w
Resolution
200 × 100 dpi, 200 × 200 dpi, 400 × 400 dpi, 600 × 600 dpi
E-mail format: MIME Attachment format: TIFF-F
MH, MR, MMR
Data format
Encoding method
Compatible cable
Ethernet LAN (100Base-TX, 10BASE-T connection)
Scan to E-Mail specifications
Item
Specifications
Transmission protocol
E-mail send: SMTP (IETF RFC 2821 and RFC 2822), TCP/IP
Original document sizes
transmitted
Letter w/v, Legal w, 11 × 17 w, A4 w/v, B4 w, A3 w
Resolution
200 × 100 dpi, 200 × 200 dpi, 400 × 400 dpi, 600 × 600 dpi
E-mail format: MIME Attachment format: TIFF-F, PDF
MH, MMR
Data format
Encoding method
Compatible cable
Destination registration
Ethernet LAN (100Base-TX, 10BASE-T connection)
Computer e-mail address registration: Up to 540
Scan to FTP specifications
Item
Specifications
Transmission protocol
TCP/IP
Original document sizes
transmitted
Letter w/v, Legal w, 11 × 17 w, A4 w/v, B4 w, A3 w
(Depending on the setting, other sizes can be sent.)
Resolution
200 × 100 dpi, 200 × 200 dpi, 400 × 400 dpi, 600 × 600 dpi
Single-page TIFF, multipage TIFF, PDF
MH, MMR
Data format
Encoding method
12-2
200/250/350
Appendix
12
Item
Specifications
Destination registration
FTP Server address or host name registration: Up to 540
Scan to SMB specifications
Item
Specifications
Transmission protocol
TCP/IP
Original document sizes
transmitted
Letter w/v, Legal w, 11 × 17 w, A4 w/v, B4 w, A3 w
(Depending on the setting, other sizes can be sent.)
Resolution
200 × 100 dpi, 200 × 200 dpi, 400 × 400 dpi, 600 × 600 dpi
Single-page TIFF, multipage TIFF, PDF
MH, MMR
Data format
Encoding method
Destination registration
Destination computer IP address or host name registration: Up
to 540
200/250/350
12-3
Appendix
12
12.2 Entering text
This section contains details on using the keyboard that appears in the touch
panel for typing in passwords and text to register one-touch recipients. The
keypad can also be used to type in numbers.
The following procedure describes how to enter characters in the User Name
screen when registering users for user authentication.
To type text
%
In the keyboard that ap-
peared, touch the button
for the desired charac-
ter.
–
Numbers can also be
typed in with the key-
pad.
–
–
To type in uppercase
letters, touch [Caps].
To cancel Caps
mode, touch [Caps]
again.
12-4
200/250/350
Appendix
12
Note
To cancel the entered text, touch [Cancel].
To clear all entered text, press the [C] (clear) key.
!
Detail
To switch between entering letters or symbols, touch the button for
switching the input mode.
To change a character in the entered text, touch
and
to move
the cursor to the character to be changed, touch [Del.], and then type in
the desired letter or number.
The software switch settings can be used to change how characters are
deleted. For details on the software switch settings, refer to “Specifying
software switch settings (machine functions)” on page 9-29.
If the number of characters exceeds the limit allowed, the last character
is replaced with the last character entered.
List of available characters
Alphanumeric
characters /
(Space)
symbols
200/250/350
12-5
Appendix
12
12.3 Glossary
Term
Definition
10Base-T/100Base-TX/
A standard for Ethernet, which is connected through a cable consist-
ing of twisted copper wire pairs. The transmission speed of 10Base-
T is 10 Mbps, of 100Base-TX is 100 Mbps, and of 1000Base-T is
1,000 Mbps.
1000Base-T
Active Directory
anonymous FTP
APOP
A service that manages all information such as hardware resources
for servers, clients, and printers on a network supported by Micro-
soft and the attributes and access permissions of the users
While normal FTP sites are protected by an account name and pass-
word, this type of FTP site can be used by anyone without a pass-
word by simply entering “anonymous” as the account name.
Abbreviation for Authenticated Post Office Protocol. An authentica-
tion method with encrypted passwords, which results in increased
safety, as compared to the usual unencrypted passwords used by
POP to retrieve e-mail messages
AppleTalk
Auto IP
A generic name for the protocol suite developed by Apple Computer
for computer networking
A function for automatically acquiring the IP address. If acquisition
of the IP address failed with DHCP, an IP address is acquired from
the address space of 169.254.0.0.
bit
Abbreviation for Binary Digit. The smallest unit of information (data
quantity) on a computer or printer. Displays data using 0 or 1.
BMP
Abbreviation for Bitmap. A file format for saving image data, which
uses the .bmp extension. Commonly used on Windows platforms.
You can specify the color depth from monochrome (2 values) to full
color (16,777,216 colors). Images are not usually compressed when
saved.
Byte
Unit of information (data quantity) on a computer or printer. Config-
ured as 1 byte equals 8 bits.
Client
Contrast
A computer that uses the services provided by a server through a
network
The difference in intensity between the light and dark parts of the im-
age (light/dark variation). An image with little light/dark variation is
said to have a low contrast, and an image with large light/dark vari-
ation is said to have a high contrast.
CSV
Abbreviation for Comma-Separated Values. One of the formats for
saving database or spreadsheet data as a text file. (The file extension
is “.csv”.) The data, which is separated by commas (as the delimiter),
can be shared by different applications.
Default
The initial settings. The settings first selected when the machine is
turned on, or the settings first specified when the function is select-
ed.
Default Gateway
Density
A device, such as a computer or router, used as a “gateway” to ac-
cess computers not on the same LAN
An indication of the amount of darkness in the image
12-6
200/250/350
Appendix
12
Term
Definition
DHCP
Abbreviation for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. A protocol in
which a client computer on a TCP/IP network automatically specifies
the network settings from the server. With collective management of
the IP address for DHCP clients on the DHCP server, you can avoid
duplication of an address and you can build a network easily.
DNS
Abbreviation for Domain Name System. A system that acquires the
supported IP addresses from host names in a network environment.
DNS allows the user to access other computers over a network by
specifying host names, instead of difficult to memorize and under-
stand IP addresses.
DPI (dpi)
Driver
Abbreviation for Dots Per Inch. A resolution unit used by printers and
scanners. Indicates how many dots per inch are represented in an
image. The higher the value, the higher the resolution.
Software that works as a bridge between a computer and a periph-
eral device.
Ethernet
LAN transmission line standard
File Extension
The characters added to the file name in order to differentiate file for-
mats. The file extension is added after a period, for example, “.bmp”
or “.jpg”.
FTP
Abbreviation for File Transfer Protocol. A protocol for transferring
files over the Internet or an intranet on the TCP/IP network.
Gateway
Hardware and software used as the point where a network is con-
nected to a network. A gateway also changes data formats, ad-
dresses, and protocols according to the connected network.
Gradation
Grayscale
The light and dark levels of an image. As the number increases,
smoother brightness variations can be reproduced.
Monochrome image expressive form using the gradation information
from black to white
GSS-SPNEGO/Simple/
Digest MD5
Authentication methods for logging on to the LDAP server. The au-
thentication method (GSS-SPENGO, SIMPLE or Digest MD5) for the
LDAP server differs depending on the server being used and the
server settings.
Halftone
The method of producing the light and dark parts of an image
through varying sizes of black and white dots
Hard Disk
Large capacity storage device for storing data. The data can be
stored even if the power is turned off.
Host Name
HTTP
Displayed name of a device over a network
Abbreviation for HyperText Transfer Protocol. A protocol used to
send and receive data between a Web server and a client (Web
browser). Documents containing images, recordings, and video clips
can be exchanged with the expressive form information.
ICM
Abbreviation for Image Color Management. The color management
system used by Windows. Color differences of input/output devices,
such as monitors, scanners and printers, are adjusted to reproduce
colors so that they are nearly the same on any device.
IMAP
Abbreviation for Internet Message Access Protocol. The protocol for
retrieving e-mail messages with the function for managing mailboxes
on the server. Currently, IMAP4 (the fourth version of IMAP) is most
often used.
200/250/350
12-7
Appendix
12
Term
Definition
Install
To install hardware, operating systems, applications, printer drivers
on to a computer
IPP
Abbreviation for Internet Printing Protocol. A protocol that sends and
receives print data and controls printers over the Internet on a TCP/
IP network. Data can also be sent to printers in remote areas to print
over the Internet.
IP Address
J2RE
A code (address) that is used to identify individual network devices
over the Internet. A maximum of three digits for four numbers are
displayed such as 192.168.1.10. IP addresses are assigned to devic-
es, including computers, which are connected to the Internet.
Abbreviation for Java 2 Runtime Environment. One type of JavaVir-
tual Machine (Java VM) in a program operating environment written
in the object-oriented language Java, developed by Sun Microsys-
tems. This is required to run applications that were created with
Java.
Java
A programming language developed by Sun Microsystems, which
runs on most computers, regardless of the installed hardware and
operating system. However, in order to run Java applications, an op-
erating environment called “Java Virtual Machine (Java VM)” is re-
quired.
JPEG
Abbreviation for Joint Photographic Experts Group. One of the file
formats for saving image data. (The file extension is “.jpg”.) The com-
pression ratio is roughly 1/10 to 1/100. This format uses an effective
method in the compression of continuous-tone images, such as
photographs.
Kerberos
A type of network authentication system used by Windows 2000 or
later. Used in Active Directory authentication. Users can be safely
and efficiently authenticated with a two-phase authentication (user
logon and network resource usage) on a dependable site set up on
the network.
LAN
Abbreviation for Local Area Network. A network which connects
computers on the same floor, in the same building, or in neighboring
buildings.
LDAP
Abbreviation for Lightweight Directory Access Protocol. On a TCP/
IP network, such as the Internet or an intranet, this protocol is used
to access a database for managing environment information and the
e-mail addresses of network users.
LPR/LPD
Abbreviation for Line Printer Request/Line Printer Daemon. A print-
ing method over a network in a Windows NT system or UNIX system.
Using TCP/IP, you can output print data from Windows or Unix to a
printer over a network.
MAC Address
Abbreviation for Media Access Control address. With a special ID
number for each Ethernet card, data can be sent and received be-
tween the cards. A number consists of 48 bits. The first 24 bits con-
sist of a special number for each manufacturer controlling and
assigning IEEE. The last 24 bits consist of a number that the manu-
facturer assigns uniquely to the card.
Memory
NetBEUI
Storage device for storing data temporally. When the power is
turned off the data may or may not be erased.
Abbreviation for NetBIOS Extended User Interface. A network proto-
col developed by IBM. By simply specifying the computer name, you
can build a small-scale network.
12-8
200/250/350
Appendix
12
Term
Definition
NetWare
Network operating system developed by Novell. NetWare IPX/SPX
is used as the communication protocol.
MH
Abbreviation for Modified Huffman. A data compression encoding
method for fax transmissions. Documents containing mostly text are
compressed to about 1/10 their original size.
MIB
Abbreviation for Management Information Base. In a TCP/IP trans-
mission, this uses SNMP to define the management information for-
mat for a group of network devices. There are two formats: the
manufacturer-specific private MIB and the standardized MIB.
MMR
NTLM
NTP
Abbreviation for Modified Modified Read. A data compression en-
coding method for fax transmissions. Documents containing mostly
text are compressed to about 1/20 their original size.
Abbreviation for NT LAN Manager. User authentication method used
by Windows NT or later. With the MD4 and MD5 encoding methods,
passwords are encoded.
Abbreviation for Network Time Protocol. The protocol for correctly
adjusting the computer’s internal clock over the network. In a hierar-
chical method, the time is adjusted with the server at the highest lev-
el using GPS to acquire the correct time, which is then referenced by
each lower level host.
OCR
Abbreviation for Optical Character Reader. A device or software that
converts handwritten or printed documents to text data by optically
scanning it and, through comparison with a previously stored pat-
tern, specifies the characters.
OS
Abbreviation for Operating System. Basic software for controlling
the system of a computer.
PASV
Abbreviation for PASsiVe. A mode for connecting to an FTP server
from within a firewall. If this mode is not specified, the firewall will be
considered inaccessible and the connection will be terminated, pre-
venting the file from being sent.
Peer-to-peer
PDF
A network format that allows connected devices to communicate
without using a dedicated server
Abbreviation for Portable Document Format. An electronically for-
matted document which uses the .pdf extension. Based on the Post-
Script format, you can use the free Adobe Acrobat Reader software
to view documents.
Pixel
POP
An image pixel. The smallest unit of an image.
Abbreviation for Post Office Protocol. A protocol for retrieving e-mail
messages from a mail server. Currently, POP3 (the third version of
POP) is most often used.
Port Number
Proxy Server
The number that identifies the transmission port for each process
running on a computer on the network. The same port cannot be
used by multiple processes
A server that is installed to act as an intermediary connection be-
tween each client and different servers to effectively ensure security
over the entire system for Internet connections
200/250/350
12-9
Appendix
12
Term
Definition
RAW port number
The TCP port number used when the RAW protocol is selected for
Windows TCP printing. Usually set to 9100.
Resolution
Preview
Displays the ability to reproduce the details of images and print mat-
ter correctly
A function that allows you to view an image before processing a print
or scan job
Property
Attribute information
When using a printer driver, various functions can be specified in the
file properties.
In the file properties, you can check the attribute information of the
file.
Protocol
The rules that allow computers to communicate with other comput-
ers or peripheral devices
Scanning
With the scanning operation of the scanner, an image is read while
the row of image sensors is gradually moved. The direction that the
image sensors are moved is called the main scanning direction, and
the direction in which the image sensors are arranged is called the
sub-scanning direction.
Screen Frequency
Single-Page TIFF
SMB
Indicates the density of dots used to create the image
A single TIFF file that contains only a single page
Abbreviation for Server Message Block. A protocol that shares files
and printers over a network and which is mainly used by Microsoft
Windows.
SMTP
Abbreviation for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. A protocol for send-
ing and forwarding e-mail.
SNMP
Abbreviation for Simple Network Management Protocol. A manage-
ment protocol in a network environment using TCP/IP.
SSL/TLS
Abbreviation for Secure Socket Layer/Transport Layer Security. The
encoding method for safely transmitting data between the Web serv-
er and browser.
Subnet Mask
TCP/IP
The unit used to divide a TCP/IP network into small networks (sub-
networks). It is used to identify the bits in a network address that are
higher than the IP address.
Abbreviation for Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol.
The defacto standard protocol used by the Internet that uses IP ad-
dresses to identify each network device.
TIFF
Abbreviation for Tagged Image File Format. One of the file formats
for saving image data. (The file extension is “.tif”.) Depending on the
tag indicating the data type, information for various image formats
can be saved in a single image data.
Thumbnail
USB
A small image that shows the contents of the image or document file
(the image displayed when the file was opened)
Abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. A general interface standard
for connecting a mouse, printer, and other devices to a computer.
Uninstall
To delete software installed on a computer
Web Browser
Software such as Internet Explorer and Netscape Navigator for view-
ing Web pages
12-10
200/250/350
Appendix
12
Term
Definition
Zone
A name given in an AppleTalk network. This is used to group multiple
devices on an AppleTalk network.
200/250/350
12-11
Appendix
12
12.4 Index
Numerics
5-15, 5-18, 6-21, 6-25, 8-29
D
2-sided TX ......3-20, 3-23, 4-16, 5-15,
6-21, 8-29, 8-43, 9-6
A
Accessing PageScope Web
Connection ...................................... 8-5
Account track ........................ 2-58, 8-6
Activity Report
................2-36, 8-56, 8-72, 9-18, 9-20
Activity report ................................ 2-37
................3-36, 6-40, 8-12, 8-14, 8-15
Destination name ......3-35, 4-29, 5-28,
Administrator forwarding
.................................... 9-21, 9-36, 9-37
Administrator mode ......................... 8-8
Anonymous .......................... 4-29, 8-13
AppleTalk ......................................... 8-4
Authentication settings ........ 2-46, 8-65
Auto-RX check .......... 2-26, 2-30, 8-69
Auto-RX check interval .................. 8-69
Directory name .................... 4-29, 8-14
Distribution conditions ................... 8-52
Division by page ............................ 8-48
DNS server address ...2-15, 2-17, 8-58
DNS settings .................................. 2-15
Document management ................ 9-23
B
B/W: coding method ..................... 8-48
B/W: file type ................................. 8-48
Binary division ..................... 2-37, 2-42
Binary division size .............. 2-37, 2-42
C
Cache ............................................ 8-10
Certificate .................. 8-82, 8-83, 8-85
Chain dialing function .......... 3-10, 6-11
Domain name
................2-15, 2-17, 2-53, 8-58, 8-65
Domain name registration ..... 8-2, 8-36
Coding Method .........2-31, 2-34, 2-35,
E
3-36, 8-12, 8-14, 8-15, 8-16, 8-48
Com. mode ............................ 8-43, 9-6
Comm. menu settings ..................... 9-9
E-mail address ..................... 2-20, 2-23
12-12
200/250/350
Appendix
E-mail divided transmission time
interval ........................................... 9-47
Internet fax .....................1-7, 6-2, 9-38
Interval of Division Transmission ...8-48
IP address setting ........2-9, 2-10, 8-58
E-mail header text ...............2-36, 2-39
E-mail mode ........................6-14, 8-48
E-mail notification destination
L
E-mail program list ........................10-9
Entering an address .............3-11, 6-12
LDAP search ........................2-44, 8-64
F
FAX program registration .......8-2, 8-28
File name
................3-20, 4-16, 4-25, 5-15, 5-24
File path ...............................5-28, 8-15
Memory lock password
....................................8-46, 9-12, 9-14
Memory lock time ..........................9-12
File type
................2-35, 3-36, 8-12, 8-14, 8-16
File type/coding method ......4-29, 5-28
Forwarding destination
N
FTP configuration ..................8-4, 8-78
FTP port number ............................ 4-29
FTP server address ..............4-29, 8-13
Full mode function ......................... 9-48
Network error list ...........................11-3
G
O
Gateway .................................2-9, 2-12
Gateway TX .........................2-36, 8-72
One-touch ................3-2, 4-2, 5-2, 6-2
One-touch key registration
..............................4-29, 8-2, 8-3, 8-11
One-touch number ..................4-4, 5-4
Operating environment ....................8-5
Other settings ..............8-4, 8-69, 8-72
H
Host address ................................. 5-28
Host name .................2-15, 2-16, 8-58
I
Import ..........................8-3, 8-37, 8-39
Initialize setting .............................. 2-46
P
Page division ........................2-37, 2-42
200/250/350
12-13
Appendix
12
PageScope Web Connection
RX settings ..........8-3, 8-46, 9-2, 9-12
Passive mode setting .................... 8-14
POP3 server address ........... 2-26, 8-69
POP3 Timeout ............................... 8-69
POP3 user name ....... 2-26, 2-28, 8-69
Port .................................................. 8-3
Scan area ....................................... 8-29
Scan mode .................................... 8-48
Search default setting ..........2-44, 8-64
Server address .............................. 2-46
Port number
Priority quality ................................ 8-43
Priority TX
......3-20, 3-25, 4-16, 5-15, 6-21, 8-29
Program name ............................... 8-29
Proxy server ......................... 4-29, 8-13
Q
Quality ...3-15, 4-11, 5-10, 6-16, 8-29
Quality/mode ................................... 9-6
R
Software switches ................. 9-2, 9-29
RAW port number .......................... 8-58
Receiving Internet faxes ................ 6-36
Reduction ...................................... 8-29
Reply address
..........................3-20, 3-29, 6-22, 6-31
Reply address selection ................ 8-30
SSL/TLS settings
..........2-46, 8-4, 8-65, 8-81, 9-2, 9-60
Report output settings
..............................8-3, 8-56, 9-2, 9-18
Stamp settings ..........3-20, 3-27, 4-16,
4-23, 5-15, 5-22, 6-21, 6-29, 8-30
Resending ........3-34, 4-28, 5-27, 6-35
Retype password ................. 8-14, 8-16
Rotation TX ........6-21, 8-29, 8-43, 9-6
RX Doc. header ......... 2-36, 2-38, 8-72
RX Doc. settings ........ 8-52, 9-23, 9-26
Start time ....................................... 8-46
Stop time ....................................... 8-46
Subject .................................3-28, 8-71
Subject Registration ............ 2-36, 2-41
12-14
200/250/350
Appendix
12
Subject/Text ................8-4, 8-69, 8-71
T
TCP/IP ...................................8-4, 8-58
Text ................................................ 8-71
TIFF (multiple), (single) ................... 5-28
Timer RX setting ..................8-46, 9-12
Timer TX setting
......3-20, 3-26, 4-16, 5-15, 6-21, 8-30
To search for a one-touch key
Transmission Report ...................... 8-56
TX Doc. text insert ......................... 8-72
TX forwarding ......................9-21, 9-36
TX quality (max.)
..........................2-31, 2-33, 8-15, 8-48
TX report .........3-20, 3-33, 4-16, 4-27,
5-15, 5-26, 6-21, 8-29, 8-56, 9-18,
10-2
TX size (max.) ...2-31, 2-32, 8-14, 8-48
TX: PC (e-mail) .....................8-11, 8-12
TX: PC (FTP server) ..............8-11, 8-13
TX: PC (SMB) .......................8-11, 8-15
U
User authentication ......2-58, 8-4, 8-89
User name .................5-28, 8-13, 8-15
W
Windows .......................................... 8-4
200/250/350
12-15
Appendix
12
12-16
200/250/350
|